JP2012166059A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine can improving a game property and keeping player's desire to play, regarding the game machine represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine) and a reel game machine (slot machine).SOLUTION: Pattern variable display by a second pattern display means 114 is started in preference to pattern variable display by a first pattern display means 198, and when the pattern variable display by the second pattern display means 114 interrupts to be executed by the establishment of a second pattern variation condition during a first continuous notice, read-ahead notice means 400 and 110 that can execute the first continuous notice even during the pattern variable display. The game machine has at least a function that can execute a second continuous notice continuously until the second number of times, which is smaller than the first number of times, of the pattern variable display and executing the first continuous notice continuously even in the first number of times of the pattern variable display.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out a prize ball.

  In addition, in such a game stand, a lottery of a profit amount to be given to a player is performed, and when winning is awarded to give a large profit amount to a player, a variable prize opening is opened for a predetermined time. . This lottery is performed when a predetermined lottery start condition such that a game ball wins at the start opening is satisfied and a predetermined lottery prohibition condition is not satisfied, and even if a game ball wins at the start opening, the lottery prohibition condition When is established, the lottery is not performed. However, the right to perform the lottery can be held, and if the lottery prohibition condition is not satisfied in the state where the right is held, the lottery is performed based on the held right.

  Furthermore, in the game stand, various effects are performed in order to enhance interest (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-3-73180

  In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document 1, since the effect of informing the player in advance of the result of the lottery is performed, it is possible to improve the interest to some extent, such as making it possible to give the player a sense of expectation. However, there is a risk that players will soon get bored if they do not have a function that can expand the range of games.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can enhance game playability and maintain a player's willingness to play.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object includes a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is satisfied,
Control means capable of controlling at least the symbol display means;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing a prefetch notice when the notice execution condition is satisfied;
In a game machine equipped with
The first symbol display means of the symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display when the first symbol variation condition of the symbol variation conditions is satisfied,
The second symbol display means of the symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display when a second symbol variation condition of the symbol variation conditions is satisfied,
When the first symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display, the control means is capable of controlling to suspend the start of symbol variation display by the first symbol display unit,
When the second symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display, the control means is capable of controlling to suspend the start of symbol variation display by the second symbol display unit,
When the control means starts the symbol variation display being held, if the symbol variation display start is suspended for both of the symbol display means, the symbol by the first symbol display means Control that preferentially starts symbol variation display by the second symbol display means over variation display is possible,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice as a first continuous notice,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice as a second continuous notice,
The pre-reading notice means interrupts the symbol fluctuation display by the second symbol display means before the end of the first consecutive notice because the second symbol fluctuation condition is satisfied during the first successive notice. When executed, the first continuous notice can be executed even during the symbol variation display,
The prefetch notice means is capable of continuously executing the second continuous notice until a second number of symbol fluctuation display less than the first number of times,
The prefetch notice means has at least a function capable of continuously executing the first continuous notice even in the first number of symbol variation displays.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the game performance and maintain the player's willingness to play.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 102 as viewed from the front. (A) shows an example of a special display stop display mode, (b) shows an example of a decorative design, and (c) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the winning acceptance process regarding the 1st special figure starting port 126, and the winning acceptance process regarding the 2nd special figure starting port 128, respectively. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the prize reception process regarding the usual start port 124 and the variable prize opening 130. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 2 related lottery process which CPU304 of the main-control part 300 performs. (A) is a figure which shows the hit determination table which ROM306 of the main control part 300 has memorize | stored, (b) is the special figure determination table at the time of a loss winning, which is memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 (C) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table at the time of winning a small hit which the ROM306 of the main control part 300 has memorize | stored, (d) is the figure which ROM306 of the main control part 300 stores It is a figure which shows the round lottery determination table at the time of jackpot winning which is memorize | stored, (e) shows the special figure high probability state transition determination table at the time of jackpot winning which is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 (F) is a diagram showing a normal high probability state transition determination table at the time of winning the big hit, which is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the timer number determination table which ROM306 of the main control part 300 has memorize | stored, (b) is the pseudo | simulation continuous timer number determination table which ROM306 of the main control part 300 has memorize | stored. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mode of a change of the decoration symbol when a pseudo | simulation is performed once in steps from (a) to (d). It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of a decoration symbol when a pseudo | simulation series is performed twice in order from (a) to (f). It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of a decoration symbol when a pseudo | simulation series is performed 3 times in order from (a) to (h). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 1 related lottery process which CPU304 of the main-control part 300 performs. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of command input processing, (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of symbol stop processing, (d) Is a flowchart showing the flow of strobe interrupt processing, (e) is a flowchart showing the flow of chance button interrupt processing, and (f) is a flowchart showing the flow of variable update interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of flow of a special figure holding | maintenance increase process. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining part which was not shown by FIG. 17 of the flow of a special figure holding | maintenance increase process. (A) is a figure which shows the prior notice determination table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the sub control part 400, (b) is the prior notice / 1st false prior notice number determination memorize | stored in ROM406 of the sub control part 400. It is a figure which shows a table, (c) is a figure which shows the 1st false prior notice determination table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the sub-control part 400. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the 2nd false prior notice determination table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the sub-control part 400, (b) is the 2nd false prior notice number decision memorize | stored in ROM406 of the sub-control part 400. It is a figure which shows a table, (c) is a figure which shows the change production | presentation determination table according to the holding | maintenance increase number memorize | stored in ROM406 of the sub-control part 400. It is a flowchart which shows the one part flow in a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the remaining part in a fluctuation pattern selection process. (A) shows an example of a variable number selection table used when the lose flag is on, and (b) shows an example of a variable number selection table used when the 15R big hit flag is on. (C) shows an example of a variation number selection table used when the small hit flag is on, and (d) shows an example of a variation number selection table used when the 2R big hit flag is on. Is shown. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table used when the variation number selected using FIG. 23 is variation 1 and for determining the type of decoration symbol combination to be stopped, (b) FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table corresponding to fluctuations 2 to 5, and FIG. 5C is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table corresponding to fluctuations 13, 14, and 18. (A) is a figure showing an example of a symbol determination table corresponding to fluctuations 15, 16, and 19, (b) is a figure showing an example of a symbol determination table corresponding to fluctuations 17, 20, and (c ) Is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table corresponding to the fluctuations 21 to 24, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table corresponding to the variation 25. It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the absence of reach. It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in normal reach in steps. It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in long reach in steps. It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration symbol in a full rotation reach in steps. It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in a special full rotation reach in steps. It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in a double line reach in steps. It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in a triple line reach in steps. It is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in a special multiline reach in steps. It is a reference figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration symbol in normal reverse reach. It is a reference figure which shows the mode of the change of the decoration design in normal re-variation reach in steps. It is a figure which shows the mode when a 2R time short special bonus is won in the change of the decorative design without reach. It is a figure which shows a mode that it is a state when winning a small hit in the variation of the decoration symbol in the modification of the double line reach shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that it is a state when winning a small hit in the variation of the decoration pattern in the modification of the triple line reach shown in FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the flow from the change display of the decoration symbol in 2R big hit called hidden probability change to a specific effect, and (b) is called 2R big hit called sudden probability change and suddenly normal. It is a figure which shows the open mode of the door member 1301 of the variable prize opening 130, and the display mode of a specific effect when winning 2R big win or winning a small hit. It is a figure which shows the modification of the open mode of the door member 1301 of the variable winning opening 130, and the display mode of a specific effect at the time of winning a small hit. It is a figure for demonstrating an example which performs alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the example which starts notice notification simultaneously with the change start of a symbol, and complete | finishes notice notification before the decoration design of the left symbol display area 110a stops display. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting alert | report when a long-time symbol fluctuation | variation enters in the symbol fluctuation in the middle in continuous notice. It is a figure which shows the example of the alerting | reporting at the time of performing the pseudo | simulation series based on the lottery of the sub control part in step S509 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of performing the temporary stop in the pseudo | simulation series based on the lottery of a sub control part as a notice alert | report. It is a figure which shows an example in case the production | presentation content of a notice alert | report differs according to a game state. It is a figure which shows the example which added the means to perform alerting | reporting. It is a figure which shows the example which performs alerting | reporting notification with a movable object. It is a figure which shows the example which performs alerting | reporting by transfer to a game effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of a prize order fluctuation | variation in each of the 1st special figure display apparatus 198, the 2nd special figure display apparatus 114, and the decoration symbol display apparatus 110. FIG.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine (game table) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game board (board surface), which will be described later, disposed on the back side of a glass frame 156 composed of a transparent plate member 152 made of glass or resin and a transparent member holding frame 154 through the transparent plate member 152. 102. The game board 102 is attached to an inner frame 103 that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Although not shown in the drawings, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a glass frame opening sensor that detects that the glass frame 156 is opened and an inner frame opening sensor that detects that the inner frame 103 is opened. .

  Below the glass frame 156, a launcher 138 that is rotated by a launcher motor 602, which will be described later, a launcher 140 that is attached to the tip of the launcher 138 and launches a ball toward the game area 104, which will be described later, A launch rail 142 for guiding a ball launched by the heel 140 to an outer rail 106 described later, a storage tray 144 for temporarily storing the ball and supplying the stored ball to the launch rail 142 in sequence, A chance button 146 is provided for changing the effect display by the decorative symbol display device 110, which will be described later, when the player can perform a pressing operation and detects the operation at a predetermined time.

  Further, below the launcher 138 and the launcher 140, an operation handle 148 for controlling the launcher 138 and operating the launch intensity of the sphere toward the game area 104 is disposed. Below the 144, a lower plate 150 is provided for storing overflow balls that cannot be stored in the storage plate 144. In the vicinity of the lower plate in the internal path connecting the storage plate 144 and the lower plate 150, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) is provided. When the lower plate 150 is full from the lower plate full sensor, a lower plate full error is output.

  FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 102 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 102 is provided with an outer rail 106 and an inner rail 108, and a game area 104 in which a game ball (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “ball”) can roll is defined.

  In the center of the game area 104, an effect device 200 is provided. In the effect device 200, a horizontally long decorative symbol display device 110 is disposed substantially at the center, and a normal symbol display device 112, a first special symbol display device 198 which is two types of special symbol display devices, and A second special symbol display device 114, a normal symbol holding lamp 116, a first special symbol holding lamp 199 and a second special symbol holding lamp 118, which are two types of special symbol holding lamps, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 120 are provided. is doing. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The rendering device 200 performs rendering by operating the movable part, and details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 110 is a display device for displaying a decorative symbol (see FIG. 3B) and various images used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 110 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 110 represents the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 198 and the second special symbol display device 114 as a combination of decorative symbols with enhanced effects. It corresponds to an example. The decorative symbol display device 110 shown in FIG. 2 divides the display screen into four display regions, a left symbol display region 110a, a middle symbol display region 110b, a right symbol display region 110c, and an effect display region 110d. 110a, the middle symbol display area 110b, and the right symbol display area 110c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 110d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 110a, 110b, 110c, and 110d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 110. The decorative symbol display device 110 employs other display devices such as a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a drum display device, and a leaf display device instead of the liquid crystal display device. May be.

  The general-purpose display device 112 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image (see FIG. 3C), and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. Each of the first special figure display device 198 and the second special figure display device 114 is a display device for displaying a special figure (see FIG. 3A), and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. . Hereinafter, the symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 198 will be referred to as a special symbol 1 and the symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 114 may be referred to as a special symbol 2.

  The general-purpose hold lamp 116 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are held (details will be described later). In this embodiment, up to two general-purpose variable games can be held. . The special figure 1 hold lamp 199 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure 1 variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, up to four special figure 1 variable games are reserved. It is possible. The special figure 2 hold lamp 118 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure 2 variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, up to four special figure 2 variable games are also held. It is possible. The high-probability lamp 120 indicates that the gaming state is a special figure high probability state (a gaming state in which the winning probability of a jackpot game described later is set higher than the normal probability) or a special figure high probability state. This lamp is turned on when the gaming state is changed from a special figure low probability state (a gaming state in which the winning probability of the big hit game described later is set to a normal probability) to a special figure high probability state, and the special figure high probability state. Turns off when switching to a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 122, a normal figure starting opening 124, a first special figure starting opening 126, a second special figure starting opening 128, and a variable winning opening 130 are arranged around the rendering device 200. Yes. In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged on the game board 102, and a predetermined ball detection sensor (general winning hole sensor) indicates that a game ball has entered (entered) the general winning opening 122. When it is detected (when the general winning opening 122 is won), a payout device 552 to be described later is driven, and a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of balls is discharged as a winning ball to the storage tray 144 shown in FIG. . The ball discharged to the storage tray 144 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 122 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The usual start port 124 is called a gate or a through chucker. The ball that has entered (entered) the normal start port 124 passes through a predetermined region connected to the normal start port 124 in the game area. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 122, the ball that entered the normal start port 124 is not discharged to the amusement island side. The game board 102 is provided with a predetermined ball detection sensor (gate sensor) for detecting a ball passing through the predetermined area. When the gate sensor detects a game ball, the pachinko machine 100 displays a normal display. The usual figure variation game by the device 112 is started.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 126 is disposed at the center of the game board 102. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (first start port sensor) detects that a game ball has entered (entered) the first special figure start port 126, a payout device 552 described later is driven and a predetermined number (the number) In the embodiment, three balls are discharged as prize balls to the storage tray 144 shown in FIG. 1, and the special figure 1 variable game by the first special figure display device 198 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 126 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 128 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 126. In the vicinity of the second special figure start port 128, a pair of blade members 1281 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided, and the pair of blade members 1281 and the second special figure start port 128 are combined with an electric tulip ( Sometimes referred to as “Den Chu”. The pair of blade members 1281 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 128. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 128 with the pair of blade members 1281 closed. On the other hand, when the common figure variable game is won and the universal figure display device 112 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 1281 opens and closes a predetermined number of times at a predetermined time interval, and the second special figure starting port 128 is opened. It becomes possible to enter the ball. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (second start port sensor) detects that a game ball has entered (entered) the second special figure start port 128, the payout device 552, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number of In the embodiment, 5 balls) are discharged as prize balls to the storage tray 144 shown in FIG. 1, and the special figure 2 variable game by the second special figure display device 114 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 128 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 130 is disposed below the center of the game board 102. The variable winning opening 130 is made into a state where a ball can be entered or a state where it is impossible to enter a ball by a door member 1301 which can be opened and closed by a solenoid. In other words, while the door member 1301 is closed, it is impossible to enter the variable prize opening 130, but when the special figure 1 variable game is won and the first special figure display device 198 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, Alternatively, when the special figure 2 variable game is won and the second special figure display device 114 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 1301 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the variable winning opening 130 is displayed. Can be entered. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the door member 1301 performs an opening / closing operation with an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds (however, when the tenth ball enters the variable winning opening 130), When performing 15 times continuously (hereinafter referred to as 15 rounds), when performing an open / close operation with an opening time of 0.9 seconds and a closing time of 0.2 seconds twice (hereinafter referred to as 2 cases in this case). Called round). The variable winning opening 130 may be called a big winning opening, and the door member 1301 and the variable winning opening 130 may be collectively called an attacker. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (count sensor) detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 130, a payout device 552, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number of balls (15 balls in this embodiment) are shown as winning balls. 1 is discharged to the storage tray 144 shown in FIG. The ball that has entered the variable prize opening 130 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 132 and game nails 134 called windmills are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 108, An out port 136 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the storage tray 144 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail 142, drives the launch motor 602 with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle 148, The launcher 138 and the launcher 140 are passed through the outer rail 106 and the inner rail 108 to launch into the game area 104. Here, in order not to reduce the euphoria or to maintain the durability of the member, for example, it is configured not to be able to fire 100 or more shots per minute. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 104 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 132, the game nail 134, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 122, variable winning opening 130) or starting opening (First special figure start port 126, second special figure start port 128), or the out port 136 without winning any of the winning port and start port, or just passing the normal start port 124 To reach. The time until the launched game ball reaches the start port varies depending on the position of the start port and the arrangement of obstacles such as the game nail 134 and the hitting direction changing member 132, but the start port provided at the approximate center of the board surface Takes as long as a few seconds (eg 2 seconds).

<Director>
Next, the rendering device 200 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  A movable member 210, a warp device 230, and a front stage 234 are disposed on the front side of the effect device 200, and a decorative symbol display device 110 and a shielding unit 250 are disposed on the rear side of the effect device 200. . That is, in the rendering device 200, the decorative symbol display device 110 and the shielding means 250 are located behind the warp device 230 and the front stage 234.

  The movable member 210 is a member imitating a human arm, and is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 110 in FIG. The movable member 210 is operated by a solenoid (not shown) swinging rattlingly from the elbow part, lifting the forearm part from the elbow part, or lifting the entire upper arm part from the shoulder part Etc. are possible.

  The warp device 230 discharges the game ball that has entered the entrance 232 provided at the upper left of the effect device 200 to the front stage 234 below the front surface of the effect device 200, and the game ball discharged to the front stage 234 is the front surface. When the player enters the second entrance 236 provided at the rear of the center of the stage 234, the game ball is discharged from the outlet 238 provided in the lower center of the stage device 200 above the first special figure starting port 126. It is discharged toward the first special figure starting port 126. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 238 is easy to enter the first special figure starting port 126.

  The shielding means 250 includes a lattice-like left door 250a and right door 250b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 110 and the front stage 234. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 250a and the right door 250b. That is, the left door 250a and the right door 250b move to the left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left and right doors 250a and 250b are closed, the shielding means 250 covers the inner end portions of the doors 250a and 250b so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 110. In the state where the left and right doors 250a and 250b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 110, but the player can visually recognize all of the displays on the decorative symbol display device 110. . Further, the left and right doors 250a and 250b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative design is shielded so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. You can do that. Note that the left and right doors 250a and 250b may make it possible to visually recognize a part of the decorative pattern display device 110 behind the lattice hole, or block the shoji part of the lattice hole with a translucent lens body to decorate the rear. The display by the symbol display device 110 may be vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 110 at the rear may be completely invisible. .

<Type of design>
3A to 3C, the first special figure display device 198, the second special figure display device 114, the decorative symbol display device 110, and the universal figure display device 112 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  Fig.3 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 126, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 128. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 198 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 114 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. When the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 198 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 3A shows ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 3 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” are in the same state as “special drawing F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 110 are different among these three, and even in the same state, By providing "G", "Special Figure H", and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Further, “Special Figure I” is the first lose symbol, and “Special Figure J” is the second lose symbol. Both of these are losing symbols, and the amount of profit given to the player is relatively small, and there is no difference in the amount of profit between the two, but the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 110 is different, By providing “Special Figure I” and “Special Figure J”, the interest of the game is enhanced here.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 3B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor has detected that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 126, or the second start port sensor has detected that a ball has entered the second special figure start port 128. On the condition that the ball has won the first special figure start port 126 or the second special figure start port 128, the left symbol display area 110a, the middle symbol display area 110b, and the right symbol display area 110c of the decorative symbol display device 110. The display is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “decorative display of decorative design”. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 110a to 110c is arranged. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “normal figure F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying of the “special symbol I” or “special symbol J” loss, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 110a to 110c.

  FIG.3 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general diagram B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 124, the general display display device 112 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “general figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the loss of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 3C as well, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be broadly classified according to a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A sub-control unit 400 that controls effects, a payout control unit 550 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls in response to commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a launch control unit 600 that controls the launch of game balls. And a power management unit 650 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM (RWM) 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 313 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. It is installed. Note that other storage means may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 314b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 314a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). A sensor circuit 320 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 318 and outputting a result of amplification and comparison with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 316 and the basic circuit 302; A display circuit 322 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 198 and the second special figure display device 114, a display circuit 324 for performing display control of the general figure display device 112, and various status display units 326 ( Display map 116, special figure 1 hold lamp 199, special figure 2 hold lamp 118, high accuracy medium lamp 118, etc.) And 示回 path 328 connects the solenoid circuit 332 for controlling the solenoids 330 for opening and closing the second Japanese view start hole 128 and the variable winning hole 130 or the like. Various sensors 318 shown in FIG. 4 include the glass frame opening sensor, the inner frame opening sensor, the lower pan full tank sensor, etc., and the above-described general prize opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, a gate sensor, a first start opening sensor, A second start port sensor, a count sensor, and the like are included.

  When the ball detection sensor 318 as the first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 126, the sensor circuit 320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 316. Output to. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 316 latches the value at the timing of the special figure 1 winning counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 126, and the latched value corresponds to the first special figure start port 126. And stored in a built-in winning counter value storage register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 316 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 128, the counter circuit 316 of the special figure 2 winning counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128 also has its counter. The value at the timing is latched, and the latched value is stored in a built-in winning counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128.

  Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external game shop computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output.

  The main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 336 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 650 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 336 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, main control unit main processing described later is started.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 550. With this configuration, the sub-control unit 400 In addition, communication with the payout control unit 550 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 550 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 550. However, the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 550 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a control program, ROM 406 for storing various data, RAM (RWM) 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time and frequency A counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 418 for controlling the speaker 416 (and amplifier), a display circuit 422 for controlling various lamps 420, and a movable body for rendering (eg, movable) of the rendering device 200. Effect driving device control circuit 426 for controlling various effect driving devices 424 including a solenoid or a motor that is a driving device for driving member 210 and shielding means 250), etc., and a decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display) Apparatus) a decorative symbol display control unit 500 for controlling 110 and a chance button detection circuit 380 that detects the pressing of the chance button 146 and outputs a signal.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 550, the launch control unit 600, and the power supply management unit 650 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 550 controls the payout device 552 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and the payout of the winning ball or the rental ball is completed based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 554. It is detected whether or not the card unit 654 is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 556.

  The firing control unit 600 determines the amount of operation of the launch handle 148 by the player, which is output from the control signal instructing permission or stop of launch output from the payout control unit 550, or the launch intensity output circuit provided in the operation handle 148. Based on the control signal instructing the corresponding launch intensity, the launch motor 602 that drives the launcher 138 and the launcher 140 is controlled, and the ball feeder 604 that supplies the balls from the storage tray 144 to the launch rail 142 is controlled. .

  The power management unit 650 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the sub control unit 400, and the devices such as the dispensing device 552. To supply. Further, the power management unit 650 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. Capacitor).

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 5 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O port 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 313 Allow operation and set initial values. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 313 as an initial value.

  In step S102, the value of the counter of WDT 313 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 313 is restarted.

  In step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 650 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 336 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply has been shut off), the process returns to step S102. If the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 has not detected the power supply being cut off), the process proceeds to step S102. The process proceeds to S104. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S102, and step S103 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S104, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a sub-port) Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption), and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S107).

  Specifically, whether or not a RAM clear signal transmitted when a RAM clerk or the like of a game store first operates a RAM clear switch provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that there has been an operation), That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S107 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S107 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S106 to return to the state before power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S107 in order to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S107.

  In step S106, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in steps S108 and S109) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S106, EH is set as a power recovery command in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400 in step S217 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S107, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S107) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Similar to the power recovery command, the sub-control in step S217 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 is performed. Transmitted to unit 400.

  In step S108, after setting for interrupt inhibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, the special figure winning random number counter, the special figure random value counter, the special figure 1 round decision random number counter, the special figure 2 round decision random number counter, the special figure 1 short time decision random number counter, and the special figure 2 short time decision The initial value generation random number counter for generating the initial value of the determined random number counter is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as random values is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value and then the original value is obtained. Store in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Further, after this basic random number initial value update process is completed, an interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to step S109.

  In step S109, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S108 and S109 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to perform main control unit timer interrupt processing. Start with a period of

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S202, WDT is periodically performed (this implementation is performed so that a WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of WDT 313 exceeds an initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (processing abnormality is not detected)). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 318 including the above-mentioned glass frame opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors via the input port of the I / O 310. Is input and monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area that is partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area that is partitioned and provided for each sphere detection sensor in the previous timer interruption process (about 2 ms before). Information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each detected sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. To do. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S203, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S203 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S203, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 122, the variable winning port 130, the first special figure starting port 126, and the second special figure starting port 128, or the ordinary starting port 124. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning openings 122 and 130 and these starting openings 124, 126 and 128. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor that detects the winning at the general winning opening 122, there is a winning at the general winning opening 122. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning a prize in the mouth 122. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S204 and step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in the above step S108 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Special figure 1 random value, special figure 2 random value, special figure 1 round decision random value, special figure 2 round decision random value, special figure 1 short time random number value, and special figure 2 short time random number value Update the random number counter. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S206, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer updating process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 112, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 198 are counted. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing / stopping the symbol display on the second special symbol display device 114, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S208, winning prize counter updating processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 122, 130 and starting holes 124, 126, 128 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning slot or each starting slot. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S209, a winning acceptance process (details will be described later) is performed.

  In step S210, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 550 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), and power supply in bit 6 Input information (indicating that it is the first command transmission after power-on when turned on), bits 4-5 for the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 for encryption processing The number of subsequent payout requests is indicated.

  In step S211, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 112 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 112 performs a general variable display (general variable game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 112 is turned on / off, and the hit flag is off, the general-purpose display device 112 is configured to display a lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 112 determines the symbol of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 3 (c)) or the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 3 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 1281 is opened to a solenoid (330) for opening and closing the blade member 1281 of the second special figure starting port 128 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 1281 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 330 for opening / closing driving of 1281, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S212.

  In step S212, a general drawing related lottery process (details will be described later) is performed.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S213). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 114 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special figure display device 114 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game).

  As will be described in detail later, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lose flag, a second lose flag, and a special figure probability. A flag for each of a variation flag and an ordinary probability variation flag is prepared. In the following description, the first small hit and the second small hit are simply referred to as small hits without any particular distinction, and the first and second loses are simply referred to as loses without any particular distinction. is there. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 3A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first lose flag are on. In this case, when the special figure I and the second loss flag are on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 114 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure J is in an aspect. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 114 is able to display the 15R special jackpot symbol (Special Fig. A), the 15R big jackpot symbol (Special Fig. B), the sudden probability variation symbol (Special Fig. C), the sudden short time symbol (Special Fig.). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols I) and the second lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  In addition, in order to execute the general command rotation stop setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S217), 4H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the transmission information storage area described above, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big symbol by the decorative symbol display device 110 will start. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S217).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 130.) The door member 1301 is opened to the solenoid (330) for driving to open / close the door member 1301 of the variable winning opening 130. A signal for maintaining the state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command big prize opening setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S217).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 1301 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (330) for opening and closing the door member 1301 of the variable prize opening 130, and the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. Further, 8H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S217).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member 1301 is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 so as to wait for the period during which an image for informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 110 is displayed. Set information indicating the period. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. In the ordinary high probability state, compared to the ordinary low probability state, if the common figure variable game is hit, there is a high possibility that the variation time will be shortened. Also, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game is shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 1281 shown in FIG. 2 is likely to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 1281 are more likely to be opened in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 128 during the big hit game until a predetermined number of game balls are entered in the variable winning opening 130. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S217).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is the first lose, the first lose flag is turned on as will be described later, and if the second lose is the second lose flag, the second lose flag is turned on. When these lost flags are on, the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S214.

  Subsequently, a special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 is performed (step S214), and then a special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed. After performing (step S215), this time, a special figure related lottery process (special figure 1 related lottery process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S216). Although details of the special figure 2 related lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process will be described later, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process. By doing this, even if the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Do not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 110 is performed by the sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 128 is notified, This is prioritized over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 126. Moreover, in the special figure 1 state update process in step S215, each process demonstrated by the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process in step S213 is performed according to the state of special figure 1. FIG. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. Following the special figure 2 state update process in step S213, the special figure 1 state update process is performed first, followed by the special figure 2 related lottery process, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process. Also good. As described above, when the special figure state update process is performed prior to the special figure related lottery process, the order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  In step S217, which is performed following the special drawing 1-related lottery process in step S216, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command types ( 0H is a basic command, 1H is a symbol change start command, 4H is a symbol change stop command, 5H is a winning effect start command, 6H is an end effect start command, and 7H is a big hit number of rounds Designated command, information for specifying the type of command such as a power recovery command for EH and a RAM clear command for FH, and bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to command type) It is composed.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag values, special figure probability variation flag values, common figure probability variation flag values, and special figure related lottery processing. It includes information indicating the timer number to be selected, stop symbol, etc., and in the case of a symbol variation stop command, includes a value of 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, special diagram probability variation flag, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 126, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 128, winning of the variable winning port 130 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command type is 1H, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the value of the big hit flag, 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, special figure probability variation flag, Figure probability fluctuation flag value, timer number and stop symbol selected in special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 related lottery process, first special figure variable game hold number increase information and / or special figure 2 variable game hold Set number increase information. The information on the increase in the number of reservations is information indicating the number of reservations increased from the previous transmission of the symbol variation start command to the current transmission, and is not set when the increased number of reservations is zero. In other words, in the present embodiment, every time there is a prize in the command data transmitted to the sub-control unit 400, the hold increase information of the first special figure variable game and the hold increase information of the special figure 2 variable game are set. Instead, information indicating the number of holdings increased from the previous lottery to the current lottery in the special drawing related lottery processing (holding number increase information) is set in the data of the symbol variation start command (1H). In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command type and 4H is set. . In the above-described general command winning effect setting transmission process, the command type is 5H, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, and the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 110, various lamps 423, and the speaker 416 during the winning effect period. The information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag is set. In the above-mentioned general command end effect setting transmission process, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 110, the various lamps 423, and the speaker 416 during the effect waiting period, stored in the RAM 308 as command type 6H and command data. The information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag is set. In the above-mentioned general command big prize opening release transmission process, information indicating 7H for the command type, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. is set for the command data. In the above-mentioned general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the command type 8H, command data storing the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are set. In addition, the data of the winning effect start command (5H), the data of the end effect starting command (6H), and the data of the big hit round number designation command (7H) are respectively held in the first special figure variable game or the second special game. Information indicating the number of figure-changing games is not set, and the information related to the holding is the above-described two types of information of the holding number increase information of FIG. 1 and the holding number increase information of FIG. Is set only to the data of the symbol variation start command (1H) among the data of all the commands transmitted to.

  In the sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command data included in the output schedule information Based on this information, the contents of the effect control can be determined.

  In step S218, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 that is separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 203 are read out to monitor whether there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error, and so on. When a full tank error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. Further, various solenoids 330 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 128 and the variable prize opening 130, and the general diagram display device 112 and the first special figure display via the display circuits 322, 324 and 328. Display data to be output to the device 198, the second special figure display device 114, the various status display unit 326, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S210) is output to the sub-control unit 400 via the output port 310.

  In step S220, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221. When the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S222.

  In step S221, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, or interrupt permission is set, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. To do.

  On the other hand, in step S222, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Prize acceptance process>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, the winning acceptance process in step S209 in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the respective flows of the winning acceptance process for the first special figure starting port 126 and the winning acceptance process for the second special figure starting port 128.

  First, a winning acceptance process for the first special figure starting port 126 is performed. In step S1101 shown in FIG. 7, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 126. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203 shown in FIG. If there is a winning, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if there is no winning, the process proceeds to step S1201 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In step S1102, the special figure 1 hold number storage area of the RAM 308 is referenced to determine whether or not the number of special figure 1 variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). If less, the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, a value is acquired as a special figure 1 winning random number value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 316 corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126. As described above, the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 316 shown in FIG. 4 has a special feature of the counter circuit 316 at the reception timing of the signal sent when the first start port sensor detects the game ball. FIG. 1 A value (hardware random number value) latched in the winning counter is stored. The hardware random number value (Special Figure 1 winning random number value) acquired here is used to determine whether or not it is a big hit in the Special Figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S216) described in detail later. Further, a value is acquired as a special figure 1 random value from the above-mentioned special figure 1 random number generation random number counter. The random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value is the value (software random number value) updated in step S205 shown in FIG. The software random number value (Special Figure 1 random value) acquired here is used to determine whether or not it is a special big hit (probability big hit) of Special Figure 1 in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S216). In addition, a special figure 1 round decision random value and a special figure 1 short time decision random value which are software random numbers are also acquired. Further, in this step S1103, the value of the special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is updated. That is, 1 is added to the value in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. When the execution of step S1103 ends, the process proceeds to step S1104.

  On the other hand, if the number of special figure 1 variable games on hold is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S1201 shown in FIG. Absent. In step S1103, adding 1 to the value in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area of the RAM 308 corresponds to counting the number of rights to be drawn in the special figure 1 related lottery process. Here, the right is reserved. It doesn't mean that

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a random value storage area shown in FIG. In step S1104, the four types of values acquired in step S1103 (the special figure 1 winning random value, the special figure 1 random value, the special figure 1 round decision random value, and the special figure 1 random number value) are stored in the random value storage area in FIG. FIG. 1 stores a short-term random number value). The random number value storage area in FIG. 1 is further divided into four areas corresponding to the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games. In this step S1104, the above four types of values are grouped together. Stored in an unstored area. That is, the random number value acquired in step S1103 is stored in a storage area determined based on the number of first special figure variable games held in the random value storage area of special figure 1. When the execution of step S1104 ends, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, information indicating an increase in the holding of the first special figure variable game (special figure 1 holding increase) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308. In the general command rotation start setting transmission process executed in the command setting transmission process (step S217), the symbol variation start command is referred to by referring to the information indicating the special figure 1 suspension increase stored in the transmission information storage area. Can be obtained from the previous transmission to the current transmission (from the previous lottery in the special figure 1 lottery process until the current lottery).

  Next, a winning acceptance process for the second special figure starting port 128 is performed. Each step from step S1201 to step S1205 shown in FIG. 7 replaces “first” in each step from step S1101 to step S1105 shown in FIG. It is the same as the step read as “2”. Here, only matters related to the hold will be described, and descriptions of other items will be omitted.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In step S1202, the special figure 2 reserved number storage area of the RAM 308 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment). If less, the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, the special figure 2 winning random number value, the special figure 2 random value, the special figure 2 round decision random value, and the special figure 2 short time decision random value are acquired, and the special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is stored. Update the value. In this step S1203, the value of the special figure 2 reserved number storage area is updated by adding 1 to the value of the special figure 2 reserved number storage area of the RAM 308. The update of this value corresponds to counting the number of rights to perform lottery in the special drawing 2 related lottery process, and here, the right is not suspended.

  In step S1205, the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 additionally stores information indicating an increase in the second special figure variable game hold (a special figure 2 hold increase). In the general command rotation start setting transmission process executed in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S217), the symbol variation start command is referred to by referring to the information indicating the special figure 2 suspension increase stored in the transmission information storage area. Can be obtained from the previous transmission to the current transmission (from the previous lottery in the special figure 2 related lottery process until the current lottery).

  When the winning acceptance process related to the second special figure starting port 128 shown in FIG. 7 is completed, the winning receiving process related to the normal start port 124 and the variable winning port 130 shown in FIG. 8 is performed. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a flow of winning acceptance processing relating to the universal start opening 124 and the variable winning opening 130. In step S1301 shown in FIG. 8, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the normal opening 124. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203 shown in FIG. If there is a winning, the process proceeds to step S1302, and if there is no winning, the process proceeds to step S1306. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the number of pending custom variable games stored in the RAM 308 is less than a predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment) by referring to the reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308. If not, the process proceeds to step S1303. On the other hand, if the number is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S1306, and the lottery based on the winning at the normal start port 124 at this time is not performed.

  In step S1303, a value is acquired as a normal winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number described above. The random number for generating the regular winning random number value is the value (software random number value) updated in step S205 shown in FIG. This software random number value obtained here (normal figure winning random number value) is a hit determination that determines whether the result of the general figure variable game is won or not in the general figure related lottery process (step S212). Used for. When the execution of step S1303 ends, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random value storage area for ordinary use. In step S1304, the normal winning random number value acquired in step S1303 is stored in the random number storage area for normal use. The random number value storage area for ordinary maps is further divided into two areas corresponding to the number of suspensions of the ordinary figure variable game. In this step S1304, the random number value for winning the ordinary figure is not determined from the two areas. Store in the storage area. That is, the winning random number value acquired in step S1303 is stored in a storage area that is determined based on the number of holdings of the floating figure variable game in the random number value storage area for normal charts. When the execution of step S1304 ends, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, in order to cause the command setting transmission process (step S217) to execute the general command usual figure hold increase setting process, the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 transmits CH, which is information indicating the usual figure hold increase. It is additionally stored as (command type).

  In step S <b> 1306, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning opening 130. Here, the determination is also made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203 shown in FIG. If there is a win, the process proceeds to step S1307. If there is no win, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a prize storage area for a variable prize opening. In step S 1307, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 130 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S1308, in order to execute the general command variable winning award winning process in the command setting transmission process (step S217), DH, which is information indicating the variable winning award winning, is transmitted to the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 as transmission information ( After additional storage as the command type), the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

<Special drawing related lottery processing>
Next, the special drawing 2 related lottery processing in step S214 in the main control unit timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure 2 related lottery process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

  First, in step S2101, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display setting (details will be described later) set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and in the special figure 1 state update process in step S215 in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A determination is made regarding the setting during stop display set in the setting area of the RAM 308. That is, in step S2101, the setting area of the RAM 308 is referred to determine whether or not the special figure 1 display device 198 is displaying the special figure 1 fluctuation display or the stop display, and any of the display is in progress. If there is, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In step S2102, in the special figure 2 variable display set in the setting area of the RAM 308 in step S2131, which will be described later, and in the special figure 2 state update process in step S213 in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A determination is made regarding the setting during stop display set in the setting area. In step S2102, the setting area of the RAM 308 is referred to, and it is determined whether the special figure 2 display device 114 is in the special figure 2 variable display or the stop display, and either one is being displayed. In such a case, the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 6, and if any of the displays is not being performed, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is operating or the special figure 1 is operating (step S2103). As described above, in the special figure 2 state update process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interruption process of FIG. 6, special figure 2 in operation or special figure 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Further, in the special figure 1 state update process (step S215) in the main control unit timer interruption process of FIG. 6, the special area 1 is activated or the special figure 1 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. In both the special figure 2 state update process (step S213) and the special figure 1 state update process (step S215) in the main control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 6, the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small When one of the hit flag and the second small hit flag is on, the timing at which the predetermined stop display period ends (the special timer 2 or the special figure 1 stop time management timer value is changed from 1 to 0). Is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer becomes 1 to 0) ) Is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 to be in the special figure 2 or special figure 1 inactive state. When the first loss flag or the second loss flag is on, the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 or special figure 1 stop time management timer becomes 1 to 0) ) Is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 to be in the special figure 2 or special figure 1 inactive state. In step S2103 shown in FIG. 9, the setting area of RAM 308 is referred to, whether special figure 2 in operation is set or whether special figure 1 is in operation is set, and there is any setting. Return to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6, and if there is no setting, the process proceeds to step S2104.

  Each condition from step S2101 to step S2103 described above corresponds to an example of the lottery prohibition condition referred to in the present invention. The lottery result of the special figure 2 or special figure 1 variable game is notified by the fixed display (stop display) through the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 110. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 110, the period from the start of the variable display to the final display (stop display) may be referred to as a symbol variation stop display. If the lottery result is a big hit or a small win, an effect display is made on the symbol display device 110 following the confirmation display. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the display on the symbol display device 110 ends. Even if the lottery result is a loss, the effect display may be performed on the symbol display device 110. Conversely, when the lottery result is a small hit, the symbol display device 110 does not perform the effect display on the symbol display device 110. The display at may be terminated. In the present embodiment, if any one of the variable display, the fixed display (stop display), and the effect display is displayed on the symbol display device 110, the lottery prohibition condition is satisfied, and any display If no lottery has been performed and no lottery has been performed, the lottery prohibition condition is not satisfied.

  In step S2104 executed after step S2103 shown in FIG. 9, the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the holding number of the special figure 2 variable game is larger than zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games being held is 1 or more, and if it is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the number of the special figure 2 variable games on hold is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S2105 to make a winning determination. The condition in step S2104 corresponds to an example of the lottery start condition referred to in the present invention. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for starting the lottery is that the number of rights to perform the lottery in the special drawing 2 related lottery process is 1 or more. This is based on the condition that the game ball enters the second special figure starting port 128.

  In this embodiment, when the lottery prohibition condition from step S2101 to step S2103 is satisfied and the lottery start condition in step S2104 is also satisfied, the right to perform the lottery in the special drawing 2 related lottery process is reserved. become.

  In step S2105, the special figure 2 winning random number value is acquired from the random value storage area of the special figure 2 in the RAM 308, and a hit determination is performed on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value. In the random number value storage area of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 winning random number value, which is a hardware random value, is stored in step S1204 in the winning acceptance process for the second special figure starting port 128 shown in FIG. . In this step S2105, the special figure 2 winning random value is acquired, and using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 10A, the special figure 2 variable game lottery is performed for the special figure 2 winning random value, and the process proceeds to step S2106. move on.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram showing a hit determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has a special low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot after the special figure 2 variable game or after the special figure 1 variable game, and a relatively high special figure high probability. One of the states. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure probability variation flag described later is prepared. When the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability variation), and when the special figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, it is a special figure low probability state.

  In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the special figure 2 variable gaming state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state), the second special figure start opening big hit data and the second special figure start opening small The relationship with each hit data is specified. In the hit determination in step S2105 shown in FIG. 9, if the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value belongs to the numerical range of the second special figure start opening jackpot data shown in the hit determination table of FIG. If the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, it is determined to be a win.

  Here, referring to the special figure probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, if the special figure 2 variable gaming state is the special figure low probability state, and the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value is 20001 to 20187, the special figure Two wins are determined to win the game. Further, when the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value is 65001, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable game has been won. On the other hand, when the acquired special figure 2 winning random number is a numerical value other than 20001-20187 and 65001, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable game is lost. In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure 2 winning random number can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical range indicated by the lottery data for the second special figure starting port in the special figure low probability state is Since 20001 to 20187 (the numerical range is 187), the winning probability of the special figure 2 variable game based on the winning of the ball to the second special figure starting port 128 in the special figure low probability state is about 1/350. .4 (= 187/65536). On the other hand, the numerical range indicated by the lottery data for the second special figure starting port in the special figure high probability state is 40001 to 41310 (the size of the numerical range is 1310), and the second special figure in the special figure high probability state. The winning probability of the special figure variation game based on the winning of the ball at the starting opening 128 is about 1 / 50.0 (= 1310/65536), and the special figure 2 based on the winning of the ball at the second special drawing starting opening 128 is shown. The winning probability of the variable game is higher in the special figure high probability state than in the special figure low probability state.

  Further, in the hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the special figure 1 variable gaming state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state), the first special figure start opening jackpot data and the first special figure start. The relationship with each mouthpiece data is also specified. In the jackpot determination for the special figure 1 winning random value using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 10A, the special figure probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 1 variable game state is low in the special figure. In the case of the probability state, when the special figure 1 winning random number value is 10001 to 10187, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, when the acquired special figure 1 winning random number value is 50001 to 51092, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won by a small hit. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 winning random number is a numerical value other than 10001 to 10187 and 50001 to 51092, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is lost. In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the special figure 1 winning random number value is also 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value indicated by the lottery data for the first special figure starting port in the special figure low probability state. Since the range is 10001 to 10187 (the size of the numerical range is 187), the winning probability of the special figure 1 variable game based on the winning of the ball to the first special figure starting port 126 in the special figure low probability state is about 1 /350.4 (= 187/65536). On the other hand, the numerical value range indicated by the lottery data for the first special figure start port in the special figure high probability state is 30001 to 13310 (the numerical value range is 1310), and the first special figure in the special figure high probability state. The winning probability of the special figure 1 variable game based on the winning of the ball to the start opening 126 is about 1 / 50.0 (= 1310/65536), and the special figure based on the winning of the ball to the first special drawing start opening 126 is. The winning probability of the single variation game is higher in the special figure high probability state than in the special figure low probability state. In the present embodiment, the small hit probability in FIG. 2 is as close to 0 as possible. This is because if you win a small hit in the usual high probability state, even if you receive a small payout with a small hit in a state that is already advantageous to the player, the player will hardly get a profit, the effect accompanying the small hit This is because the next lottery is delayed by time, so that the small hits do not appear as much as possible.

  In step S2106, if it is determined in step S2105 that the special figure 2 variable game is lost, the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the random value storage area of the special figure 2 in the RAM 308, and the acquired special figure 2 is acquired. It is determined whether or not the first lose is won using a random value. If it is not determined in step S2105 that the special figure 2 variable game has been lost, the process proceeds to step S2108 without performing the determination here. In the random number value storage area of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 random value that is a software random number value is also stored in step S1204 in the winning acceptance process for the second special figure starting port 128 shown in FIG. In this step S2106, the special figure 2 random value is acquired, and whether the special figure 2 random value belongs to the numerical value range of the first lose using the special figure determination table at the time of winning the loss shown in FIG. 10B. Determine whether or not. In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that the acquired special figure 2 random number value can take is 0 to 127 (the numerical value range is 128).

  FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a special figure determination table at the time of winning the loss, which is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 10B, the relationship between the special figure variable gaming state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) and each of the first loss data and the second loss data is defined. ing. This special figure determination table is also used in the special figure 1 related lottery process. In step S2106, referring to the special figure probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, if the special figure 2 variation gaming state is the special figure low probability state, and if the acquired special figure 2 random number value is 0 to 126, It is determined that the first loss is won. The second loss data in the special figure low probability state is 127. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable gaming state is the special figure high probability state, if the acquired special figure 2 random value is 0 to 125, it is determined that the first lose is won. The second loss data in the special figure high probability state is 126-127. If the first loss is won, the first loss flag prepared in the RAM 308 is set to ON (step S2107), and the process proceeds to step S2125 described later. On the other hand, if the first lose is not selected, the process proceeds to step S2108.

  In step S2108, if it is determined in step S2105 that the special figure 2 variable game has been lost, it is determined that the second loss has been won, and the second loss flag prepared in the RAM 308 is set to ON (step S2109). ), The process proceeds to step S2125 described below. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S2105 that the special figure 2 variable game is lost, the process proceeds to step S2110 without performing this determination.

  In step S2110, if it is determined in step S2105 that the special figure 2 variable game is a small hit, the special figure 2 random value is obtained again from the random value storage area of special figure 2 in the RAM 308, and the obtained special figure is obtained. It is determined whether or not the first small hit is won using two random numbers. If it is not determined in step S2105 that the special figure 2 variable game is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2112 without performing the determination here. In this step S2110, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 random number value belongs to the numerical value range of the first small hit, using the special figure determination table at the time of winning the small hit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing a special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 when winning a small hit.

  In the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 10C, the relationship between the special figure variable gaming state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) and each of the first small hit data and the second small hit data is shown. It is prescribed. This special figure determination table is also used in the special figure 1 related lottery process. In step S2110, referring to the special figure probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, if the special figure 2 variation gaming state is the special figure low probability state, and if the acquired special figure 2 random number value is 0 to 63, It is determined that the first small hit is won. The second small hit data in the special figure low probability state is 64 to 127. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable game state is the special figure high probability state, if the acquired special figure 2 random number value is 0 to 95, it is determined that the first small hit is won. The second small hit data in the special figure high probability state is 96-127. If the first small hit is won, the first small hit flag prepared in the RAM 308 is set to ON (step S2111), and the process proceeds to step S2125 described later. On the other hand, if the first small hit is incorrect, the process proceeds to step S2112.

  In step S2112, if it is determined in step S2105 that the special figure 2 variable game is a small hit, it is determined that the second small hit is won and the second small hit flag prepared in the RAM 308 is set to ON. (Step S2113), the process proceeds to Step S2125 described later. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S2105 that the special figure 2 variable game is a small hit, the determination here is not performed, the big hit flag prepared in the RAM 308 is set to ON (step S2114), and step S2115 is determined. Proceed to Here, when the big hit flag is set to ON, the big hit game (special game) is started after the special figure 2 variable game is finished.

  In the random number value storage area of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 round decision random value that is a software random number value is also stored in step S1204 in the winning acceptance process for the second special figure starting port 128 shown in FIG. ing. In step S2115, the special figure 2 round decision random value is acquired from the random figure storage area of the special figure 2 in the RAM 308, and the round number of the acquired special figure 2 round decision random value is determined. In step S2115, the round lottery table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is used to determine which round number random number value the special figure 2 round decision random value belongs to, and the process proceeds to step S2116.

  FIG. 10D is a diagram showing a round lottery determination table at the time of winning a big win, which is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the big win is won in the special figure 2 variable game, the door member 1301 for opening and closing the variable winning opening 130 opens and closes a predetermined number of times. 15 rounds (R) and 2 rounds (R) are prepared as the number of times the door member 1301 is opened and closed (number of rounds). The round lottery determination table shown in FIG. 10D includes the number of rounds and lottery data (second special figure starter lottery data) to be used based on the winning of a ball at the second special figure starter 128. It defines the relationship. Here, when the acquired special figure 2 round decision random number value is 0 to 99, it is determined that the round number is 15R, and the 15R jackpot is won. On the other hand, when the acquired special figure 2 round decision random number value is 100 to 127, it is determined that the number of rounds is 2R, and 2R jackpot is won. In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the special figure 2 round determined random number value is 0 to 127 (the numerical value range is 128), and the numerical value range indicated by the second special figure starting port lottery data of 15R is 0 to 99. Since the numerical range is 100, the winning probability of 15R based on the winning of the ball to the second special figure starting port 128 is about 1 / 1.3 (= 100/128). On the other hand, since the numerical range indicated by the lottery data for the 2R second special figure starting port is 100 to 127 (the numerical range is 28), the 2R based on the winning of the ball to the second special figure starting port 128 is shown. The winning probability is about 1 / 4.6 (= 28/128).

  Further, even if the big win is won in the special figure 1 variable game, the door member for opening and closing the variable winning opening 130 opens and closes either 15 times (15R) or 2 times (2R). In the round lottery determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d), the number of rounds, lottery data (first special figure starter lottery data) to be used based on the winning of a ball at the first special figure starter 126, and The relationship is also defined. In the determination of the number of rounds using the round lottery determination table shown in FIG. 10D, when the special figure 1 round decision random number value is 0 to 63, the number of rounds is determined to be 15R, and the 15R big hit is won. become. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 round decision random number value is 64 to 127, it is determined that the number of rounds is 2R, and 2R jackpot is won. In the present embodiment, the numerical value range indicated by the lottery data for the first special figure starting port of 15R is 0 to 63 (the numerical value range is 64). The winning probability of 15R based is about 1/2 (= 64/128). On the other hand, since the numerical range indicated by the lottery data for the first special figure starting port of 2R is 64 to 127 (the numerical range has a size of 64), 2R based on the winning of the ball to the first special figure starting port 126 is shown. The winning probability is also about ½ (= 64/128). Therefore, the winning probability of the advantageous number of rounds (15R) is higher when the big win is obtained in the special figure 2 variable game than in the special figure 1 variable game. In this way, it is easier to draw a big hit in the special figure 2 floating game than a big hit in the special figure 1 floating game. Can be easily selected, so a lump ball can be created. If the special figure 2 variable game lottery is given priority over the special figure 1 variable game lottery, the special figure 1 variable game lottery can be made difficult to be performed during a short period of time. Becomes easier to select.

  In step S2116, it is determined whether or not a 15R jackpot has been won. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a 2R big hit flag and a 15R big hit flag. If the 2R big hit flag is won, one of the 2R big hit flags is set to ON (step S2117), and step S2119. If the 15R jackpot is won, the other 15R jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2118), and the routine proceeds to step S2119.

  In step S2119, the special figure 2 random value is acquired again from the random number storage area of the special figure 2 in the RAM 308, and the special figure probability variation is determined for the acquired special figure 2 random value. Here, the special figure 2 random number value used for the round number determination in step S2115 is used, but the special figure 2 winning random number value used for the jackpot determination in step S2105 may be used. In this step S2119, the special figure 2 random value is acquired, and using the special figure high probability state transition determination table shown in FIG. It is determined which of the numerical range of the figure high probability state belongs to, and the process proceeds to step S2120.

  FIG. 10E is a diagram showing a special figure high probability state transition determination table at the time of winning the big hit, which is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the special figure high probability state transition determination table shown in FIG. 10 (e), a special figure probability state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) after completion of the special figure variable game and a transition determination random number value are displayed. A relationship with the lottery data indicating the range is defined. The special figure high probability state transition determination table is also used in the special figure 1 related lottery process. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure high probability state transition determination table shown in FIG. 10 (e) to start the big hit game after the special figure 2 variable game ends (special figure low probability state), or It is determined whether or not a special big hit game is to be started (a special figure high probability state), that is, a special figure probability change transition determination is performed. Here, when the acquired special figure 2 random number value is a numerical value of 64 to 127, it is determined that the special jackpot game is won (special figure probability variation winning). On the other hand, when the acquired special figure 2 random number value is a numerical value of 0 to 63, it is determined that the special big hit game is unfair (special figure probability variation unfair election). In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers for determining the transition to the special figure high probability state is 64 to 127 (the size of the numerical range is 64). Since the value is 127 (the size of the numerical range is 128), the probability of shifting to the special figure high probability state is ½ (= 64/128) when the result of the big hit determination is winning.

  In step S2120, it is determined whether or not the special figure probability variation is won. If the special figure probability variation is unfair (special jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S2122, and the special figure probability variation is won (special jackpot game). If it has been selected, the above-mentioned special figure probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is set to ON (step S2121), and the process proceeds to step S2122.

  In the random number value storage area of the special figure 2 in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 short time determined random number value that is a software random number value is also stored in step S1204 in the winning acceptance process for the second special figure starting port 128 shown in FIG. ing. In step S2122, the special figure 2 short time determined random number value is acquired, and this time, the special figure 2 fluctuation determination random number value is determined. Also here, the special figure 2 winning random number value used for the jackpot determination in step S2105 may be used. In this step S2122, the special figure 2 short-term decision random number value is the numerical range of the normal low probability state and the numerical range of the general high probability state using the normal high probability state transition determination table shown in FIG. And the process proceeds to step S2123. As described above, the usual high probability state is a short-time state, and the usual low probability state is a non-short-time state.

  FIG. 10 (f) is a diagram showing a normal high probability state transition determination table at the time of a big win, which is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure 2 variable game (during symbol fluctuation display) is a normal low probability state. In the normal figure high probability state transition determination table shown in FIG. 10 (f), the normal figure probability state (ordinary figure low probability state, general figure high probability state) after the special figure variable game ends and the range of the transition determination random number value The relationship with the lottery data indicating is defined. In the present embodiment, the special figure low probability state is also in the special figure 1 variable game, and this general figure high probability state transition determination table is also used in the special figure 1 related lottery process. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the universal high probability state transition determination table shown in FIG. 10 (f) to determine whether or not to transition to the universal high probability state when the symbol variation display in FIG. In other words, the common figure change transition determination is performed. Here, when the special figure 2 time-determined random number is a numerical value of 64 to 127, it is determined to shift to the normal figure high probability state (normal figure probability variation winning). On the other hand, when the special figure 2 short-term decision random number is a numerical value of 0 to 63, even if the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is finished, it remains in a low probability state of ordinary figure (general figure probability fluctuation inappropriate selection). judge. In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure 2 time-determined random number value can take is 0 to 127 (the numerical value range is 128), and the transition determination random number range to the normal high probability state is 64 to 127 ( Since the size of the numerical range is 64), the probability of shifting to the normal high probability state (short time state) when the result of the big hit determination is winning is 1/2 (= 64/128).

  In step S2123, first, it is determined whether or not the 2R jackpot is won by referring to the 2R jackpot flag. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3 (a), the 2R jackpot has a sudden probability change of "Special Figure C", which is a high probability state of ordinary figure, a sudden shortening of "Special Figure D", and a low probability of ordinary figure. There is a hidden probability change of "Special Figure E" which is a state and sudden normal of "Special Figure F". On the other hand, the two types of 15R jackpots, the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B”, are both in a normal high probability state. If the 2R jackpot is won, it is necessary to determine whether it is in the normal figure high probability state or the normal figure low probability state. In step S2123, the determination result in the previous step S2122 shows the fluctuation in the normal figure probability. It is determined whether or not it is a determination result that it has been won, and if the normal probability fluctuation is won, the above-mentioned normal probability fluctuation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is set to ON (step S2124), and step S2125 is determined. Proceed to If it is unfair to the normal probability fluctuation, the process proceeds directly from step S2123 to step S2125. On the other hand, if the determination result is that the 2R jackpot is not successful, it means that the 15R jackpot is won and the ordinary figure high probability state is set, so the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to ON (step S2124). The process proceeds to S2125. As described above, by setting the ordinary probability fluctuation flag to ON here, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hourly number of times 100 is set in the hourly number memory unit provided in the RAM 308, and The provided short time flag is turned on. Here, the time-short flag that is not turned on is in an off state.

  In step S2125, stop based on the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first loss flag, second loss flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and normal figure probability fluctuation flag. Determine the design.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning random number value used for the big hit determination in step S2105 is acquired again, and the special figure 2 winning random number value is set to one of the timers 1 to 5 using the timer number determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether it belongs to the numerical range of any timer number, and the timer number is determined. The RAM 308 has a timer number storage area, and the determined timer number is stored in the timer number storage area. Further, the fluctuation time corresponding to the timer number is also stored in the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer as the special figure 2 fluctuation display time.

  FIG. 11A shows a timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The timer number determination table shown in FIG. 11A includes a timer number, lottery data used for the lottery for determining the timer number, and various flags (15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag , A second small hit flag, a first lose flag, and a second lose flag) are defined. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to various flags prepared in the RAM 308 to determine whether the special figure 2 winning random number value belongs to the numerical range of the timer number corresponding to the flag set to ON. To do. In the present embodiment, as described above, the numerical value range that the special figure 2 winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the timer 1 when the first lose flag is set to ON. Since the random number range of 0 to 60235 (the size of the numerical range is 60236), the probability of selecting the timer 1 as the timer number is approximately 91.9% (60236/65536). In this case, the probability of selecting timer 2 as the timer number is approximately 6.5% (4250/65536), the probability of selecting timer 3 is approximately 1.2% (800/65536), and timer 4 is The probability of selecting is approximately 0.4% (250/65536). When the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON, the probability that the timer 4 is selected as the timer number is approximately 95.4% (62536/65536), and the probability that the timer 5 is selected is approximately 4. 6% (3000/65536). On the other hand, when the second lose flag is set on, or when the second small hit flag is set on, the timer 4 is always selected and the 2R big hit flag is set on. Or, if the first small hit flag is set to ON, the timer 1 is always selected.

  In step S2127 executed subsequent to step S2126, the pseudo figure timer number is determined here and stored in the RAM 308 using the special figure 2 winning random number as in step S2126. In this step S2127, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 winning random number value belongs to the numerical range of any of the pseudo-ream timer numbers 1 to 4, using the pseudo-ream timer number determination table shown in FIG. The pseudo-ream timer number is determined. The RAM 308 also has a pseudo continuous timer number storage area, and the determined pseudo continuous timer number is stored in the pseudo continuous timer number storage area. The pseudo continuous timer number is included in the symbol variation start command and is sent from the main control unit 300 to the sub control unit 400. The pseudo sequence described here is a pseudo sequence determined by the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a pseudo continuous timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this pseudo-ream timer number determination table, the relationship between the lottery data provided in accordance with the timer number determined in step S2126, the pseudo-ream timer number, the variation time according to the pseudo-ream timer number, and the number of pseudo-reams. It is prescribed. When the quasi-ream is executed, the symbols are changed with a temporary stop before the variations are made, apart from the variations described below (the reach pattern including no reach). I think there are more symbol variations than the actual number of symbol variations. For example, when the timer number 4 is determined in the previous step S2126 and the special figure winning random number value is 51200, the pseudo continuous timer number is the pseudo continuous timer 4, the variation time is 15 seconds, and the pseudo continuous timer is 3 times. . First, fluctuate for 15 seconds according to the pseudo-continuous timer 4, and within this 15 second fluctuation, perform temporary stop three times about every 5 seconds, and then change the symbol according to timer number 4 Continue, and stop display at the end.

  The decorative symbols displayed on the left symbol display area 110a, the middle symbol display area 110b, and the right symbol display area 110c of the decorative symbol display device 110 shown in FIG. At the same time, a variable display is displayed, and a stop display is finally displayed. Here, using the decorative symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 110, the decorative symbol variation time is assumed to be 40 seconds.

  First, when there is no pseudo continuous number of times, after the variation of the decorative symbol for 40 seconds is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 110, one stop display is finally performed.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing step-by-step (a) to (d) how the decorative design fluctuates when the pseudo-ream is performed once.

  In the case where the number of times of quasi-continuation is one, first, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the variation of the decorative symbol is started, and when the variation display is performed for less than 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 12 (b). The symbol is temporarily stopped once. At this time, the second special figure display device 114 is in a changing state. Thereafter, after the variation of the decoration symbol of 40 seconds is displayed as shown in FIG. 6C, the stop symbol (here, “decoration 4—decoration 2—decoration 3”) is lost as shown in FIG. The symbol combination) is confirmed (stopped). At this time, the second special figure display device 114 displays “Special figure I”, which is the first lost symbol shown in FIG. In the case where the number of times of quasi-continuation is one, the player seems to have performed the symbol variation twice (FIGS. 12A and 12C).

  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing, in a step-by-step order, (a) to (f), how the decorative symbol fluctuates when the pseudo-ream is performed twice.

  Even in the case where the number of pseudo-continuations is two, first, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the variation of the decorative symbol is started and the variation display is performed for less than 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 13 (b). The symbol is temporarily stopped once. At this time, the second special figure display device 114 is in a changing state. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 4C, when the decorative symbol change is resumed and the change display is performed for less than 5 seconds, the second temporary stop of the symbol is performed as shown in FIG. The second special figure display device 114 at this time is also in a changing state. Then, after the change of the decoration symbol of 40 seconds is displayed as shown in FIG. 5E, the stop symbol (here, “decoration 4—decoration 2—decoration 3”) The symbol combination) is confirmed (stopped). At this time, the second special figure display device 114 displays “Special figure I”, which is the first lost symbol shown in FIG. In the case where the number of times of quasi-continuation is two times, the player seems to have performed the symbol variation three times (FIGS. 13A, 13C, and 13E).

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing step by step the order of (a) to (h) how the decorative symbol fluctuates when the pseudo-ream is performed three times.

  Even in the case where the number of times of pseudo-continuations is 3, first, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started and the variation display is performed for less than 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. The symbol is temporarily stopped once. At this time, the second special figure display device 114 is in a changing state. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 4C, when the decorative symbol change is resumed and the change display is performed for less than 5 seconds, the second temporary stop of the symbol is performed as shown in FIG. The second special figure display device 114 at this time is also in a changing state. Subsequently, when the decorative pattern is changed for the third time as shown in (e) of the figure and the change display is performed for a little less than 5 seconds, the temporary design of the third time is shown as shown in (f) of the figure. A stop is made. The second special figure display device 114 at this time is also in a changing state. Then, after the variation of the decoration symbol of 40 seconds is displayed as shown in FIG. 5G, the stop symbol (here, “decoration 4—decoration 2—decoration 3”) is lost as shown in FIG. The symbol combination) is confirmed (stopped). At this time, the second special figure display device 114 displays “Special figure I”, which is the first lost symbol shown in FIG. In the case where the number of times of quasi-continuation is 3, the player seems to have performed the symbol variation 4 times (FIGS. 14A, 14C, 14E and 14F).

  Subsequently, various types of information are additionally stored in a transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 (step S2128). Specifically, in order to execute the general command rotation start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S217), 1H that is information indicating the start of variation is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area. To do. Also, information in which various flags (15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first loss flag, second loss flag) are set, and a special figure probability variation flag is set. Stored information, information on which the normal probability fluctuation flag is set, information on the above-mentioned timer number, and pseudo-continuous timer number are additionally stored. When the execution of step S2128 ends, in step S2129, the special figure 2 variable game hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is decremented by one, and the flow advances to step S2130.

  In step S2130, the special figure 2 winning random value, the special figure 2 random value, the special figure 2 round decision random value, and the special figure 2 short time decision random value are deleted from the special figure 2 random value storage area of the RAM 308, and the process proceeds to step S2131. move on.

  In step S2131, the setting during special figure 2 fluctuation display is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In addition, the special figure 2 winning random number value and special lottery acquired in S1104 of FIG. 7 for the big win lottery, the round lottery at the time of the big win, the special figure high probability state transfer lottery, and the normal figure high probability state transfer lottery at the time of the big win. You may carry out using two random number values of the random value of FIG. Further, the acquisition timing of various random values is not limited to the timing based on the winning acceptance (S209 in FIG. 6). Further, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and any combination of whether each random number value is shared with other random number values or each random number is acquired at the time of winning or lottery may be used.

  Next, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S216 in FIG. 6) executed following the special figure 2 related lottery process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure 1 related lottery process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. Each step from step S2201 to step S2231 shown in FIG. 15 replaces “second” in each step from step S2101 to step S2131 shown in FIG. The steps are the same as those read in FIG. Therefore, each condition from step S2201 to step S2203 corresponds to an example of the lottery prohibition condition referred to in the present invention. That is, in the symbol display device 110, if any one of the variable display, the fixed display (stop display), and the effect display regarding the special figure 1 variable game is displayed, the lottery prohibition condition is satisfied. If neither display is made and no lottery has been performed, the lottery prohibition condition is not satisfied. The condition in step S2204 corresponds to an example of the lottery start condition referred to in the present invention. That is, the condition for starting the lottery is that the number of rights to perform lottery in the special drawing 1 related lottery process is 1 or more. This is based on the condition that the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 126. In the present embodiment, when the lottery prohibition condition from step S2201 to step S2203 is satisfied and the lottery start condition in step S2204 is also satisfied, the right to perform the lottery in the special drawing 1 related lottery process is reserved. become. Other explanation about the special drawing 1 related lottery process is omitted.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure 2 related lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process described above corresponds to an example of the lottery means referred to in the present invention.

<Sub control section main processing>
Next, the sub control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the sub control unit.

  The sub-control unit 400 is provided with a reset signal output circuit that outputs a reset signal when the power is turned on. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 to which this reset signal has been input starts resetting by a reset interrupt and executes the sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 16A according to a control program stored in the ROM 406 in advance. Initialize the. In this initialization, input / output ports are initialized and various variables are initialized.

  In step S302, command input processing (details will be described later) is performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether the value of a timer variable storage area described later is 10 or more. When the value of the timer variable storage area is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S304, and when the value of the timer variable storage area is less than 10, the process returns to step S302.

  In step S304, 0 is stored in the timer variable storage area.

  In step S305, effect data update processing is performed. In the effect data update process, the variation number stored in the variation pattern selection process described later is updated, and the decorative symbol display device 110, the speaker 416, and various types are displayed based on the elapsed time since the decorative symbol variation display is started. The effect data for controlling the effect by the lamp 420 and the effect movable body (the movable member 210, the shielding means 250, etc.) of the effect device 200 is updated. In addition, a command that is output to the symbol display control unit 500 by a decorative symbol display device control process in step S306, which will be described later, so that the decorative symbol display device 110 displays a decorative symbol, an effect display, and the like based on the effect data thus updated. (E.g., a command for instructing to stop the seventh set of combined image symbols on the left) is stored in a transmission command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and a speaker 416, various lamps 420, and the like in steps S307, 308, and 309 described later. The effect data updated here, which controls the effect movable bodies such as the movable member 210 and the shielding means 250 of the effect device 200, is set in the setting area of the RAM 408. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery such as whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, for example, whether or not to perform an effect using the chance button 146 is performed.

  In step S306, a decorative symbol display device control process is performed. In this decorative symbol display device control process, a command is output to the decorative symbol display control unit 500 via the output port of the I / O 410. Here, the command stored in the transmission command storage area provided in the RAM 408 in step S305 is set to the output port of the I / O 410, and the decorative symbol display control unit 500 is caused to perform display control of the decorative symbol display device 110.

  In step S307, sound output processing for sending sound output setting information of the speaker 416 to the sound source IC 418 is executed based on the effect data set in the setting area of the RAM 408.

  In step S308, based on the effect data set in the setting area of the RAM 408, lamp control processing for turning on and off the various lamps 420 is executed using the display circuit 422.

  In step S309, based on the effect data set in the setting area of the RAM 408, using the effect drive circuit 426, the various effect drive devices 424 for operating the effect movable bodies such as the movable member 210 and the shielding means 250 are driven. The effect drive device control process is executed.

  Sub-control unit 400 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S302 to S304 thereafter, except for interruption by strobe processing, chance button processing, or sub-control unit timer interrupt processing described later.

<Command input processing>
Next, the command input process (step S302) in the sub-control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of command input processing.

  The RAM 408 mounted on the basic circuit 402 in the sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a command storage area. In step S217 in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6, the sub control unit 400 performs various commands transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the sub control unit 400 by executing a strobe interrupt process to be described later. Stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area. The command storage area stores a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a RAM clear command, and the like. In step S401 shown in FIG. 16B, the contents of the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 are confirmed, and it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command remains. If an unprocessed command remains in the command storage area, the process proceeds to step S402. If an unprocessed command does not remain in the command storage area, the process ends and returns to the sub-control unit main process. .

  In step S402, the process jumps to a process corresponding to the unprocessed command whose existence was affirmed in step S401.

  Also, in step S601 of the symbol stop process shown in FIG. In the middle, the setting is made to display in the three display areas of the right symbol display areas 110a to 110c, and the process is terminated.

  In the round start process, information indicating the number of times the variable winning opening 130 is opened after the jackpot start included in the unprocessed command is extracted and stored in the storage area of the RAM 408.

<Strobe interrupt processing>
Next, strobe interrupt processing of the sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of strobe interrupt processing.

  This strobe interrupt process is a process executed when the sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. That is, as described above, the strobe signal is included as strobe information in the command transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. In the command setting transmission process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. When a command is transmitted from the control unit 300 to the sub-control unit 400 and the sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal in the transmitted command, this strobe interrupt process is executed. In step S701 of the strobe interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

<Chance button interrupt processing>
Next, the chance button interrupt process of the sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of chance button interrupt processing.

  This chance button interruption process is a process executed when the sub control unit 400 detects an operation of the chance button 146 by the chance button detection circuit 364.

  In step S801 of the chance button interrupt process, a value is acquired from the detection counter stored in the detection counter storage area of the RAM 408 for measuring the number of times the chance button 146 is pressed, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Store in the original detection counter storage area.

<Variable update interrupt processing>
Next, variable update interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of variable update interrupt processing.

  The sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). With this timer interrupt, the sub-control unit timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle. Run with.

  In step S901 of the variable update interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S304 in the sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 16A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S304, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In addition, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 takes a special figure 1 notice lottery random number counter for generating a special figure 1 notice lottery random number value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 127, and also takes a value in the range 0 to 127. A special figure 2 notice lottery random number counter for generating a special figure 2 notice lottery random number value to be obtained is provided. In step S902, these random number counters are updated.

  Next, the special figure hold increasing process will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a part of the flow of the special figure hold increasing process, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the remaining part of the flow of the special figure hold increasing process which is not shown in FIG.

  First, the flow until the special figure hold increasing process is started will be described. In step S1105 in the winning acceptance process for the first special figure starting port 126 shown in FIG. 7 and in step S1205 in the winning acceptance process for the second special figure starting port 128, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 performs transmission provided in the RAM 308. In the information storage area, information indicating an increase in hold of the first special figure variable game (special figure 1 hold increase) and information indicating an increase in hold of the second special figure variable game (special figure 2 hold increase) are additionally stored. The general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S217) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. As described above, in the general command rotation start setting transmission process, the symbol variation start command is transmitted last time with reference to the information indicating the special figure 1 hold increase and special figure 2 hold increase stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308. To the current transmission (the period from the previous lottery to the current lottery in the special drawing-related lottery process), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 that represents the number of holdings of the first special figure variable game increased Alternatively, the number-of-holds increase information of the special figure 2 indicating the number of the second special figure variable games held increased during the same period is set in the data of the symbol fluctuation start command (1H). It is not set when the increased number of holds is 0. By doing so, the symbol variation start command (1H) including the information on the increase in the number of reservations is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the sub control unit 400. In the strobe process shown in FIG. 16D, the sub-control unit 400 stores this symbol variation start command as an unprocessed command (step S701), and through the command input process (S402) shown in FIG. The special figure hold increasing process shown in FIG. 17 is started. That is, the special figure holding increase process is performed at the start of symbol variation.

  In step S411, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation start command received from the main control unit 300 includes the number-of-holding-increase information in FIG. 1, and if included, the process proceeds to step S412 and is included. If not, this time, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation start command includes information on the increase in the number of holdings of the special figure 2 (step S413). If included, the process proceeds to step S414. If not included, the process proceeds to step S417. In the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400, a reserved information storage area for special figure 1 and a reserved information storage area for special figure 2 are prepared. Each of the hold information storage area for special figure 1 and the hold information storage area for special figure 2 is divided into four areas, and each area is given a hold number. This hold number represents the order in which the hold is digested, and the hold is digested in order from the hold number 1. In step S412, the increased holding based on the holding number increase information in FIG. The increased hold based on the hold number increase information in FIG. 2 is stored in the partitioned area of the hold information storage area for FIG.

  Further, advance notice information and false advance notice information are also stored in the divided areas of the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 and the reserved information storage area for special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408 (described later). (Additional storage in S422, S427, S432, etc.). Here, the advance notice information is information indicating that a prior notice such as a prior notice is performed, and the false prior notice information is information indicating that a prior notice such as a first false prior notice or a second false prior notice is performed. . Both the advance notice and the first and second false advance notices are effects that cause the player to expect that the result of the lottery in the special figure variable game is advantageous to the player before notifying the result. The production mode by the first false advance notice and the production mode by the second false advance notice are the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish between them. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 110, when the symbol variation stop display is repeated a plurality of times, the symbol variation stop display (hereinafter referred to as the last symbol variation stop display) that displays a stop symbol representing a lottery result for performing advance notice. Calling a prior notice in a symbol change stop display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “previous symbol change stop display”) performed before the “previous symbol change stop display” is called a prior notice (continuous notice) in a continuous symbol change stop display. There is. The notice notification is also performed during the change of the symbol of the last symbol change stop display. In the advance notice, the lottery result for which the advance notice was given is a relatively advantageous result for the player (for example, 15R jackpot), whereas in the first false advance notice and the second false advance notice, the lottery result for which the advance notice was given is relative to the player. Disadvantageous results (for example, small hits or losses). The special figure hold increasing process shown in FIG. 17 determines whether or not to perform such effects as the advance notice and the first and second false advance notices, that is, whether to make an effect or not to make an effect. This is a process determined by lottery, and the CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 that executes this special figure holding increase process corresponds to an example of the effect determining means according to the present invention.

  In step S415, it is determined whether or not the advance notice information or the false advance notice information is included in the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 provided in the RAM 408. If included, the process proceeds to step S416, and FIG. The process returns to the command input process shown in (b).

  In step S416, the advance notice information or the false advance notice information is additionally stored in the reserved information storage area for special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408 in the area in which the increased reservation based on the reserved number increase information in special figure 2 is stored. To do. In this additional storage, if the determination result in the previous step S415 includes the advance notice information, the advance notice information is additionally stored, and the determination result that the false advance notice information is included. For example, false advance notice information is additionally stored. The variable game shown in FIG. 2 is prioritized by interrupting the variable game shown in FIG. In this step S416, the advance notice information or the false advance notice information corresponding to the information included in the special figure 1 is additionally stored in the increased suspension in the special figure 2 to be included in the previous step S415. The continuity with the advance notice information based on the advance notice information or the false advance notice information of the special figure 1 determined as follows is maintained.

  On the other hand, if the advance notice information or the false advance notice information of the special figure 1 is not included, it is determined whether or not to shift to the time reduction state (step S417). As described above, the data of the symbol variation start command includes the value of the general probability change flag, and if the value of the normal probability change flag is a value indicating ON, simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, The time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on. In this step S417, the value of the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is referred to. If the value represents the OFF of the ordinary probability fluctuation flag, the process proceeds to step S418. If the value represents the ON, the process proceeds to step S436 shown in FIG. As a result, regarding the special figure 1 variable game, the advance notice and the first and second false advance notices are not performed when shifting to the short-time state. The reason for not conducting advance notice based on the suspension of Special Figure 1 during the time reduction is that if the advance notice based on Special Figure 1 suspension is made during the time reduction, the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 that preferentially changes will continue during the time reduction. This is because the advance notice must be continued for a long time, and the production is delayed. In addition, depending on the way of notice (for example, when displaying a balloon with a balloon saying “15R special jackpot” or a balloon with a balloon saying “15R jackpot”), it is difficult to hold special figure 1 (for example, 15R jackpot) ) And the player is discriminated by the player, and an act of aiming at an advantageous hit (for example, 15R special big hit) in FIG. 2 is performed, and one of the reasons is that the fairness of the game cannot be maintained.

  The special figure 1 hold number increase information set in the symbol variation start command data includes special figure 1 winning random number value, special figure 1 random value, special figure 1 round decision random value corresponding to the increased hold, and Special figure 1 short time decision random number value is included, and special figure 2 winning random number value, special figure 2 random number value, special figure 2 round decision randomness corresponding to the increased hold are included in the special figure 2 pending number increase information Numeric values and special figure 2 time-determined random numbers are included. These random number values are the random number values acquired in step S1103 or step S1203 of the winning acceptance process shown in FIG. 7, and are stored for each hold in the hold information storage area for special figure 1 or special figure 2. Further, the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 also has a winning determination table shown in FIG. 10A, a special figure determination table in the case of winning a loss shown in FIG. 10B, and a small winning prize shown in FIG. A special figure determination table at the time, a round lottery determination table at the time of a big win shown in FIG. 10D, and a general high probability state transition determination table at the time of a big win shown in FIG. In addition, since the step S2105 shown in FIG. 9 or the step S2205 shown in FIG.

  In step S418, the special figure 1 winning random number value included in the special figure 1 holding number increase information or the special figure 2 winning random number value included in the special figure 2 holding number increase information is stored in the ROM 406. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the jackpot value range (numeric value range of the first special figure starting port big hit data, numerical value range of the second special figure starting port big hit data) of the hit judgment table shown in FIG. If not, the process proceeds to step S423, and if it belongs, the process proceeds to step S419. In this step S418, when there are a plurality of increased reservations, processing is performed with priority given to the reservation with the earlier change order (winning timing). For example, the hold number increase information of special figure 1 indicates that the hold number increased is 2 (hold A and hold B), and the hold number increase information of special figure 2 is 1 (hold) C), and when the order in which the fluctuation is fast (the order in which the winning timing is early) is hold A, hold C, hold B, first, the special figure 1 winning random number value of hold A Is determined to belong to the numerical range of the first special figure start opening jackpot data, and if it belongs, the process proceeds to step S419, and if not, the special figure 2 winning random number value of the holding C is now set to the second special figure. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the numerical range of the figure start opening jackpot data. If it belongs, the process proceeds to step S419. If not, the special figure 1 winning random number value of the holding B is further changed to the first special figure starting opening jackpot data. It is determined whether it belongs to the numerical value range of step S4. The procedure proceeds to 9, if not belong to any pending B, where the process proceeds to step S423. Processing with priority given to the order with the earlier fluctuation order is the same in steps S423, S428, S436, S441, and S446, which will be described later.

  In step S419, the special figure 1 round decision random value included in the special figure 1 round decision random number value included in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 round decision random value included in the special figure 2 hold number increase information is It is determined whether or not it belongs to the numerical value range of 15R in the round lottery determination table shown in FIG. 10D stored in the ROM 406, and if not, the process returns to the command input process shown in FIG. Neither the advance notice nor the first and second fake advance notices will be given. That is, it is determined in such a manner that no effects such as advance notice or first / second false advance notice are performed. On the other hand, if it belongs to the numerical range of 15R, the process proceeds to step S461.

  In step S461, it is determined whether or not the determined time-saving jackpot is not included in the reserved information storage area for special figure 1. Here, the hold stored in the hold information storage area for special figure 1 and special figure 2 in the special figure hold increase process before the previous time is targeted, and the hold information storage area for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is stored for each hold. Referring to the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 time-determined random number value stored in FIG. A jackpot with a short time is a jackpot that is usually in a high probability state. Specifically, the 15R special jackpot of the special figure A, the 15R big jackpot of the special figure B, and the sudden probability change of the special figure C shown in FIG. This corresponds to the sudden time reduction of special figure D. That is, it is determined whether or not there is a hold in the short time state among the hold in FIG. 1 that has finished the determination of whether or not to make an effect such as the advance notice or the first / second false advance notice. If the decided bonus with a short time is included, the lottery will be drawn in advance because the production will be delayed and the fairness of the game will not be maintained, as in the explanation of step S417 above. Without returning to the command input process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot with time has not been included, the process proceeds to step S420.

  As described above, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 includes a special figure 1 notice lottery random number counter that generates a special figure 1 notice lottery random number value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 127, and also a value in the range 0 to 127. Is provided with a special figure 2 notice lottery random number counter for generating a special figure 2 notice lottery random number value. The RAM 408 is also provided with a special figure 1 notice lottery random value storage area and a special figure 2 notice lottery random value storage area. In step S420, first, a value is acquired from the special figure 1 notice lottery random number counter as the special figure 1 notice lottery random value, and the acquired special figure 1 notice lottery random value is stored in the special figure 1 notice lottery random value storage area. Alternatively, the value is acquired from the special figure 2 notice lottery random number counter as the special figure 2 notice lottery random value, and the obtained special figure 2 notice lottery random number value is stored in the special figure 2 notice lottery random value storage area.

  Next, in step S420, a prior notice lottery is performed using the prior notice determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 19A is a diagram showing a prior notice determination table stored in the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400.

  In the advance notice lottery in step S420, the CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 displays the special figure 1 notice lottery random value stored in the special figure 1 notice lottery random value storage area of the RAM 408 or the special figure 2 notice lottery random value storage area. It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 notice lottery random number value stored in is in the numerical range with advance notice in the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. The size of each numerical range of the special figure 1 notice lottery random value and the special figure 2 notice lottery random value is 128. As shown in FIG. 19A, the numerical range with prior notice is 0 to 15 (the numerical range has a size of 16). Therefore, the probability that the special figure 1 notice lottery random value or the special figure 2 notice lottery random value belongs to the numerical range with the advance notice is 16/128 = 12.5%. If the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value or the special figure 2 notice lottery random number value belongs to the numerical range with advance notice, the process proceeds to step S421. If not, the process returns to the command input process shown in FIG. 16B, and the mode is determined so as not to produce effects such as advance notice and first / second false advance notice.

  In step S421, the number of prior notices is determined. For determining the number of advance notices, a prior notice / first false advance notice number determination table is used. FIG. 19B is a diagram showing a prior notice / first false prior notice number determination table stored in the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400.

  The table shown in FIG. 19B is a table that is used in common for determining the number of advance notices and for determining the number of first false advance notices described later. This table defines the relationship between the remaining symbol determination count and the notice count. The number of remaining symbols determined in Fig. 1 includes the holding in Fig. 2, and the number of remaining symbols determined in Fig. 1 includes the number of holds stored in the reserved information storage area for the special diagram 1 provided in the RAM 408, and This is the number of times the number of holdings stored in the holding information storage area for special figure 2 is combined. On the other hand, the number of remaining symbols determined in FIG. 2 does not include the reservation in FIG. 1, and the number of remaining symbols determined in FIG. 2 is the number of reservations stored in the reserved information storage area for FIG. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of remaining symbol determinations for special figure 1 is 8 and the maximum number of remaining symbol determinations for special figure 2 is 4. The number of advance notices is the number of advance notices or first false advance notices. In this embodiment, one advance notice or first false advance notice is given for one symbol change stop display. In determining the number of advance notices, the CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 refers to the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 additionally stored in step S412 and the reserved information storage area for special figure 2 additionally stored in step S414. The special figure 1 notice lottery random number value or the special figure 2 notice lottery random number value used in the previous step S420 is determined again. When the number of remaining symbol determinations is 1 or more than 5 times, advance notice is always made the same number of times as the number of remaining symbol determinations. On the other hand, when the number of remaining symbol determinations is 2 times or more and 4 or less, advance notice is likely to be performed as many times as the number of remaining symbol determinations, but the number of determinations may be less than the number of remaining symbol determinations. In this case, prior notice is given priority for the symbol change stop display to be performed later. In other words, when the number of determinations is 1 for the remaining number of symbol determinations, a prior notice is given at the last symbol variation stop display, and the number of determinations is 2 for the remaining number of symbol determinations of 4 If it is, the advance notice is given for each of the fourth symbol variation stop display and the third symbol variation stop display.

  In step S422, advance notice information indicating how many times the advance notice is to be performed is additionally stored in the hold information storage area for special figure 1 and the hold information storage area for special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408. That is, among the suspensions stored in the partitioned area of the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 and the reserved information storage area for special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408, the determination is made in step S421. It additionally memorizes that prior notice is made for the hold based on the number of times. When the execution of step S422 ends, the process returns to the command input process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S418, the special figure 1 winning random number value included in the holding number increase information of FIG. 1 or the special figure 2 winning random value included in the holding number increase information of FIG. If it does not belong to the range, in step S423, these special figure winning random numbers are then converted to the small hit numerical value range (first special figure start opening small value) of the hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the numerical value range of the hit data, the numerical value range of the second special figure start opening small hit data), if not, the process proceeds to step S428, and if it belongs, the process proceeds to step S424.

  As described above, the data of the symbol fluctuation start command includes the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag. In step S424, the special figure probability randomness flag value and the special figure probability randomness flag value are referred to. 2 determines whether the random number value belongs to the numerical range of the second small hits in the special figure determination table at the time of winning the small hits shown in FIG. Returning to the command input process shown in b), it is determined that an effect such as advance notice or first / second false advance notice is not performed. On the other hand, if it belongs to the numerical value range per second small, the process proceeds to step S462.

  In step S462, similarly to step S461, it is determined whether or not the determined time-saving jackpot is included in the reserved information storage area for special figure 1, and if the determined time-saving jackpot is included. Returning to the command input process shown in FIG. 16 (b), it is determined that the presentation such as the advance notice or the first / second false advance notice is not performed. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot with a short time is not included, the process proceeds to step S425.

  In step S425, as in step S420, first, a value is acquired from the special figure 1 notice lottery random number counter as the special figure 1 notice lottery random value, and the obtained special figure 1 notice lottery random value is stored in the special figure 1 notice lottery random value. Or the value is acquired from the special figure 2 notice lottery random number counter as the special figure 2 notice lottery random value, and the obtained special figure 2 notice lottery random value is stored in the special figure 2 notice lottery random value storage area. . Next, in step S425, the first false advance notice lottery is performed using the first false advance notice determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 19C is a diagram showing a first false advance notice determination table stored in the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400.

  In the first false prior notice lottery in step S425, the CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 causes the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value stored in the special figure 1 notice lottery random value storage area of the RAM 408 or the special figure 2 notice lottery randomness. It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 notice lottery random number value stored in the numerical value storage area belongs to the numerical range with the first false advance notice in the first false advance notice determination table shown in FIG. In this first false advance notice determination table, the number of holds of the first special figure variable game and the second special figure variable game increased during the period from the last reception of the symbol change start command to the current reception (the increase number of the hold). ) Is in the range of 1 to 5, the greater the increase in the number of holdings, the easier it is to win the first false advance notice lottery. That is, in the special drawing related lottery process, the number of winnings at the first special figure starting port 126 and the number of winnings at the second special drawing starting port 128 increase within the period from the last lottery to the current lottery. As a result, it becomes easier to determine a mode in which an effect such as the first false advance notice is performed. As shown in FIG. 19 (c), if the increase in the number of holds is one, the decision probability of determining the mode for performing the first false advance notice is 50%, but the increase in the number of holds is from 2 to 5 In the range of times, the numerical range with the first false advance notice is expanded to 8, 8, 16, 32, and if the number of pending increases is 5, the decision probability is 100%, the first It is always decided to make a fake advance notice. Even if the increase in the number of holds is 6 times or more, the determination probability is 100% of the maximum value. As described above, in this step S425, the number of holdings, that is, the right to perform the lottery in the special drawing related lottery process, is increased according to whether the presentation such as the first false prior notice is performed. Decide based on what you did.

  In the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 19 (a), the numerical range with advance notice may be expanded as the reserved increase number increases.

  In step S426, the number of first false advance notices is determined. For determining the number of times of the first false advance notice, the advance notice / first false advance notice number determination table shown in FIG. 19B is also used.

  In step S427, false advance notice information indicating how many times the first false advance notice is to be performed is additionally stored in the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 and the reserved information storage area for special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408. That is, among the suspensions stored in the partitioned area of the reserved information storage area for the special figure 1 and the reserved information storage area for the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408, the determination is made in step S426. It is additionally stored that the first false advance notice is made for the hold based on the number of times. When the execution of step S427 ends, the process returns to the command input process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S423, the special figure 1 winning random number value included in the holding number increase information of FIG. 1 or the special figure 2 winning random value included in the holding number increase information of FIG. If it does not belong to the numerical value range, in step S428, those special figure winning random numbers are further stored in the big hit numerical value range (first special figure starting port) of the hit determination table shown in FIG. Number range of big hit data, numerical range of 2nd special figure starting port big hit data) and small hit value range (numeric range of 1st special figure starting port small hit data, numerical range of 2nd special figure starting port small hit data) It is determined whether the value is outside the numerical range of both, that is, whether it belongs to the numerical value range of losing, and if it does not belong, the process returns to the command input process shown in FIG. . Here, the fact that the special figure winning random number value does not belong to the numerical range of the loss means that the symbol variation start command includes both the reserved number increase information of Special Figure 1 and the reserved number increase information of Special Figure 2. This is equivalent to the absence of a pending increase.

  In step S429, with reference to the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag included in the data of the symbol fluctuation start command, the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random value are stored in the ROM 406 (FIG. 10B). It is determined whether or not it belongs to the numerical value range of the second loss in the special figure determination table at the time of winning the loss shown in FIG. 4. If it does not belong, the process proceeds to step S433, and if it belongs, the process proceeds to step S463.

  Also in step S463, as in step S461, it is determined whether or not the determined time-saving jackpot is included in the reserved information storage area for special figure 1, and if the determined time-saving jackpot is included. Returning to the command input process shown in FIG. 16 (b), it is determined that the presentation such as the advance notice or the first / second false advance notice is not performed. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot with time has not been included, the process proceeds to step S430.

  In step S430, similar to step S425 described above, the special figure 1 notice lottery random value or the special figure 2 notice lottery random value is acquired, and these obtained random number values are converted into the first false advance notice shown in FIG. 19C. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the numerical range with the first false advance notice in the decision table. Again, in the range of the number of holdings from 1 to 5, the more the number of holdings increases, the easier it is to win the first false advance notice lottery.

  In step S431, the number of first false advance notices is determined. For determining the number of times of the first false advance notice, the advance notice / first false advance notice number determination table shown in FIG. 19B is also used.

  In step S432, false advance notice information is additionally stored in the hold information storage area for special figure 1 and the hold information storage area for special figure 2. That is, among the suspensions stored in the partitioned area of the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 and the reserved information storage area for special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408, the determination is made in step S431. It is additionally stored that the first false advance notice is made for the hold based on the number of times. When the execution of step S432 ends, the process returns to the command input process shown in FIG.

  In step S428 described above, it is determined that the special figure 1 random value or the special figure 2 random value does not belong to the second loss numerical range. These random values belong to the first loss numerical range. It turns out that. In step S433 shown in FIG. 18, the second false prior notice determination lottery is performed using the second false advance notice determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a second false prior notice determination table stored in the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400.

  In the second false advance notice lottery in step S433, the CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 determines whether the special figure 1 notice lottery random value or the special figure 2 notice lottery random value is the second false advance notice shown in FIG. It is determined whether it belongs to the numerical range with the second false advance notice in the decision table. In the second false prior notice determination table used here, the period from the last reception of the symbol variation start command to the current reception (the period from the previous lottery to the current lottery in the special drawing related lottery process) For each of the number of holdings of the first special figure variable game and the second special figure variable game (the number of holding increases), the number of holdings excluding the increment, the random number range with the second false advance notice, and the second false Although the relationship with the random number range without advance notice is specified, the second false advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 2 shows the relationship between the winning probability with false prior notice and the winning probability without second false advance notice. The number of holdings excluding the increase here corresponds to the number of holdings held before the previous lottery in the special drawing related lottery process. In addition, when the maximum value of the number of reservations excluding the increase and the increase in the number of reservations are combined, the maximum value of the increase in the number of reservations is 8, and the one lottery for which the symbol variation start command transmitted this time is derived (holding) Digested part) is subtracted to 7. The numbers 1 to 5 circled in the column of the probability of winning without second false advance notice when the number of retained increases is 1 are the numbers in the column of each winning probability when the number of retained increases is 2 or more. It becomes a quoted number. For example, when the number of increase in hold is 2, the winning probability with the second false advance notice with 0 is the hold number minus the increase is 1− (49/50 × 39/40) = 0.0445, In the case where the increase number is 1, the number of holdings obtained by subtracting the increase is higher than the winning probability (1/50 = 0.02) with the second false prior notice. In addition, the winning probability with the second false advance notice with the number of holdings minus 1 when the number of holding increase is 2 is 1− (39/49 × 29/30) = 0.0575, which is the same In this case, the number of holdings obtained by subtracting the increase in the case is higher than the winning probability with the second false advance notice of 0. In the second false advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 20 (a), in the range from 1 to 3, the greater the number of retained increases, the higher the probability of winning the second false advance notice. Therefore, in step S433, it becomes easier to determine the mode in which the second false advance notice is performed as the number of increase in holding increases. In addition, if the number of holding increases is the same, the winning probability with the second false advance notice increases as the number of holdings excluding the increase increases. Therefore, in step S433, the number of holdings excluding the increment is equivalent, and as the number of holdings held before the previous lottery in the special drawing related lottery process increases, the second false advance notice is performed. It becomes easy to decide. By doing so, the notice is more likely to be performed as the number of suspensions increases, so that the player can increase the number of suspensions as much as possible when he / she sees the notifications, so that the operation of the gaming machine can be increased.

  In the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 19 (a), the numerical range with advance notice may be expanded as the number of reservations excluding the increase increases, and the winning probability is increased to the second. It may be a value calculated by a mathematical formula as shown in the false advance notice determination table.

  In step S434, the number of second false advance notices is determined. For determining the number of times of the second false advance notice, a second false advance notice number determination table is used. FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a second false advance notice count determination table stored in the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400.

  The table shown in FIG. 20B defines the relationship between the remaining symbol determination count and the notice count. The number of advance notices is the number of times of performing the second false advance notice, and in the present embodiment, one second false advance notice is given for one symbol variation stop display. In the second false advance notice, the notice number of times is a maximum of three times. Because the second false advance notice cannot intentionally lengthen the last fluctuation, the effect of the advance notice or the first false advance notice is made more conspicuous by limiting the number of notices to at most three. be able to. In determining the number of second false prior notices, the CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 uses the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value or the special figure 2 notice lottery random value. In the second false advance notice, only the second false advance notice is often performed even if the number of remaining symbols is two or more. Even in the second false advance notice, priority is given to performing the second false advance notice as the symbol change stop display to be performed later.

  In step S435, false advance notice information is additionally stored in the hold information storage area for special figure 1 and the hold information storage area for special figure 2. That is, among the suspensions stored in the partitioned area of the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 and the reserved information storage area for special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408, the determination is made in step S434. It is additionally stored that the second false advance notice is given to the hold based on the number of times. In the second false advance notice, unlike the first false advance notice, the number of notices is 3 at the maximum. Therefore, priority is given to the second false advance notice for the symbol change stop display made earlier. You may do it.

  In step S 436, which proceeds in the case of determination to shift to the time reduction state in step S 417 shown in FIG. 17, the special figure 2 winning random number value is stored in the ROM 406 in the big hit numerical value range of the hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the numerical range of the first special figure start opening jackpot data, the second special figure start opening big hit data numerical range), and if not, the process proceeds to step S441, and if it belongs, the process proceeds to step S437. Regarding the processing after step S436, only the special figure 2 variable game hold out of the special figure 1 variable game hold and the special figure 2 variable game hold is targeted, and both can be targeted as shown in FIG. Since it is the same as each process from step S418 to step S432, description is omitted.

  As described above, the special figure hold increase process shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is a process performed by the sub-control unit 400, and when there is hold number increase information, in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 408, If the increased holding based on the holding number increase information is stored and it is not in the time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the advance notice or the first false advance notice based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is given, and the short-time state is established. In the case, it is determined whether the advance notice or the first false advance notice based on the special figure 2 is to be given. If the advance notice or the first false advance notice is not given, it is decided whether the second false advance notice is to be given. To do. It should be noted that prior notice is not performed if the hold does not increase between the previous judgment and the current judgment.

  Next, the variation pattern selection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a part of the flow in the variation pattern selection process.

  This variation pattern selection process is also started based on the transmission of the symbol variation start command (1H) from the main control unit 300 to the sub control unit 400, similar to the above-described special figure hold increase process. That is, the sub-control unit 400 stores the symbol variation start command as an unprocessed command in the strobe processing shown in FIG. 16D (step S701), and changes through the command input processing (S402) shown in FIG. Pattern selection processing is started.

  As described above, the symbol variation start command includes the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the small hit flag, the value of the loss flag, the value of the special probability fluctuation flag, the value of the general probability fluctuation flag, The timer number determined in step S2126 of the special figure 2 related lottery process shown in FIG. 9 or the timer number determined in step S2226 of the special figure 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. 15 is included. In step S501 of the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 21, first, these pieces of information included in the symbol variation start command that is an unprocessed command are extracted and stored in the respective storage areas of the RAM 408. Next, referring to the variation number selection table shown in FIG. 23 and the symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the combination of the variation number and the stop symbol is selected and stored in the storage area provided in the RAM 408. The variation number selection table and the symbol determination table will be described later.

  Further, in step S501, effect data is selected using the variable effect determination table corresponding to the number of pending increases shown in FIG. 20C, and this is also stored in the storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 20 (c) is a diagram showing a variable effect determination table according to the number of reserved increases stored in the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400.

  The table shown in FIG. 20 (c) includes a variation form based on a variation number (a reach pattern including no reach), a retention increase number based on the retention number increase information of FIG. 1 or the retention number increase information of FIG. The relationship is defined. Although the variation form will be described later in detail, eight types of reach patterns including no reach are prepared here. Alphabet A from production A0 to production A5 represents no reach, alphabet B from production B0 to production B5 represents normal reach, and alphabet C from production C0 to production C5 This represents the long reach, and the same applies to other effects. The numbers from production A0 to production A5, the numbers from production B0 to production B5, and the numbers from production C0 to production C5 are the same reach pattern. , Character β appears at 1 increase, etc.), background type (city increase at 0 increase, sea background at 1 increase, etc.), reach story type (100 m increase at 0 increase, ball at 1 increase) , Etc.), indicating that the type of operation of the display / sound / lamp / movable member 210 and shielding means 250 is different, and the same applies to other effects.

  In this step S501, the type of effect is selected according to the number of reserved increases, and the effect is varied according to the number of reserved increases. May be different. For example, it may be configured such that a specific character / specific background or specific effect is more likely to appear as the number of reserved increases increases.

  Subsequently, in the special figure hold increasing process, advance notice information additionally stored in step S422 shown in FIG. 17 or step S440 shown in FIG. 18, steps S427 and S432 shown in FIG. 17, and S435, S445 and S450 shown in FIG. Based on the false advance notice information additionally stored in step S502, it is determined whether or not a notice notification (preliminary notice, first false advance notice, or second false advance notice) is to be performed in the special symbol change stop display (step S502). ). In the following description, the first false advance notice and the second false advance notice are simply referred to as false advance notices without any particular distinction.

  Here, when the symbol variation stop display is repeated a plurality of times, the specific symbol variation stop display (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the last symbol variation stop display) that displays the stop symbol representing the lottery result for which the notice of notice is given. Performing a prior notice in the previous symbol change stop display performed before is sometimes referred to as a prior notice (continuous notice) in the continuous symbol change stop display. The notice notification is also performed during the change of the symbol of the last symbol change stop display.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the notice notification is not performed, the process returns to the command input process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the notice is to be given, it is determined whether or not the last symbol change stop display in the continuous notice (step S503). The ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 stores notice data for effect notification. If it is the last symbol variation stop display, the notice data of the notice information corresponding to the gaming state or the like is selected from the ROM 406 and stored in the RAM 408 (step S504). The “notification effect data according to the gaming state” here will be described in detail later, but this effect data is not limited to the gaming state, for example, when there is a long symbol variation at the end of the continuous notification. In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting bored, there is also included effect data for giving a notice in advance during the long symbol fluctuation without leaving a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more.

  On the other hand, if it is not the last symbol variation stop display, it is determined whether or not it is the first symbol variation stop display (first earliest symbol variation stop display) in the continuous notice (step S505). If it is not the change stop display, the process proceeds to step S507 described later. If it is the first symbol change stop display, it is determined whether or not the timer number stored in the RAM 408 in step S501 is other than the timer 1 (step S506). . Timer 1 is a timer number with a relatively short fluctuation time (fluctuation time of 5 seconds or less), and timers 2 to 5 are timer numbers with a relatively long fluctuation time (fluctuation time exceeding 5 seconds). That is, in this step S506, it is determined whether or not the timer number has a relatively short variation time (5 seconds or less) if it is the earliest preceding symbol variation stop display. If the timer number is other than timer 1, that is, if the fluctuation time is longer than 5 seconds, the process returns to the command input process shown in FIG. By doing so, if the variation time of the first symbol variation stop display in the continuous notice is longer than 5 seconds, the notification notification in the first symbol variation stop display is not performed. On the other hand, if the timer number is timer 1, that is, if the variation time is 5 seconds or less, the process proceeds to step S504, and a notice for the first symbol variation stop display is executed. In this example, 5 seconds is used as a reference, but other seconds such as 10 seconds and 20 seconds may be used as a reference.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the remaining part of the variation pattern selection process.

  Step S507 shown in FIG. 22 is a step executed when neither the last symbol variation stop display nor the first symbol variation stop display is performed, and it is determined whether or not the timer number stored in the RAM 408 is other than the timer 1. If it is determined that the timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S504, and a notice is executed. On the other hand, if it is not timer 1, it is determined whether or not there is advance notice information in the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 or special figure 2 provided in RAM 408 (step S508). If so, the process proceeds to step S509.

  In step S509, it is determined whether or not a pseudo continuous effect is performed. The pseudo-continuous effect referred to here is a pseudo-continuous effect determined by the sub-control unit 400, unlike the pseudo-ream determined by the main control unit 300 described with reference to FIG. The CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed with a predetermined probability of 1/2, and determines whether or not to perform a pseudo-continuous effect based on the result of the lottery. If the pseudo continuous effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S504. If the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the process proceeds to step S510.

  In the pseudo-series determined by the main control unit 300 described with reference to FIG. 11B, the symbol is changed with a temporary stop before the symbol is changed. Here, the sub-control unit 400 determines the change. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect is a temporary stop while the symbol is changing. The case where the pseudo control effect of the sub-control unit 400 is performed is more than 5 seconds in the symbol variation stop display (so-called intermediate symbol variation stop display) that is neither the last symbol variation stop display nor the first symbol variation stop display. This is a case in which advance notice is performed while the symbols are changing over the changing time (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds). In this case, in place of the effect data corresponding to the variation number selected in advance in step S501, pseudo-continuous effect data corresponding to the variation time is selected from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400. That is, the fluctuating time exceeding 5 seconds is equally divided, and a pseudo-continuous effect is performed every time. This pseudo-continuous effect will be described later in detail. When the execution of step S510 is completed, the process proceeds to step S504. In other words, if the symbol change stop display in the middle of performing the notice notification over a plurality of consecutive symbol change stop displays is a change time exceeding 5 seconds, whether the advance notice notification is switched to the pseudo-continuous effect? If the lottery is selected, pseudo-continuous effect data is selected and stored in the RAM 408.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S508 that there is no prior notice information in the reserved information storage area for the special figure 1 or special figure 2 provided in the RAM 408, the advance notice in the previous step S503 (see FIG. 21) is performed. From the determination result, there is false advance notice information in those hold information storage areas, and the process proceeds to step S511. In step S511, it is determined whether or not the current notice is the last notice. The CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery to determine whether or not the current notice is the last notice. In this lottery, the current notice is the last notice with a predetermined probability of 1/2. The CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 makes a determination based on the lottery result, and proceeds to step S509 if the current notice is not the last notice. On the other hand, if the current notice is to be the last notice, the false advance notice information in the reserved information storage area for special figure 1 or special figure 2 provided in RAM 408 is cleared (step S512). ) From the ROM 406, the notice data for the notice according to the game state is selected and stored in the RAM 408 (step S504). By doing so, the advance notice notification is performed in the current symbol change stop display this time, this notice notice is made the last notice notice, and the notice notice scheduled thereafter is canceled. That is, when the symbol change stop display in the middle of performing the notice notification over a plurality of consecutive symbol change stop displays is a change time exceeding 5 seconds, the last symbol change that gives a false advance notice notification Whether or not to make a stop display is drawn by lottery, and if the lottery is won, no false advance notice is given in the subsequent symbol change stop display.

  In addition, when it becomes 15R big hit, you may be made to always perform a continuous notice.

<Data table of sub-control unit>
Next, a data table stored in the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400 will be described.

  FIG. 23A shows an example of a variation number selection table used when the loss flag is on, and FIG. 23B shows an example of a variation number selection table used when the 15R big hit flag is on. Is shown. FIG. 10C shows an example of a variation number selection table used when the small hit flag is on, and FIG. 10D shows the variation used when the 2R big hit flag is on. An example of a number selection table is shown.

  When determining the received command, the sub-control unit 400 acquires a variation determining random number if it is a symbol variation start command. The numerical range that the variation determining random number can take is 0 to 127 (the numerical range has a size of 128). The variation number selection tables shown in FIGS. 23A to 23D are data tables for determining the effect display mode (reach mode) in the decorative symbol display device 110. In the column corresponding to the item “variation form”, the variation form corresponding to the variation number is described for reference. For example, when variation 2 of the variation number is selected, the decoration pattern is represented by the variation form “normal reach”. When the display control of the display device 110 is performed and the variation 19 of the variation number is selected, the display control of the decorative symbol display device 110 is performed with the variation form “full rotation reach”. Details of each variation will be described later.

  In the determination of the variation number using the variation number selection table shown in FIGS. 23A and 23C, the timer number included in the symbol variation start command received by the sub-control unit 400 and the sub-control unit 400 obtain The variation number is determined based on the value of the variation determining random number. In determining the variation number using the variation number selection table shown in FIG. 23B, the variation number is determined based on the timer number, the setting state of the special figure probability variation flag, and the value of the variation determining random number. In the determination of the variation number using the variation number selection table shown in FIG. 23D, the variation number is determined based on the timer number, the setting state of the common probability variation flag, and the value of the variation determining random number.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special figure variable game is lost and the timer number is timer 1, the sub-control unit 400 refers to the variable number selection table used when the lose flag shown in FIG. To do. In the above case, since the numerical range of the random number for variation determination corresponding to timer number = timer 1 is 0 to 127 (the numerical range is 128), the variation number is 100% (= 128/128). Regardless of the probability, that is, regardless of the obtained random number for determining variation, variation 1 is selected, and information indicating that the selection result is variation 1 is stored in the variation number storage area provided in the RAM 408. If the 15R jackpot is won, the timer number is timer 4 and the special figure probability variation flag is off, refer to the variation number selection table used when the 15R jackpot flag is on, as shown in FIG. To do. In this case, the numerical range of the random number for variation determination corresponding to timer number = timer 4 and special figure probability variation flag = off is 0 to 47 (the numerical range is 48) and 48 to 127 (the numerical range is large). 80), the variation number is selected with a probability of 48/128, and the variation 14 is selected with a probability of 80/128. Further, when the winning of the small hit is determined and the timer number is the timer 1, the variation number selection table used when the small hit flag is on as shown in FIG. In this case, the variation 21 is always selected and becomes “no reach”. Furthermore, when the 2R jackpot is won, the timer number is limited to the timer 1 (see FIG. 15A). In this case, referring to the variation number selection table shown in FIG. 24D when the 2R jackpot flag is on, the variation 24 is always selected when the general figure probability variation flag is off. When the figure probability variation flag is on, the variation 25 is always selected, and both are “no reach”.

  FIG. 24A is an example of a symbol determination table used when the variation number selected using FIG. 23 is variation 1, and for determining the type of decoration symbol combination to be stopped. ) Shows an example of a symbol determination table corresponding to fluctuations 2 to 5. These symbol determination tables are tables that are selected in the case of a loss.

  FIG. 24C shows an example of the symbol determination table corresponding to the variations 13, 14, and 18. FIG. 25A shows an example of the symbol determination table corresponding to the variations 15, 16, and 19. It is shown. These two symbol determination tables are tables to be selected in the case of 15R big hit.

  FIG. 25B shows an example of the symbol determination table corresponding to the fluctuations 17 and 20. The symbol determination table shown in FIG. 25B is a table to be selected in the case of 15R special big hit.

  FIG. 25C shows an example of the symbol determination table corresponding to the fluctuations 21 to 24. The symbol determination table shown in FIG. 25C is a table to be selected in the case of 2R big hit called hidden probability change, 2R big hit suddenly called normal, and small hit. FIG. 4D shows an example of the symbol determination table corresponding to the variation 25. The symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6D is a table to be selected in the case of 2R big hit called sudden probability change and 2R big hit called sudden time reduction.

For example, when the variation number is variation 17, the sub control unit 400 refers to the symbol determination table shown in FIG. In this case, the numerical value range of the symbol value for determining symbols corresponding to the variation 17 is 0 to 25 (the numerical value range is 26), 26 to 51 (the numerical value range is 26), 52 to 77 (the numerical value range). There are five types, 26), 78-102 (numerical range size is 25), and 103-127 (numerical range size is 25). “Decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1”, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, or “ One of “decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9” is selected.
<Variation types to be performed on the decorative symbol display device during special figure fluctuation game>
Next, each variation form that is an effect display performed by the decorative symbol display device 110 during the special figure variation game of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  Variations by the decorative symbol display device 110 of the present embodiment are roughly classified into two types: no reach and reach. The reach is further divided into a normal reach, a long reach, a normal reverse reach, a double line reach, a triple line reach, and a special multi. There are 8 types: line reach, full turn reach, and special full turn reach. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing step-by-step how the decorative symbols change without reach, FIG. 27 is a diagram showing step-by-step how the decorative symbols change during normal reach, and FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing step by step how the decoration symbol fluctuates. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing step by step how the decoration symbol fluctuates in the full rotation reach. Moreover, FIG. 30 is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation | variation of the decoration symbol in special full rotation reach in steps, FIG. 31 is a figure which shows the mode of the fluctuation of the decoration symbol in double line reach in steps. 32 is a diagram showing step by step how the decorative symbols vary in triple line reach, and FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step by step how the decorative symbols vary in special multi-line reach. Furthermore, as an example of the variation pattern that is not adopted in the variation pattern by the decorative symbol display device 110 of the present embodiment, FIG. 34 is a reference diagram showing step by step the variation of the decorative symbol in the normal reverse reach, FIG. 35 is a reference diagram showing step by step how the decorative pattern fluctuates in the normal re-variation reach. In any of the drawings from FIG. 26 to FIG. 35, time elapses in order from (a), and the bottom diagram in each diagram becomes the stop display mode (determined display mode).

  Here, the reach (normal reach) generally displays a decorative symbol in which two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c shown in FIG. 2) are equal, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, a middle reach). The symbol display area 110b) is in a variable display state, that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (a symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), it is a big hit or special It is a state that will notify the big hit. In addition, as in the present embodiment, this normal reach and those that improve the effect of production by adding special fluctuation display to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, etc.) may be referred to as reach. However, only those obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach may be referred to as reach.

  Without the reach shown in FIG. 26, the decorative symbols in all symbol display regions 110a to 110c are variably displayed, and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol display region 110a, right symbol display region 110c, and middle symbol display region 110b. . In the present embodiment, in the effect display without reach, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is not a symbol combination that becomes 15R big hit or 15R special big hit.

  In the normal reach shown in FIG. 27, after the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 110a and the right symbol display area 110c, respectively, and the middle symbol display area 110b is displayed. Continue to display only the decorative pattern of. Then, the time is measured from the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and when the predetermined variation time has elapsed from the beginning of the variation display, the ornamental symbol in the middle symbol display area 110b is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 110b are equal to the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110b, the player is notified of the 15R big hit or the 15R special big hit and the decoration that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 110b. When the symbols are different from the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110b, the player is notified of the loss.

  The decorative symbol display device 110 is stopped and the timing for notifying the player of the 15R big hit, 15R special big hit, 2R big hit, small hit or lost is shown in the first special symbol display device 198 or the second special symbol display. This is substantially the same as the timing at which the device 114 is stopped and the player is informed of the winning or losing.

  In the long reach shown in FIG. 28, after the decorative symbols of all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 110a and the right symbol display area 110c, respectively, and longer than the normal reach. The variable display is continued only for the decorative symbol of the time and middle symbol display area 110b. When a predetermined variation time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 110b is stopped and displayed.

  In the full rotation reach shown in FIG. 29, after the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, the effect of stopping and displaying the decorative symbols of the combination of 15R special big hit or 15R big hit is performed a predetermined number of times. Above, the decorative symbol of the combination which becomes 15R special big hit or 15R big hit is stopped and displayed.

  In the special full rotation reach shown in FIG. 30, after the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, the effect of stopping and displaying the decorative symbols of the combination that becomes the 15R special big hit is performed a predetermined number of times. , 15R is specially displayed as a combination of decorative symbols.

  In the double line reach shown in FIG. 31, after the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c, respectively, and the decoration in the middle symbol display area 110b is displayed. The variable display continues only for the symbol. Then, the display of the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c is changed so that two kinds of decorative symbols are displayed in two upper and lower stages before the predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol variation display, After performing an effect that gives the player the expectation that one of the two types of symbols stops in the middle symbol display area 110b, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 110b. Then, after a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the variation display, the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c are returned to the stop display of one decorative symbol.

  In the triple line reach shown in FIG. 32, after the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c, respectively, and the decoration in the middle symbol display area 110b is displayed. The variable display continues only for the symbol. The display of the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c is changed so that three kinds of decorative symbols are displayed in three upper and lower stages before a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol variation display. After performing an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that if one of these three types of symbols stops in the middle symbol display area 110b, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 110b. Then, after a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the variation display, the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c are returned to the stop display of one decorative symbol.

  In the special multi-line reach shown in FIG. 33, after the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c, respectively, and the middle symbol display area 110b is displayed. Continue to display only the decorative design. The left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c are displayed so that all kinds of decorative symbols are displayed in four columns on the left and right sides before the predetermined variation time has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbols. After changing each of them and performing an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that even if any decorative symbol stops in the middle symbol display area 110b, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 110b. To do. Then, after a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the variation display, the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c are returned to the stop display of one decorative symbol so as to be a combination of symbols that will be the special bonus of 15R.

  In the normal reverse reach of FIG. 34 shown for reference, the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, and then the same decorative symbols are respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 110a and the right symbol display area 110c. The display is stopped, and the variable display is continued only for the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 110b. Then, before the predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, a decorative symbol different from the left and right symbol display regions 110a and 110c is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 110b (this left, middle The symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed in the right symbol display areas 110a to 110c are referred to as “temporary stop symbol combinations”, and stopping the decorative symbols in order to display this “temporary stop symbol combination” After that, the middle symbol display area 110b is variably displayed again, and the decorative symbols equal to the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 110b.

  In the normal re-variation reach of FIG. 35 also shown for reference, after the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed, the decorative symbols equal to the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c are stopped and displayed. The variable display is continued only for the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 110b. The decorative symbol corresponding to the 15R big hit is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 110b as “temporarily stopped” by “temporary stop” before the predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol variation display. After the “design combination” is displayed), the decorative symbols in all the symbol display areas 110a to 110c are variably displayed again, and the decorative symbols of the symbol combination in which the same three odd-numbered decorative symbols are arranged are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing, in a step-by-step manner, when the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” is won in the variation of the decorative design without reach, and FIG. 37 is a modification of the double line reach shown in FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner how to win a small hit in the variation of the decorative design in FIG. 38, FIG. 38 is a case of winning in the small winning in the variation of the decorative design in the variation of the triple line reach shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode in steps. Also in these figures, time elapses in order from (a), and the lowermost figure of each figure becomes the stop display mode (determined display mode).

  Without the reach shown in FIG. 36, “decoration 1−decoration 2−decoration 3” is stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols for informing the 2R jackpot called hidden probability change. In the modified example of the double line reach shown in FIG. 37 and the modified example of the triple reach shown in FIG. 38, as shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. As shown in (g), after switching scenes such as explosions, as shown in (g), as shown in (h), “decoration” “1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped (determined). Therefore, in any case, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and the player has won the 2R jackpot called hidden probability change only by looking at the stop symbol of the ornamental symbol display device 110. It is unclear whether only the small wins are won.

  Next, the effects and the like displayed on the decorative symbol display device 110 in the 2R jackpot called hidden probability change will be described in detail.

  FIG. 39 (a) is a diagram showing a flow from a decorative display variation display to a specific effect in 2R big hit called hidden probability change.

  Here, the special figure 2 variable game will be described as an example. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the decorative design of the decorative design display device 110 starts to change. Here, timer 1 is selected as the timer number, and the symbol fluctuation display for 5 seconds is performed. The second special figure display device 114 also changes the symbol for 5 seconds. When 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change, “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds on the decorative symbol display device 110, and FIG. “Special figure E” shown in FIG. If the 2R jackpot called “Hidden Probability” is won, then a specific performance is performed for 5.5 seconds. This specific effect is performed by the decorative symbol display device 110, and the second special symbol display device 114 flashes and displays the stop symbol pattern (here, “special symbol E”). Note that the second special figure display device 114 may continue to display the stop symbol form, or may be completely turned off or turned on, or may be repeated.

  FIG. 39B shows an opening mode of the door member 1301 of the variable winning opening 130 when a 2R big hit called hidden probability change, a sudden 2R big hit called normal, or a small hit is won. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a specific effect.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (b), the door member 1301 of the variable prize opening 130 shown in FIG. 2 is first closed for 3 seconds and then opened during a specific effect of 5.5 seconds. While the door member 1301 is closed for 3 seconds, the decorative symbol display device 110 displays a duel scene between the main character and the enemy. At the same time as the door member 1301 is opened, the decorative symbol display device 110 displays an image of the main character winning. As described above, when the 2R jackpot is won, the door member 1301 performs the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 0.9 seconds and a closing time of 0.2 seconds twice in succession. Note that in the second closing, a closing time of plus 0.3 seconds is added, and an image in which the main character has won continues to be displayed for 2.5 seconds.

  The flow from the decorative display variation display to the specific effect in the 2R big hit called hidden probability change and the 2R big hit called suddenly normal described above is exactly the same for the small hit. That is, the manner in which the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display device 110 starts to change and is displayed in a stopped state is also the case of 2R big hit called hidden probability change, suddenly 2R big hit called normal, and small hit. Then it is exactly the same. It should be noted that the stop symbol form of the second special figure display device 114 becomes “special figure E” shown in FIG. 3A for the 2R big hit called hidden probability change, and suddenly the normal figure 2R big hit shown in FIG. It becomes "Special Figure F" shown in (a), and it becomes "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H" shown in FIG. It is impossible to make a distinction between 2R big hits called hidden probability changes, 2R big hits suddenly called normal, and small hits. In addition, FIG. 3 (a) only shows an example of each stop symbol form, and there are a plurality of types of stop symbol aspects of 2R jackpot special figure called hidden probability change, suddenly normal and There are also provided a plurality of types of stop symbol forms of special figures for 2R big hits, and a plurality of types of stop symbol forms of special figures for small hits. For this reason, the player does not know which stop symbol form each is displayed on, and it is extremely difficult to distinguish the three parties according to the stop symbol form of the special figure. And the display mode of the specific effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 110 is exactly the same among the three parties. That is, an image in which the main character has won is displayed even with a small hit.

  As mentioned above, if you win the 2R big hit called hidden probability change, it will shift to the special figure high probability state, it will be easy to win the special figure fluctuation game, but suddenly the 2R big hit called normal or small Even if you win, there is no such thing. Therefore, by looking at the display form of the specific effect shown in FIG. 39 (b), the player hopes for the subsequent game with a sense of expectation that he may have won the 2R jackpot, which is sometimes called hidden probability change. You will be very interested in the progress of the game.

  It should be noted that the player expects that the special figure probability variation state will be started afterwards even if the 2R big hit game state called hidden probability change is started after the notice of notice, instead of the 15R special big hit game. can do. In the special figure probability fluctuation state, there is a higher possibility of winning the 15R jackpot than in the normal state (special figure low probability state), and it will be easier to give a notice to the player. Can be improved. In addition, when the special figure probability variation state is a state that is difficult for the player to discriminate, it is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not it is a special figure probability variation state by performing a notice in advance. Can improve the interest of the elderly.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a modified example of the opening mode of the door member 1301 of the variable prize opening 130 and the display mode of the specific effect when winning a small hit.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 40, when the small hit is won, the door member 1301 is opened, and at the same time, the decorative symbol display device 110 displays an image in which the main character is defeated. In the 2R big hit, which is called hidden probability change that makes the game state advantageous to the player compared to the small hit, the image where the hero won is displayed, so the case of 2R big hit and hidden hit called hidden probability change Then there is a clear difference, and the player can easily tell who won. In this modification, the player waits very much looking forward to the image representing the winning or losing of the main character displayed when the door member 1301 opens.

  Next, an example of notice notification (advance notice, first false advance notice, or second false advance notice) will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example in which the notice of notice is performed.

  In FIG. 41, time (t) elapses from left to right in the figure. Here, the special figure 2 variable game will be described as an example. The fact that the lottery prohibition condition is satisfied is a case where an affirmative (Yes) determination result is obtained in each determination from step S2201 to step S2203 shown in FIG. 9. In the symbol display device 110 shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, any one of the variable display, the fixed display (stop display), and the effect display regarding the variable game is displayed. Further, the lottery start condition in step S2204 shown in FIG. 9 is established based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the second special figure starting port 128. In FIG. 41, “with hold” is thinly painted, and the increased hold is further hatched.

  FIG. 41A is a diagram for explaining the probability of making a false advance notice when the number of pending increases is 1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the state where there is one holding A, the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the winning before the winning from which the holding A is derived, and the first lottery is prohibited. The condition is met. While the first lottery prohibition condition is satisfied, a winning B is generated once, and the holding B is increased as a holding based on the winning B.

  When the first lottery prohibition condition is not satisfied, a lottery based on the hold A is performed, and the symbol control start command related to the hold A is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. This symbol variation start command includes information on the increase in the number of reservations in the special diagram 2, information indicating that the common symbol probability variation flag is on, and the like. The number-of-holds increase information in FIG. 2 represents the number of holds increased during the period from when the first lottery prohibition condition is established to when it is not established, that is, from the last lottery to the current lottery. This is information, and here, the information indicating that the reserved increase number is 1 because the reserved B has increased by one.

  When the sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the special figure hold increasing process shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is executed. In this example, in step S433, the second false advance notice determination shown in FIG. The production mode is determined using the table. That is, a determination is made as to whether to perform the second false advance notice or not to perform the second false advance notice. Here, the number of pending increases is 1, and the number of pendings held before the previous lottery (the number of pendings excluding the increment) is also 1, so there is a second false advance notice (second false advance) The winning probability of the mode in which the notice is given is 1/40 = 2.5 / 100.

  Next, the special figure 2 variation game is started based on the symbol variation start command relating to the hold A, and the second lottery prohibition condition is established. The special figure 2 variable game here is based on the hold A.

  When the second lottery prohibition condition is not satisfied, a lottery based on the hold B is performed, and a symbol change start command related to the hold B is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. During the period from when the second lottery prohibition condition is satisfied to when it is not satisfied, there is no game ball winning at the second special figure starting port 128, and the symbol variation start command related to the hold B is Does not contain information on increasing the number of holds.

  Eventually, the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the symbol fluctuation start command relating to the hold B, and the third lottery prohibition condition is established.

  FIG. 41 (b) is a diagram for explaining the probability of making a false advance notice when the number of pending increases is three.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 41 (b), in the state where there is one holding A, the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the winning before the winning from which the holding A is derived, and the first lottery is prohibited. The condition is met. In this example, winning B, winning C, and winning D are generated while the first lottery prohibition condition is satisfied. Based on winning B, holding B based on winning B, winning C based on winning C, and winning D Three holds, such as Hold D, increased.

  If the first lottery prohibition condition is not satisfied, in this example as well, a lottery based on the hold A is performed, and the symbol control start command related to the hold A is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. This symbol variation start command includes the retention number increase information of FIG. 2 indicating that the retention increase number is 3, information indicating that the common probability fluctuation flag is on, and the like.

  When the sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the special figure hold increasing process shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is executed. In this example as well, the second false advance notice determination shown in FIG. The production mode is determined using the table. Here, the number of pending increases is 3, and the number of pendings held before the previous lottery (the number of pendings excluding the increment) is also 1, so there is a second false advance notice (second false advance) The winning probability of the mode in which the notice is given becomes 1−39 / 40 × 29/30 × 19 / 20≈10 / 100. Therefore, the example in which the number of retained increases is 3 has a higher probability of winning with the second false advance notice than the example in which the number of retained increases shown in FIG. It becomes easy to decide the mode to perform advance notice.

  After this, the special figure 2 variable game based on the symbol variation start command related to the hold A is started and the second lottery prohibition condition is set, as in the example when the holding increase number shown in FIG. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the symbol fluctuation start command relating to the hold B, and the third lottery prohibition condition is established.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining an example in which notice notification is started simultaneously with the start of symbol change, and notice notice is ended before the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 42 shows the flow of winning order fluctuations in the first special figure display device 198 and the decorative symbol display device 110, respectively.

  In FIG. 42A, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure using the first special figure display device 198, and the sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative design display device 110 to display the decoration symbol. (Confirmation display) (In this example, a display of decoration 7-decoration 5 and decoration 6 corresponding to a loss) is shown. At the same time, the main controller 300 uses the first special figure holding lamp 199 to display the number of special figure variable games that are held (in this example, 0 times).

  FIG. 5B shows a state where a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 126. When the main control unit 300 detects the entrance of the first special figure starting port 126 by the first starting port sensor, the number of reserved special figure variable games is a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). Therefore, after acquiring the above-mentioned special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value, these random number values are stored in the special figure 1 random game storage number in the special figure 1 random value storage area provided in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a storage area determined based on the above (steps S1101 to S1104). Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 300 uses the first special figure holding lamp 199 to correspond to the number of special figure 1 variable games held (one time in this example). Turn on the number lamps.

  Subsequently, the main control unit 300 executes a series of processes such as a jackpot lottery (step S2205) in the special figure 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. Here, the first loss is won, and the main control unit 300 uses information indicating the start of fluctuation in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 in order to execute the general command rotation start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process. A certain symbol variation start command is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) (step S2217).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 6C, the main control unit 300 uses the first special figure display device 198 to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and also sends a symbol fluctuation start command to the sub control unit 400. Send. As a result, the sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 110 to start variable display using decorative symbols based on the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the sub-control unit 400 that has received this symbol variation start command executes the above-described special symbol hold increasing process. Here, in the symbol variation start command received by the sub-control unit 400, the number-of-holds increase information in FIG. 1 indicating that the number of reserve increases is 1, and the information indicating that the normal probability fluctuation flag is off. Etc. are included. In addition, the number-of-holds increase information includes the special figure 1 winning random number value belonging to the numerical value range of losing and not belonging to the numerical value range of the big hit or the small hit shown in FIG. 10A, and the first number shown in FIG. Special figure 1 random values belonging to a numerical range of 1 loss are included. As a result, the determination in step S433 shown in FIG. 18 is performed. First, the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value is acquired from the special figure 1 notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408. Here, the reserved increase number is 1 and the reserved number excluding the increase is 0, and the acquired special figure 1 notice lottery random value is a numerical range without the second false advance notice in the second false advance notice number determination table. And no advance notice or fake advance notice will be made. The main control unit 300 uses the first special figure reservation lamp 199 to turn off the lamps corresponding to the number of special figure 1 variable games that have been held (in this example, one time).

  FIG. 4D shows a state where the first special figure starting port 126 has been won four times. Here, since the variable display by the decorative symbol based on the special symbol 1 variable game by the decorative symbol display device 110 has started, the lottery prohibition condition is satisfied, and the first special symbol start port 126 is awarded here. All lotteries based on will be put on hold. As shown in FIG. 4D, the main control unit 300 uses the first special figure hold lamp 199 to set the number corresponding to the number of special figure 1 variable games being held (four times in this example). Turn on the lamp.

  In FIG. 8E, the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a is stopped and displayed in the variable symbol display by the decorative symbol display device 110 based on the special symbol 1 variable game. In FIG. In the same figure (g), the decorative symbol in the area 110c is stopped and displayed, and finally the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 110b is stopped and displayed (in this case, the decorative 4-decoration 2-decoration 3 corresponding to the loss). Confirmation display) is made. Further, the first special symbol display device 198 shown in FIG. 3G displays the same stop symbol form as the “special symbol I” of the first lost symbol shown in FIG.

  When the stop display of the special figure 1 is finished, the lottery prohibition condition is not established, and the main control unit 300 executes a series of processes such as the big hit lottery (step S2205) in the special figure 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9H, the main control unit 300 uses the first special figure display device 198 to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the sub control unit 400 displays the symbol fluctuation. Send a start command. As a result, the sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 110 to start variable display using decorative symbols based on the special figure 1 variable game. The main control unit 300 turns off the first special figure holding lamp 198.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 400 that has received this symbol variation start command executes the above-described special symbol hold increasing process. Here, in the symbol variation start command received by the sub-control unit 400, the retention number increase information of FIG. 1 indicating that the retention increase number is 4, and the information indicating that the usual probability variation flag is off. Etc. are included. Moreover, none of the special figure 1 winning random numbers of the three holds excluding the last increased hold in this hold number increase information does not belong to the jackpot value range shown in FIG. The last increase in the special figure 1 winning random number value of the hold belongs to the jackpot value range shown in FIG. 10 (a), and the last increase in the special figure 1 random value of the hold is shown in FIG. 10 (d). It belongs to the numerical range of 15R, and the determination in step S420 shown in FIG. 18 is performed. In step S420, first, the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value is acquired from the special figure 1 notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408. Here, the reserved increase number is 4 and the reserved number excluding the increase is 1, and the special figure 1 notice lottery random value belongs to the numerical range with advance notice in the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. In step S421, the number of prior notices is determined to be four. As a result, the sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative symbol display device 110 to notify the character symbol with a balloon “Are you at all?” As a prior notice simultaneously with the start of symbol variation? Between the same figures (h) to (j), the first special figure display device 198 displays symbols in a variable manner. The symbol variation time here is 5 seconds. The notice notification here is the first in the continuous symbol fluctuation stop display, and ends before the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a shown in FIG. In the first special figure display device 198 shown in FIG. 10 (k), the same stop symbol form as the “special figure I” of the first lost symbol shown in FIG. 3 (a) is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 110 displays a stop display of decoration 0-decoration 8-decoration 9 corresponding to the first loss.

  Subsequently, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game again, and, as shown in FIG. 11 (l), the first special figure display device 198 starts the change of the symbols and the decorative symbol display device. 110 starts the variable display of decorative symbols. Note that one first special figure holding lamp 199 is turned off. In addition, the sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative symbol display device 110 to notify the character symbol with a balloon “Atari? Between the figures (l) to (n), the first special figure display device 198 displays symbols in a variable manner. The variation time of the symbol here is also 5 seconds. In addition, the notice notification here is the second time, and ends before the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a shown in FIG. On the first special figure display device 198 shown in FIG. 5 (o), the same stop symbol form as the “special figure I” of the first lost symbol shown in FIG. 3 (a) is displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 110, a stop display of decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4 corresponding to the first loss is made.

  Subsequently, the main control unit 300 starts the third special figure 1 variable game, and as shown in FIG. 7 (p), the first special figure display device 198 starts changing the symbols and displays the decorative symbols. The apparatus 110 starts displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner. Note that one first special figure holding lamp 199 is turned off. Further, the sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative symbol display device 110 to notify the character symbol with a balloon “Atari?” As a prior notice at the same time when the symbol variation starts. Between the figures (p) to (r), the first special figure display device 198 displays symbols in a variable manner. The variation time of the symbol here is also 5 seconds. The notice notification here is the third time and ends before the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a shown in FIG. On the first special figure display device 198 shown in FIG. 3 (s), the same stop symbol form as the “special figure I” of the first lose symbol shown in FIG. 3 (a) is displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 110, the decoration 9-decoration 7-decoration 8 corresponding to the first loss is displayed.

  Subsequently, the main control unit 300 starts the fourth special figure 1 variable game, and, as shown in FIG. 6 (t), the first special figure display device 198 starts changing the symbols and displays the decorative symbols. The apparatus 110 starts displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner. In addition, one 1st special figure reservation lamp 199 goes out, and all reservations are lost. In addition, the sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative symbol display device 110 to notify the character symbol with a balloon “Atari?” As a prior notice simultaneously with the start of symbol variation. The decorative symbol display device 110 corresponds to an example of the rendering means according to the present invention. Between the figures (t) to (x), the first special figure display device 198 displays symbols in a variable manner. The symbol variation time here is 40 seconds. Moreover, the variation | change form of the decorative design display apparatus 110 here is a double line reach. The fourth notice notification ends before the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a shown in FIG. The special symbol display device 114 shown in FIG. 6 (y-1) displays the same stop symbol form as the “special symbol A” of the 15R special jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 3 (a). In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 110, stop display of decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 corresponding to 15R special big hit is made.

  In addition, the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 indicating that the number of retained increases is 4, which is included in the symbol variation start command received by the sub-control unit 400 at the timing from FIG. In the increase information, the special figure 1 winning random number of the last increased holding belongs to the numerical value range of the small hits shown in FIG. 10A, and the special figure 1 random value of the last increased holding is shown in FIG. It belongs to the numerical value range of the second small hit shown in (c), and the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value has the first false advance notice in the first false advance notice determination table shown in FIG. Even in the case where the first false prior notice number is determined to be 4 in step S426, the process is the same up to (x) in the figure, and as shown in (y-2) in FIG. The special figure display device 198 includes a “special figure” of the second small hit symbol shown in FIG. The same stop symbols aspects are displayed. " In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 110, a stop display of decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3 corresponding to the second small hit is made.

  Furthermore, the number of holds in FIG. 1 indicating that the number of reserved increases included in the symbol variation start command received by the sub-control unit 400 at the timing from FIG. In the increase information, the special figure 1 winning random number of the last increased holding belongs to the numerical range of the loss, and the special figure 1 random value of the holding increased last is the second loss shown in FIG. 10B. And the special figure 1 notice lottery random value belongs to the numerical range with the first false advance notice in the first false advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 19 (c). Even when the number of times of one false advance notice is determined to be four, the same is true up to (x) in the figure, and as shown in (y-3), the first special figure display device 198 includes a figure. The same stop figure as “Special Figure J” of the 2nd Lost symbol shown in 3 (a) Aspects are displayed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 110 displays a stop of decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3 corresponding to the second loss.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining notice notification when a long-term symbol variation is included in a symbol variation in the middle of continuous notice.

  Items that overlap with those described with reference to FIG. 42 are omitted (the same applies hereinafter). Also in the example shown in FIG. 43, the notice is performed over four consecutive symbol fluctuation stop displays.

  In the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the number of holds increased by four, and in the symbol variation start command sent to the sub-control unit 400, the number of holds increased in FIG. It is included. Among the information on the increase in the number of holdings, the special figure 1 winning random number values of the three holdings excluding the holdings that have been increased last do not belong to the jackpot numerical range shown in FIG. The increased reserved special figure 1 winning random number value belongs to the jackpot value range shown in FIG. 10 (a), and the last increased reserved special figure 1 random value is 15R shown in FIG. 10 (d). 18, the determination in step S420 shown in FIG. 18 is performed, and the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value belongs to the numeric range with advance notice in the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. In step S421, the number of prior notices is determined to be four.

  The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game, and as shown in FIG. 5B, the first special figure display device 198 starts changing the design, and the decorative design display device 110 displays the decorative design. Start the variable display. The sub-control unit 400 also notifies the character design with a balloon “Are you at all?” As a prior notice at the same time as the start of design variation? Between the same figure (b)-(d), in the 1st special figure display device 198, the change display of the symbol is performed. The symbol variation time here is 5 seconds. The notice notification here is the first in the continuous symbol variation stop display, and ends before the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a shown in FIG. In the first special figure display device 198 shown in FIG. 3E, the same stop symbol form as the “special figure I” of the first lost symbol shown in FIG. 3A is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 110 displays a stop display of decoration 0-decoration 8-decoration 9 corresponding to the first loss.

  When the stop display in FIG. 1 is completed, the sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300 again, and executes the variation pattern selection process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. Here, step S509 in this variation pattern selection process is executed, but no losing or pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the lottery for performing the pseudo-continuous effect. However, since the change display of the symbol over 40 seconds is performed, in step S504, the notification data for the notification that repeats the notification at intervals not exceeding 5 seconds is selected. That is, in this example, when the symbol variation stop display for displaying the symbol variation for 40 seconds is executed, the variation variation of the timer 1 does not exceed 5 seconds in the symbol variation display for 40 seconds. The advance notice is repeated at intervals (for example, 3 seconds). In this way, in the case of a long variation time in which the symbol variation stop display in the middle of performing the notice notification over a plurality of consecutive symbol variation stop displays (second and subsequent symbol variation stop display) exceeds 5 seconds, When the notice is given in the short fluctuation display following the end of the long fluctuation display by giving the notice so that the interval does not open for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is performed. In addition, the player can be made aware of the relevance (continuity) with the previous notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the announcement notification from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested. In the case where the notice notification is performed a plurality of times in one symbol variation stop display, the same notice effect may be repeated, or the notice effect may be changed every time as shown in this example.

  The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game, and as shown in FIG. 8 (f), the first special figure display device 198 starts changing the design, and the decorative design display device 110 displays the decorative design. Start the variable display. Between the same figure (f)-(j), the 1st special figure display device 198 is carrying out the change display of the symbol. The symbol variation time here is 40 seconds. The variation form of the decorative symbol display device 110 here is multi-line reach. The sub-control unit 400 first notifies the character symbol with a balloon “Atari Kana?” As a prior notice at the same time as the start of the symbol change, and then repeatedly performs the notice notification at intervals not exceeding 5 seconds (same as above). (Repeat Figures (h) and (i)). In the first special figure display device 198 shown in FIG. 10 (k), the same stop symbol form as the “special figure I” of the first lost symbol shown in FIG. 3 (a) is displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 110, a stop display of the decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 5 corresponding to the first loss is made.

  When the stop display in FIG. 1 is completed, the sub-control unit 400 again receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and executes the above-described variation pattern selection process. Here, in step S504 in this variation pattern selection process, the notification is performed for 2 seconds from the start of the variation, and the time between the notification for the current (third) symbol variation and the notification for the next (fourth) symbol variation. The notice data for the notification with the interval of at least 3 seconds shorter than 5 seconds, which is the variation time of the timer 1, is selected.

  The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game, and as shown in FIG. 11 (l), the first special figure display device 198 starts changing the design, and the decorative design display device 110 displays the decorative design. Start the variable display. Between the figures (l) to (o), the first special figure display device 198 displays symbols in a variable manner. The sub-control unit 400 also notifies the character symbol with a balloon “Atari?” As a prior notice for 2 seconds at the same time as the start of the change of the symbol, and does not perform the advance notice for 3 seconds. That is, the notice time is 2 seconds and the interval time is 3 seconds. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the notice from becoming monotonous by giving notice to the notice with a long fluctuation, and to improve the interest of the player. Since the symbol variation time here is 5 seconds, when the interval time of 3 seconds elapses, the first special figure display device 198 as shown in FIG. The same stop symbol form as the “special symbol I” of the first lose symbol shown is displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 110, the decoration 9-decoration 7-decoration 8 corresponding to the first loss is displayed.

  When the stop display of the special figure 1 is finished, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variable game again, and the first special figure display device 198 starts the fluctuation of the symbol as shown in FIG. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 110 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the sub-control unit 400 notifies the character symbol with a balloon “Atari?” As a prior notice at the same time as the symbol variation start. There is a time of 3 seconds or more between the previous notice and the previous advance notice. The variation form of the decorative symbol display device 110 here is double line reach. In the first special figure display device 198 shown in FIG. 9 (u), the same stop symbol form as the special figure A of the 15R special jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 3 (a) is displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 110, stop display of decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 corresponding to 15R special big hit is made.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of notice notification when the pseudo-ream based on the lottery of the sub-control unit in step S509 shown in FIG. 22 is performed.

  Also in FIG. 44, the notice is performed over four consecutive symbol fluctuation stop displays. Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 43, in the continuous notice, a long-term symbol variation enters the symbol variation stop display in the middle. However, in the example shown in FIG. 43, the pseudo continuous effect based on the lottery of the sub-control unit 400 in step S509 shown in FIG. 22 is not performed, but in the example shown in FIG. 44, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 43 will be described.

  The variation time of the second symbol variation stop display (FIGS. 44 (f) to (m)) in the continuous notice is 20 seconds. Before the second symbol variation stop display starts, the variation pattern selection shown in FIG. Step S509 in the process is executed, and a lottery for performing a pseudo-continuous effect is won. Here, the variation time of 20 seconds is divided every 5 seconds (variation time of timer 1), and a total of four pseudo-continuous effects are performed. In each pseudo-continuous effect, a notice is given first, and finally a temporary stop of the symbol is performed. 44 (f) to (g), (h) to (i), (j) to (k), and (l) to (m) are performed four times in a pseudo continuous effect. (H), (j), and (l) are each notified in advance, and temporarily stopped in each of FIGS. 44 (g), (i), and (k). In FIG. 44 (m), since the stop display (main stop) timing coincides with the symbol variation stop display, the main stop is performed here instead of the temporary stop.

  In addition, when the variation time is 40 seconds, the variation time of 40 seconds may be divided every 5 seconds (variation time of timer 1), and a total of 8 pseudo-continuous effects may be performed, or 10 seconds ( It is possible to perform normal reach quasi-continuous effects four times in total for each timer 2 fluctuation time).

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, since the advance notice is a temporary stop display, the display in which the symbol stops is performed a plurality of times in one variation display. In addition, since the temporary stop display is performed a plurality of times in the long variation display, the preliminary stop display and the stop display can be performed in advance, and the effect of the advance notification can be enhanced. The interest of the player can be improved.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a temporary stop in a pseudo-series based on lottery of the sub-control unit is performed as a notice notification.

  Also in FIG. 45, the notice is performed over four consecutive symbol fluctuation stop displays. Of the four consecutive symbol fluctuation stop displays, the first symbol fluctuation stop display (first ear symbol fluctuation stop display) (FIGS. 45A to 45E) and the third previous symbol fluctuation stop display (FIG. 45 (n) to (q)) each fluctuating time is 5 seconds. The fluctuation time of 5 seconds is divided every 2.5 seconds, and a total of 2 pseudo-continuous effects are performed. In each pseudo-continuous effect, finally, a temporary stop of the symbol is performed as a notice of notice. Thus, a temporary stop as a notice of notice is performed in FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (o). 45 (e) and 45 (q) coincide with the timing of the stop display (main stop) in the symbol variation stop display, and therefore the main stop is performed here instead of the temporary stop.

  The variation time of the second previous symbol variation stop display (FIGS. 45 (f) to (m)) is 20 seconds. This 20-second fluctuation time is divided every 5 seconds, and a total of four pseudo-continuous effects are performed in the same manner as before. Thus, a temporary stop as a notice of notice is performed in FIGS. 45 (g), (i), and (k).

  The variation time of the last symbol variation stop display (specific symbol variation stop display) (FIGS. 45 (r) to (z)) is 40 seconds. The fluctuation time of 40 seconds is divided every 10 seconds to perform a pseudo-continuous effect. In the last symbol fluctuation stop display, a temporary stop as a notice of notice is performed in FIGS. 45 (s) and (u). The variation of the decorative symbol display device 110 here is double line reach. From the remaining 20 seconds, decorative symbols equal to the left and right symbol display areas 110a and 110c are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 45 (w)). The variable display is continued only for the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 110b. Therefore, in the remaining two pseudo-continuous effects, priority is given to the fluctuation of the double line reach and no temporary stop (notice notification) is performed. In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect is continuously performed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation stop displays, and the temporary stop is set as a notice of notice. In the case where the selected timer number has a long fluctuation time exceeding 5 seconds, the pseudo-continuation may be performed in the same display mode as that of the timer 1 over the fluctuation time until the temporary stop. Further, even if the selected timer number has a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or less, the preliminary notification may be performed by displaying the temporary stop display once or more.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of the case where the content of the effect of the notice notification varies depending on the gaming state.

  The gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a normal state, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state, a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state, and a special figure low There is a low probability state. The example of the notice notification shown in FIG. 46 is an example when the pachinko machine 100 is in a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, a so-called hidden probability variation state. The notice notification example shown in FIG. 46 and the notice notification example shown in FIG. 42 are the same except that the words (sentences) of the character balloons used for the advance notice are different. That is, in the example of the notice notification shown in FIG. 46, the character lines are all “BONUS?” (See FIGS. 46 (h), (l), (p), (t)). In step S504 in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 21, by selecting the notice data of the notice that gives such a slight difference according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 100, the player is notified of the pachinko machine 100. It is possible to suggest that the gaming state is fluctuating, which is preferable. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 46, by making the player recognize the notice notification different from the notice notice in the normal state, it is possible to make the player think that the hidden probability change state may occur. It should be noted that a plurality of common notice notifications may be performed in a normal state and a state different from the normal state (the hidden probability change state as in this example), and the frequency of the notice notifications may be varied depending on the state. In this case, by recognizing the player that the specific notice notification is frequently issued, it is possible to make the player think that it may be a hidden probability change state.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example in which means for giving a notice of advance notice is added.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, the lighting mode (color, lighting cycle, etc.) of the lamp 1991 representing the last holding among the four first special figure holding lamps 199 is the normal lighting of the lamp 1991 itself. Different from the embodiment. In this example, in addition to the display of the character symbol with a speech balloon, a notice is also given by a lamp 1991 indicating the last hold. The lamps 1991 representing the last hold shown in FIGS. 47D to 47S have different emission colors. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, a display 119 indicating the number of holds in the special figure 1 is shown in the effect display area 110d of the decorative symbol display device 110. Also in the display 119 indicating the number of hold of the special figure, the display mode (color, shape, etc.) of the display 1191 indicating the last hold is different from the normal display mode of the display 1191 itself. Will also give notice. The display 1191 representing the last hold shown in FIGS. 47 (d) to 47 (s) has a different display color.

  The sub-control unit 400 performs notice notification by displaying a character symbol with a balloon and the notice 1191 indicating the last hold, and the main control unit 300 performs lighting control of the lamp 1991 indicating the last hold. .

  Note that the advance notice may be made by sound or the like.

  In addition, FIG. 47 (m) shows a state where there is a prize at the first special figure starting port 126. The symbol variation stop display based on the winning here is after the end of the continuous symbol variation stop display for which the notice of notice is made, and is suspended here. In the example shown in FIG. 47, here, in order to clarify that the hold is consumed after the end of the continuous symbol variation stop display for which the notice is given (the symbol variation stop display is started). The lighting mode of the lamp 1992 representing the hold based on the winning is different from the lighting mode of both the normal lighting mode and the last lighting mode of the lamp 1992 itself. Furthermore, also in the display 1192 representing the number of special figure hold shown in the effect display area 110d of the decorative symbol display device 110, the display 1192 itself displays both the normal display form and the last display form. It is different from the embodiment.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the advance notification is performed using a movable object.

  In the example shown in FIG. 48, the advance notice is performed using the movable member 210 simulating a human arm. The advance notice here is performed over two consecutive symbol fluctuation stop displays. In this example, the symbols are temporarily stopped (FIGS. 48 (c), (e), (i), (k)) in each symbol variation stop display, and the notice is notified every time the symbols are temporarily stopped. Done. That is, in the temporary stop of the symbol shown in FIG. 48 (c), the advance notice is given by the movable member 210 swinging loosely from the elbow portion, and in the temporary stop of the symbol shown in FIG. 48 (e). Performs a notice of advance notice when the movable member 210 bends the forearm slightly with the elbow as a base point. When the symbol is stopped (the main stop) in the first symbol variation stop display (the first previous symbol variation stop display), the advance notice using the movable member 210 is not performed as shown in FIG. . Further, in the temporary stop of the symbol shown in FIG. 48 (i), the movable member 210 makes a warning notice by bending the forearm to nearly 90 degrees with the elbow as a base point, and in the temporary stop of the symbol shown in FIG. 48 (k). Performs a warning notification by lifting the entire upper arm from the shoulder portion after the movable member 210 bends the forearm to nearly 90 degrees. As described above, as the symbol main stop (FIG. 49 (m)) in the last symbol variation stop display is approached, the movement of the movable member 210 increases and rises toward the climax.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notice is given in transition to a game effect.

  FIG. 49 (a) shows a state where there is no hold, and in FIG. 49 (b), there is one winning at the first special figure starting port 126 and while the symbols are changing (FIG. 49 (c)). (F)), (d), there were four winnings at the first special figure starting port 126. Also in this case, the symbol variation start command sent to the sub-control unit 400 includes the pending number increase information of FIG. Among the information on the increase in the number of holdings, the special figure 1 winning random number values of the three holdings excluding the holdings that have been increased last do not belong to the jackpot numerical range shown in FIG. The increased reserved special figure 1 winning random number value belongs to the jackpot value range shown in FIG. 10 (a), and the last increased reserved special figure 1 random value is 15R shown in FIG. 10 (d). 18, the determination in step S420 shown in FIG. 18 is performed, and the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value belongs to the numeric range with advance notice in the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. In step S421, the number of prior notices is determined to be four. Note that the symbol variation stop display is performed four times in succession.

  In FIG. 49 (g), the first special symbol display device 198 terminates the symbol variation, displays the first lost pattern pattern, and the decorative symbol display device 110 also displays the first lost decorative symbol combination (decoration 4- Decoration 2-Decoration 3) is stopped and displayed. When the stop display in FIG. 1 ends, the sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, executes the variation pattern selection process described above, and selects the effect data for the notice notification (step) S504). Here, the effect data of the game effect by the hero and the enemy role is selected as the effect data of the notice notification.

  In FIG. 49 (h), the first symbol variation stop display (first symbol variation stop display) is started, and the first special symbol display device 198 starts symbol variation. Also, in the first symbol variation stop display, the background of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 110 is switched, and the game shifts to a game effect by the hero and the enemy. In this example, the notice itself indicates that the background is switched and the game effect is displayed. The advance notice by this game effect is continued until the fourth symbol variation stop display (specific symbol variation stop display). Furthermore, in the same figure (i), the scene which a hero and an enemy character cut is displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 110 at the timing which the decoration symbol of the left symbol display area 110a stops. It is also a notice that the scene where the hero and the enemy role are connected is displayed. That is, the notice notification by this scene display is a single notice notice of the same type as the notice notice in which the character appeared in the example of FIG. In FIG. 7 (k), the first special symbol display device 198 terminates the symbol variation and displays the first lost pattern pattern, and the decorative symbol display device 110 displays a combination of the first lost decorative symbols (decoration). 0-decoration 8-decoration 9) is stopped and displayed on the upper right.

  49 (l) to (o) are the second previous symbol variation stop display, and FIGS. 49 (p) to (s) are the third previous symbol variation stop display. Also in these previous symbol fluctuation stop displays, the decorative symbol display device 110 displays a game effect, and the notice effect continues. Furthermore, as shown in (m) and (q) in the figure, a scene where the main character and an enemy character are connected to the decorative symbol display device 110 at the timing when the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a is stopped and displayed is a single notice effect. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 49 (t), the fourth symbol variation stop display (specific symbol variation stop display) is started, and the first special symbol display device 198 starts symbol variation. On the decorative symbol display device 110, the game effect is continuously displayed, and the notice effect is continued. Also, in the figure (u), at the timing when the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 110a is stopped and displayed, the scene where the main character and the enemy character are connected is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 110 as a single notice effect. In the case of -1), the first special figure display device 198 terminates the symbol variation and displays the stop symbol pattern of the 15R special jackpot. In addition, the decorative symbol display apparatus 110 displays a combination of the decorative symbols of 15R special jackpot (decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7) at the center with a large image of the winning game by the main character.

  In addition, the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 indicating that the number of retained increases is 4, which is included in the symbol variation start command received by the sub-control unit 400 at the timing from FIG. In the increase information, the special figure 1 winning random number of the last increased holding belongs to the numerical value range of the small hits shown in FIG. 10A, and the special figure 1 random value of the last increased holding is shown in FIG. It belongs to the numerical value range of the second small hit shown in (c), and the special figure 1 notice lottery random number value has the first false advance notice in the first false advance notice determination table shown in FIG. Even in the case where the first false prior notice number is determined to be 4 in step S426, the process is the same up to (x) in the figure, and as shown in (y-2) in FIG. The special figure display device 198 includes a “special figure” of the second small hit symbol shown in FIG. The same stop symbols aspects are displayed. " In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 110, a stop display of decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3 corresponding to the second small hit is made.

  Furthermore, the number of holds in FIG. 1 indicating that the number of reserved increases included in the symbol variation start command received by the sub-control unit 400 at the timing from FIG. In the increase information, the special figure 1 winning random number of the last increased holding belongs to the numerical range of the loss, and the special figure 1 random value of the holding increased last is the second loss shown in FIG. 10B. And the special figure 1 notice lottery random value belongs to the numerical range with the first false advance notice in the first false advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 19 (c). Even when the number of times of one false advance notice is determined to be four, the same is true up to (x) in the figure, and as shown in (y-3), the first special figure display device 198 includes a figure. The same stop figure as “Special Figure J” of the 2nd Lost symbol shown in 3 (a) Aspects are displayed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 110 displays a stop of decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3 corresponding to the second loss.

  In the description of the previous notice, the advance notice has been mainly described. However, the false advance notice is performed in the same manner as the advance notice.

  So far, only the winning of the first special figure starting port 126 and the second special figure starting port 128 to the first special figure starting port 126 has been described, but the winning to the second special figure starting port 128 has been described. Is also the same as the winning to the first special figure starting port 126 described so far.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating the flow of winning order fluctuations in each of the first special figure display device 198, the second special figure display device 114, and the decorative symbol display device 110.

  In the state shown in FIG. 50A, both the first special figure hold lamp 199 and the second special figure hold lamp 118 are extinguished and there is no hold, and in FIGS. 2 The special symbol display device 114 is changing the design, and the decorative design display device 110 is also changing the display. Further, in FIG. 6B, there was a prize at the second special figure starting port 128, and further, there was a prize at the first special figure starting port 126 in FIG. As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 6D where the stop display of FIG. 2 is completed, the number of holdings increases by two, and the number of holding increases is 1 in the symbol variation start command sent to the sub-control unit 400. The holding number increase information of FIG. 1 indicating the existence and the holding number increase information of FIG. 2 indicating that the holding increase number is 1 are included. Among these holding number increase information, the special figure 1 winning random value of the holding number increase information of the holding figure 2 of the holding that was initially increased does not belong to the jackpot value range shown in FIG. 10 (a). The special figure 1 winning random number of the holding number increase information of the holding figure 1 that has been increased later belongs to the jackpot value range shown in FIG. The special figure 1 random number value belongs to the numerical value range of 15R shown in FIG. 10 (d), the determination in step S420 shown in FIG. 18 is performed, and the special figure 1 notice lottery random value is shown in FIG. 19 (a). It belongs to the numerical range with prior notice in the prior notice determination table shown, and the number of prior notices is determined to be 2 in step S421.

  In FIG. 9D, the second special symbol display device 114 finishes the symbol variation, displays the stop symbol pattern of the first loss, and the decorative symbol display device 110 also combines the decorative pattern of the first loss (decoration 7- Decoration 7-Decoration 3) is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the special figure 2 is prioritized over the special figure 1, so when the stop display of the special figure 2 is finished, the special figure 2 related lottery process shown in FIG. 9 is performed first, as shown in FIG. The special figure 1 related lottery process will be performed later.

  In FIG. 5E, the first symbol variation stop display (previous symbol variation stop display) is started. In the first symbol variation stop display, the second special symbol display device 114 performs symbol variation, and the decorative symbol display device 110 is notified that a different character appears twice (FIGS. (F) and (g)). )). In FIG. 11H, the second special symbol display device 114 finishes the symbol variation and displays the stop pattern pattern of the first loss, and the decorative symbol display device 110 displays a combination (decoration) of the decorative pattern of the first loss. 7-decoration 3-decoration 9) is stopped and displayed. When the stop display of the special figure 2 is completed, the special figure 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. 15 is performed.

  In FIG. 5 (i), the second symbol variation stop display (specific symbol variation stop display) is started. In the second symbol variation stop display, the first special symbol display device 198 performs symbol variation, and here again, the decorative symbol display device 110 is notified that a different character appears twice ((j), (K)). In FIG. 1L, the first special symbol display device 198 ends the symbol variation and displays the stop symbol pattern of the 15R special jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 110 also displays a combination of the decorative symbols of 15R special jackpot (decoration). 7-decoration 7-decoration 7) is stopped and displayed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, a mode of whether or not to make a lottery (preliminary notice, first false advance notice, or second false advance notice) lottery (notice notice notice) that takes into account the increased amount of hold Determination of whether or not to make a game), so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the player. In other words, the probability of whether or not to notify the notice is different depending on whether the increase in the number of holdings is small or large. You can make a variety of ways. In addition, if the number of on-holds has not increased, no notice notification that takes into account the number of increases will be made, so the hold that has been subject to the advance notice lottery will not be re-targeted, and the reliability of the notice notification effect will be easily calculated. can do. In addition, since it is possible to perform the lottery of the notice notification in consideration of the increase in the hold, it is possible to improve the apparent credibility of the notice notice.

  In addition, the number of pending increase is the specific period from the last lottery for special figure variable games to the current lottery (from the previous decision on whether to make a notice notification or not to the current decision) By increasing the number of specific periods), it is possible to perform a lottery for a notice notification that takes into account the increased holding during the specific period. In other words, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the increase amount of the hold during the specific period, and it is possible to variously display the notice notice. In addition, when developing a game machine, it is possible to easily predict the winning value of the lottery for the advance notice and reduce the development man-hours.

  In addition, since the notice increase becomes easier as the increase in the number of hold increases, the player can be noticed about the increase amount of the hold during the predetermined period, and the game can be easily performed when the increase amount is large. The player can be expected to hit any of the increased holdings, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the sub-control unit performs a lottery of the notice notification in consideration of the increment of the hold in the predetermined period until the current decision on whether to make the notice notice or not, the player's expectation degree Therefore, it is possible to provide a game stand that can appropriately play the game, and to further improve the interest of the player. In addition, since the main control unit does not need to output information indicating the increase to the sub-control unit for each increase in holding, the timing related to transmission / reception between the main control unit and the sub-control unit is reduced to reduce the processing load. be able to.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 described so far will be supplemented.

  With conventional game machines, it has become possible to improve the fun to some extent, such as not only simply starting the game and displaying the results, but also giving the player a sense of expectation during the game. However, if a function that can expand the range of games is not installed, the player may get bored immediately. In addition, in a conventional gaming table, whether or not the right to change the symbol before starting the change of the symbol is determined in advance (so-called prefetching) and it is determined that an advantageous gaming state is generated, By changing the time (fluctuation time) of the symbol variation before the symbol variation based on it, the range of game play was expanded.

  However, since the number of lotteries is higher when the increase in the number of holdings is small and large, the player's expectation value is high, but the conventional game table reflects the increase in the number of holdings in advance. Since the advance notice was not performed, the player could not be beaten effectively, and there was a problem that the interest of the player's game was reduced.

  The pachinko machine 100 described so far has been made to solve such a conventional problem, and the game performance is improved by performing a notice execution lottery that takes into account the increase in the holding amount. An object of the present invention is to provide a game stand that can maintain the willingness to play.

  In the above description, the reservation number increase information of FIG. 1 and the reservation number increase information of FIG. 2 are included in the symbol variation start command. However, these reservation number increase information is transmitted to the symbol variation start command. It may be transmitted directly at the same timing as the timing, or may be transmitted by being included in another command.

  In addition, it was determined whether or not to give a prior notice based on the number of holdings increased during the period from the previous lottery to the current lottery (the period from the previous advance notice determination to the current one). In addition to this period, it may be based on the number of increase in holdings during a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) or the number of holdings increased during the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). May be based.

  Furthermore, in the explanation so far, the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure 2 variable game is prioritized over the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure 1 variable game, but the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are awarded to the start opening. The symbol variation stop display may be performed in order, or the symbol variation stop display may be performed simultaneously for the special symbols 1 and 2. Moreover, although the example which handles two types of special figures, special figure 1 and special figure 2, was demonstrated, this invention is applicable also to the pachinko machine which handles one type of special figure.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment which applied this invention to the pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) was described in detail, the game stand of this invention is not restricted to this, For example, a medal and a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine using a slot machine. Further, the present invention may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, and a pinball machine. In addition, the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a casino machine, a video game machine, an encapsulated pachinko gaming machine) that can be played with the input of gaming media, and a gaming machine that uses the gaming media itself for gaming (for example, It may be applied to a medal dropping game machine). Here, “inserting game media” means “betting”, and “bet” is also agreed. “Input of game media” includes “input of currency” and “input of electronic money”. A casino machine is a casino in which a game can be started by inserting a currency, and when a lottery result is won, a symbol set in association with the corresponding selection result is stopped, and a payout as a bonus to a player is performed. Machine.

  Next, the example which changed this invention is further demonstrated.

  The modification examples (hereinafter, simply referred to as modification examples) of the present invention described below can be applied to all the embodiments and modification examples described above.

  In addition, although the example demonstrated here is not restricted to the example which changed embodiment mentioned above, all what can be applied to game machines, such as the pachinko machine 100 mentioned above, shall be applicable. In addition, the phrase “applicable to the first embodiment” is attached to what is particularly desired to be applied to the first embodiment, but this indicates that the present invention can be applied to the first embodiment. Just because there is no error does not mean that it cannot be applied to the first embodiment.

(Modification 1)
In the first modified example, the notice for the lottery of the special figure 1 based on the case where the first special figure starting port 126 is won in the normal figure high probability state is performed when the normal figure low probability state is entered. The present invention can be applied to the first embodiment or other embodiments.

  The first modification is intended to provide a notice for the suspension of the special figure 1 after the usual high probability state is completed while preventing the stoppage shown in the first embodiment.

  In this modified example, the notice probability of the lottery notice based on the first special figure start opening prize during the high probability of ordinary figure and the lottery notice notice based on the first special figure start entry prize during the low probability of ordinary figure. The same lottery table may be used because it is not necessary to make the previous notice probability different. Thus, “a game having a first start port and a second start port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a relatively difficult to win state. In the table, a winning storage unit that stores a predetermined number of game balls won at the first starting port, and stores up to a predetermined number of gaming balls won at the second starting port; In the case where there is one or more winning memories stored in the winning memory unit, a lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to a player, and a lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, A lottery result notifying means for giving a notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the starting port of 2 in preference to the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first starting port; and the lottery result Before the notification, the lottery result is A warning notification means for performing a warning notification including a warning information that makes a player expect a good result at a predetermined warning probability, wherein the warning notification means has the second starting port in the winning-award state. In such a case, it is controlled so that the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting port is performed when the second starting port is in the difficult to win state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game stand that prevents the stoppage and enhances the fun of the game.

  Further, “the notice notifying means controls not to give a notice of a lottery result of a lottery based on winning to the first start opening when the second start opening is in the winning easy state. In some cases, the lottery processing program can be simplified.

  Further, “the advance notice unit notifies the advance notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the second start port when the second start port is in the easy-to-win state. Is characterized in that it is controlled so as to be performed even in the case where the player is in the easy-to-win state. ”

  Further, “the advance notice unit performs a lottery for determining whether or not the advance notice is given when a game ball wins a first start opening, and the second start opening is in the easy winning state. A preliminary lottery result storage unit for storing a lottery result of the preliminary lottery in some cases, and the preliminary notice unit is configured so that the winning probability selecting unit can easily win a prize when the second starting port is in the difficult to win state. When it becomes a state, based on the memory of the notice lottery result storage unit, it is controlled to notify the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port. In some cases, the lottery processing program can be simplified.

  And an easy change means for changing the second starting port from the difficult to win state to the easy to win state on the condition that the lottery means has acquired the specific lottery result. The control means is arranged so that the easy change means changes the second start opening from the difficult to win state to the easy win state after the lottery means acquires the specific lottery result. It is characterized in that the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the game ball is controlled so that it is performed when the second starting port is in the difficult to win state ”. In addition to the probability, it is possible to surely prevent the stop-hit game by not performing the period from the acquisition of the jackpot lottery random number that confirms the transition in the normal high probability until the normal high probability ends. it can. More specifically, it is possible to avoid being stopped in order to digest the suspension of the special figure 1 when there is no prior notice at the time of starting the usual figure after the end of the jackpot. The notice notification control means indicates that the specific lottery result indicates that the easy change means does not change the second starting port from the difficult-to-win state to the easy-to-win state, and the special game state is triggered. If the result is a lottery result, the control may be performed so that a notice is given even when the winning state is easy.

  Further, “a first control unit (main control unit) including the lottery unit and the advance notice unit, and a second control unit different from the first control unit, the advance notice unit. A second control unit (sub-control unit) including a notice effect execution means for receiving a notice notice command which is a notice notice execution command output by the control unit and executes the notice notice. In the case where the second starting port is in the easy-to-win state, the notice notification command is not transmitted to the second control unit, and the second starting port is in the difficult to win state. In this case, the notice notification command may be transmitted to the second control unit ”. A configuration is also possible in which the notification information is transmitted to the sub-control unit, and the sub-control unit stores the notice information, and the notice is notified at the end of the time reduction. When read, it is preferable not to output from the main control unit because there is a case where profits may be obtained illegally by performing the stopping attack strategy described in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the second control unit includes, in addition to the notice notification, an effect notification means for performing an effect notification that enhances the fun of the game. In the easy state, as the effect notification, the notification device performs notification that is continuous with the notification that is performed when the second starting port is in the difficult-to-win state. Thus, continuous notification can be performed from the high probability of ordinary figure to the advance notice in the low probability state after completion of the ordinary probability of ordinary figure. In this case, notifications during high-probability high-probability and low-probability notifications after the completion of high-probability high-probability are continuous. The notice during the low probability after the end of the high probability is a notice notice. In addition, at the time of performing notification during the high figure probability, the sub-control unit 400 does not know whether or not to give a notice when the normal figure low probability state changes to the normal figure low probability state. You may make it perform alerting | reporting followed by the alerting notification performed after completion | finish of the figure high probability. In addition, a plurality of patterns are provided for the notice notification that is executed after the end of the high probability of the usual figure, and the notice information that is executed after the end of the high probability of the figure is selected from the plurality of patterns based on the notice notified during the high probability of the usual figure. You may make it select.

  In addition, “when the second starting port is in the easy-to-win state, the notice of the lottery result based on the winning to the first starting port is notified, and the second starting port is selected by the lottery means. `` It is characterized by controlling so that it will not be performed when it becomes difficult to win due to the special gaming state when the result is a specific result '', so that it becomes a low probability state It is possible to exclude the big hit from the conditions.

(Modification 2)
In addition to simply starting the game and displaying the results, it has become possible to improve the interest by making the player have a sense of expectation in the middle of the game, but the range of games can be expanded Aside from the fear that the player will soon get bored if the player does not have a special function, the conventional game stand makes an advantageous decision about the right to change the symbol before starting the change display. When it is determined that a game state is to be generated, the range of game play has been expanded by changing the variation time of the variation display before the symbol variation based on the right. However, when changing the fluctuation time based on the result of the determination of success / failure in advance, it is possible to increase the number of success / failure lottery more than before, so the number of jackpots will naturally increase, There was a problem that gambling was increased. However, when a notice is given without changing the variation time based on the result of the determination as to whether or not it has been made in advance, the last variation display of the continuous variation display may not be a long variation time. In this case, there is a possibility that the notice effect of the notice in the continuous variable display is lowered, and the interest of the player is lowered. The modified example 2 solves this problem and can be applied to the first embodiment or other embodiments.

  That is, “when a game ball enters the predetermined start port, the display of the variation of the symbol over the variation time of at least one of the first variation time and the second variation time shorter than the first variation time is started. A predetermined symbol display means, and when the symbol mode stopped by the symbol display means is the first specific symbol mode, the first special gaming state advantageous to the player is started and the symbol display means stops the display. Special game state starting means for starting a second special game state that is hardly advantageous to the player when the aspect is the second specific symbol aspect, wherein the symbol display means is the first specific symbol aspect or the first 2 When a specific symbol pattern is stopped and displayed after variable display, it is suggested that the symbol display means is highly likely to stop display the first specific symbol pattern in a plurality of variable displays with the variable display last. By performing notification notification and performing the variation display over the first variation time ”, when performing multiple notifications, the last variation display is displayed with a long variation time (first variation time). )It can be carried out. Or, compared with the case where the last variation display is a short variation time (second variation time), it is possible to prevent the effect of the announcement notification from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested. Alternatively, since the advance notice is given, the player can recognize that the first special game state or the second special game state, which is hardly advantageous, is started. The player can be interested in whether or not the state is started, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, by starting the second special gaming state that is not advantageous at the end of the continuous notice, which is hardly advantageous, it is possible to give the player the feeling that it is better than the lose, and the fun of the game is reduced. Can be prevented (disappointing and reducing the degree). Note that the “second special game state that is hardly advantageous” here refers to the 2R normal jackpot or the small jackpot of the first embodiment (in the case of the jackpot lottery, the lottery is drawn from the jackpot, the jackpot or lose) In this case, the attacker opens only for 1R and does not shift to the normal figure high probability state or the special figure high probability state).

  Further, “if there is a variation display of the first variation time before the variation display of the second variation time among the plurality of variation displays, the second variation time in the variation display of the first variation time. In the case where the notice is given when a short fluctuation display is performed after a long fluctuation display, the warning information is provided at an interval not exceeding the second fluctuation time with a long fluctuation display. Since the advance notice is performed, the player can be made aware of the relevance (continuity) with the previous advance notice when the advance notice is given in the short variation display after the end of the long variation display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the announcement notification from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested.

  In addition, “when the variation time of the first variation display among the plurality of variation displays is shorter than the first variation time, the notice notification is performed”, so that the first variation time is long. When there is no (short) notice notification is started, the last variation time is set to a longer variation time than the first, so the effect of continuous notice notification can be enhanced and the player's interest can be improved. it can.

  In addition, since the notice notification includes a temporary stop display of a symbol different from the symbol stop display, the notice notification is a temporary stop display. The display to be performed is performed a plurality of times. In addition, since the temporary stop display is performed a plurality of times in the long variation display, the preliminary stop display and the stop display can be performed in advance, and the effect of the advance notification can be enhanced. The interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, “in any one of the continuous variation displays of the plurality of variation displays, at least after a third variation time shorter than the second variation time has elapsed since the previous notification in the previous variation display ended. , Characterized in that the advance notice is given in the next fluctuation display ”, so that the advance notice is not given at least for the third change time between the advance notice and the notice notice. It is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, “the special gaming state start means starts a third special gaming state advantageous to the player, with at least one of the conditions being the end of the second special gaming state”. Since the third special game state advantageous to the player may be started after the end of the second special game state, even if the player starts the second special game state after notification of the advance notice, A game can be played with the expectation that a gaming state may be started. In addition, when the third special gaming state is a state that is difficult for the player to discriminate, it is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not it is the third special gaming state even after the second special gaming state has ended. , The interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, “the second specific symbol aspect includes a first symbol aspect and a second symbol aspect, and a variation display variation time when the first symbol aspect is stopped and displayed is the first variation time. Yes, the variation display variation time when the second symbol mode is stopped and displayed is the second variation time, and the variation display variation time for starting the third special gaming state is the second variation time. Whether or not the first special gaming state is entered when the last of the plurality of variable displays with a notice is the first variable time variable display. If the second special gaming state is started after the variation display of the second variation time, it can be expected whether or not the third special gaming state is entered.

  In addition, “If the symbol display means does not stop display the first specific symbol mode or the second specific symbol mode after the variable display, whether the notice is to be given in a plurality of variable displays including the variable display at the end. By providing the lose notice / notification determination means for determining whether or not ”, the notice can be given even in the case of a loss, so the production can be made more diverse.

  In addition, “when the symbol display means stops displaying the first specific symbol aspect or the second specific symbol aspect after the variable display, whether the notice of notice is performed in a plurality of variable displays including the variable display at the end. There may be provided a notice notification determination means for determining whether or not the notice notification determination means does not perform the determination while the notice notification is being performed.

  Further, “the predetermined symbol display means includes a first symbol display means and a second symbol display means, and one of the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means is the first specific symbol mode or When the second specific symbol form is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display, in the other variable display of the first symbol display means or the second symbol display means, the one stops and displays the first specific symbol aspect. It may be characterized in that a notice to notify that there is a high possibility is given, and the possibility that the second specific symbol form is stopped and displayed is different between the one and the other.

  In addition, “a plurality of variable winning holes that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter are provided. One of the plurality of variable winning awards is opened in a predetermined manner during the state or the second special game state, and the plurality of variable during the first special game state or the second special game state where the advance notice is not performed. It may be characterized in that the other winning opening is opened in a predetermined manner.

(Modification 3)
The modification example 3 has “a first start port and a second start port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a difficult to win state. In the game stand, a winning storage unit that stores a predetermined number of game balls won at the first starting port and stores a predetermined number of gaming balls won at the second starting port; The lottery means for drawing the profit amount to be given to the player when the winning memory unit has one or more winning memories, and the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, The lottery result notifying means for giving a notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the second starting port in preference to the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting port, and the lottery result Before informing the player of the lottery result A notice notifying unit that performs notice notification including notice information that causes the player to expect a favorable result at a predetermined notice probability, and the notice notifying unit is based on winning in the first starting opening When the second start port is in the winning state and the predetermined notification condition is not satisfied, the second start port is in the winning state and the predetermined notification condition. It is characterized in that the control is performed so that the case where is established is performed with a higher notice probability ”. This is also applicable to the first embodiment or other embodiments.

  The predetermined condition includes, for example, “a winning difficulty transition means that shifts from the easy winning state to the difficult winning state when the lottery means a lottery a predetermined number of times, and the predetermined condition is determined by the difficult winning transition means. The remaining number of times until the transition to the transition from the winning easy state to the difficult winning state may be a predetermined number. Even if the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first starting port is notified when the usual high probability state is about to end, the stop-stop game is not performed compared to the case where it is not just before. It is. Further, for example, “it includes a difficult-to-winner transition unit that shifts from the easy-to-win state to the difficult-to-win state when the lottery unit has drawn a predetermined number of times. The remaining number of times until the transition from the state to the difficult to win state is a predetermined number, and the number of reserves at the second start port is a predetermined number. For example, if the remaining number of times until the transition to the low-probability state is 2 and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 4, when the lottery is made, This is because there is no problem because it is usually in a low probability state. It is difficult to indicate an absolute expression because the expression differs depending on the procedure of the process. However, “the predetermined condition is that the notice notification means starts from the notice notification and shifts to the winning difficult state. It may be on condition that the first start opening is not lottery ”. In this way, it is not possible to digest the suspension of the special figure 1 by making a stop hit, so that it is not possible to obtain a double jackpot, and it is possible to reduce the number of players who make a stop hit.

(Modification 4)
In addition to simply starting the game and displaying the results, it has become possible to improve the interest by making the player have a sense of expectation in the middle of the game, but the range of games can be expanded Aside from the fear that the player will soon get bored if the player does not have a special function, the conventional game stand makes an advantageous decision about the right to change the symbol before starting the change display. When it is determined that a game state is to be generated, the range of game play has been expanded by changing the variation time of the variation display before the symbol variation based on the right. However, when changing the fluctuation time based on the result of the determination of success / failure in advance, it is possible to increase the number of success / failure lottery more than before, so the number of jackpots will naturally increase, There was a problem that gambling was increased. However, when a notice is given without changing the fluctuation time based on the result of the determination of whether or not the user has made a decision in advance, a long fluctuation time such as 40 seconds may be selected during the continuous notice effect. There is a risk that the continuity of the production will be impaired, the production effect will be reduced, and the interest of the player will be reduced. For this reason, rather than continuous notice to try to notify the jackpot over multiple special drawing lottery, pseudo-continuous that makes one special drawing lottery appear as if there were multiple special drawing lotteries and enhances the fun of the game It is conceivable that the advance notice makes it easier to adjust the time because the variable time can be determined after the lottery, and that it is easier to improve the interest of the player. However, the pseudo-continuous notice makes one special figure change look like multiple special figure changes, so the special figure change time per unit time becomes longer and the operation of the amusement store may be reduced. There's a problem. The modified example 4 solves this problem and can be applied to the first embodiment or other embodiments.

  That is, “in a game stand having a start opening, when there is a winning storage section for storing up to a predetermined number of game balls won at the starting opening, and at least one winning storage in the winning storage section, A lottery means for performing a lottery of a profit amount to be given to the player, a lottery result notifying unit for notifying the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, and the lottery result is advantageous for the player before notifying the lottery result. A notice notifying unit that performs notice notification including notice information that makes the player expect that the result is a predetermined result at a predetermined notice probability, and the lottery result notifying unit is configured to display a result of one lottery performed by the lottery means. The pseudo continuous lottery result notification is performed to make the notification appear as if the lottery result has been notified a plurality of times, and the notice notification means performs the notice notification that is continuous with the pseudo continuous lottery notification performed by the lottery result notification means. It is possible to change the place where the previous pseudo-sequential notice was made 5 times to 1 notice effect + 4 pseudo-sequential notices, etc., and the special drawing lottery time per unit time can be changed. It may be possible to decrease and increase the operation of the amusement store.

  In addition, “the notice notification means performs the notice of other lottery results performed before notifying the lottery result that the lottery result is the notice notice, and the lottery result notice means displays the lottery result. Control may be performed so that the pseudo continuous lottery notification is performed when informing. Specifically, if there is a hold for notifying the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning prize that triggered the advance notice, the notice of the lottery result for the hold will be notified. For example, it is possible to provide a notification that the degree of expectation is high if the stop symbol is a predetermined symbol, or that the degree of expectation is high if the stop mode is a predetermined mode.

  In addition, the “notice notification unit is characterized by performing a notification to notify the part of the pseudo continuous lottery notification performed by the lottery result notification unit”, thereby reducing the special drawing lottery time per unit time. Can be made. For example, “5” is displayed in the notice effect, and “4”, “3”, “2”, “1”, and “big hit!” Are displayed in the pseudo continuous lottery notification. By making it part, the special drawing lottery time per unit time can be reduced.

  In addition, “the lottery result notifying unit starts notifying the lottery result as the pseudo continuous lottery result notification, and performs false end notification and false start notification of the lottery result once or more until the lottery result notification ends. At the same time, a pseudo continuous notice emphasis notice for emphasizing that the false end notice or the false start notice has been performed is performed, and the notice notice means is performed before notifying the lottery result for which the notice notice is to be performed. It may be characterized in that a notification related to the false start notification is performed when starting the notification of another lottery result ”. To give a specific example, when there are three special drawings on hold and a notice is given for the third lottery, the second decorative symbol starts to change after the first decorative symbol ends. When this is done, “another time!” Is notified as a notification related to the pseudo continuous notice emphasis notification. When the third decorative symbol starts to fluctuate after the second decorative symbol has finished changing, the message “again, once again!” Is notified. The third variation of the decorative symbol is a big hit (or small hit), so it is easier to select a longer variation time than the loss (40 seconds here), and the third variation when a long variation time is selected. The variation of the decorative pattern is more likely to be a pseudo-continuous notice if the notice effect is executed in advance than when the notice effect is not executed in advance. When the pseudo continuous notice is selected, a false end notification (such as a temporary stop of the symbol) is performed upon the third decorative symbol change, and then a false start notification (revariation of the symbol) is performed. "Time!" Furthermore, when a false start notification is made via a false end notification, the notification is “It is the fourth time!”. Furthermore, when a false start notification is made via a false end notification, the notification is “5th! This is amazing!”. After that, the special symbol stops displaying the jackpot, and the decorative symbol also displays the symbol combination indicating the jackpot. Note that “the notice notification means provides a notice when the notice of the lottery result immediately before the lottery result for which the pseudo continuous notice notice is given, when the notice result of the lottery is the first time, In the case where the notification is made at any one of the second times longer than the time, the first time may be characterized in that the notification probability of making the notification notification is higher than the second time. This is because, when a long variation time is selected, the continuity as the pseudo continuous notice is lost, and therefore it is desirable to notify the lottery result different from the continuous notice. In addition, when the second time is selected, it is not necessary to give any notice.

  In addition, “the lottery result notifying unit starts notifying the lottery result as the pseudo continuous lottery result notification, and performs false end notification and false start notification of the lottery result once or more until the lottery result notification ends. At the same time, a pseudo-continuous notice emphasis notice for emphasizing that the false end notice and the false start notice are performed is performed, and the notice notice means is performed before notifying the lottery result for which the notice notice is to be performed. When the other lottery results are terminated, a notification related to the false start notification may be performed ”. When a specific example is given, there are three special figure holds, and when the notice for the third lottery is given, it is related to the pseudo continuous notice emphasis notice when the variation of the first decorative symbol is finished. As a notification, the shielding member is completely shielded once. Then, after the second decorative symbol starts to fluctuate and the second decorative symbol ends to fluctuate, the shielding member is fully shielded twice as a notification related to the pseudo continuous notice emphasis notification (after the first full shielding, 1 Open all times and shield all, and the same manner in the case of 3 times and 4 times). Then, the third decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. The third variation of the decorative pattern is a big hit (or small hit), so it is easier to select a longer fluctuation time than in the case of a loss (40 seconds here). The third variation of the decorative symbol is more likely to be a pseudo continuous notice if the notice effect is executed in advance than the case where the notice effect is not executed in advance. When the pseudo continuous notice is selected, the shielding member is fully shielded three times as a pseudo continuous notice emphasizing notice when a false end notice (such as temporary stop of the decorative figure) is given when the third decorative symbol changes. After that, false start notification (re-decoration of decoration symbol) is performed, and when false end notification is performed, false start notification covering all four times of the shielding member is performed as pseudo continuous advance notice emphasis notification, and the jackpot is stopped and displayed. Along with this, the decorative symbol also displays a symbol combination indicating a big hit.

  Note that “the notice notification means provides a notice when the notice of the lottery result immediately before the lottery result for which the pseudo continuous notice notice is given, when the notice result of the lottery is the first time, In the case where the notification is made at any one of the second times longer than the time, the first time may be characterized in that the notification probability of making the notification notification is higher than the second time. This is because, when a long variation time is selected, the continuity as the pseudo continuous notice is lost, and therefore it is desirable to notify the lottery result different from the continuous notice. In addition, when the second time is selected, it is not necessary to give any notice.

  In addition, the “notice notification means provides a notice when the lottery result immediately before the lottery result for which the pseudo continuous notice notice is given is notified, and when the lottery result notification time is the first time, When the second time is longer than the time, and when the second time is selected, the lottery result notifying means starts to notify the previous lottery result as the notice, and the lottery Notification of fake end and false start of one or more lottery results before the notification of the result is finished, and false end of the previous lottery result after starting notification of the previous lottery result It is characterized in that the time until notification is longer than the time from notification of false start of the previous lottery result until the end of notification of the previous lottery result ” May be. Specifically, a notification with a long variation time (such as reach) is performed, a false termination notification (a notification indicating that the reach result has been lost) is performed for a reach with a long variation time, and a notification with a short variation time (no reach). (Normal fluctuation) is falsely started, notification with a short fluctuation time (notification indicating that the normal fluctuation without reach has been lost) is performed, and then pseudo continuous notice is notified as notification of the next lottery result. In addition, the false end notification and false start notification during the previous notification when the previous lottery result is notified are related to the false end notification and false start notification of the lottery result for which pseudo continuous notice notification is performed. Is desirable. Thereby, even when a long variation time is selected when notifying the previous lottery result, it is possible to perform notification while maintaining pseudo-continuous notice and continuity. The reach may be a super-reach with a high degree of expectation in which the character plays an active role after the reach or the direction and speed of the pattern change is irregular.

  Moreover, although it was 1 previous, it is the same also in 2 previous and 3 previous.

(Modification 5)
Conventionally, when a game ball wins, a random number for drawing a profit amount to be given to a player has been acquired. This is because it is not possible to give the player a sense of fairness unless the random amount for the lottery is given by a game ball winning (for example, after the game ball has won a prize) If a random number is not acquired until the lottery is started, the player may feel as if the random number has been operated in the previous lottery result notification time until the lottery). On the other hand, a random number for drawing the notification time for notifying the lottery result, and a random number for drawing a lottery symbol to be displayed when a plurality of losing symbols are provided are provided to the player. There is no direct relationship with the amount, and if these random numbers are also acquired at the time of winning a prize, there is a concern that the processing load at the time of winning will increase, so that it is acquired at the time of lottery instead of at the time of winning.

  Here, due to the nature of the notice that the lottery result is expected to be advantageous for the player before notifying the lottery result, the notice notification start determination is made by notifying the lottery result of the lottery based on the start opening prize. It could not be done at the start, but it was most efficient to do it at the time of winning a random number for lottery of the profit amount to be given to the player. However, in this case, since the notification time of the winning lottery result that triggered the advance notice is not known at the time of winning, the end of the advance notice (that is, when the lottery result of the lottery that triggered the advance notice is notified) ) May be a short lottery result notification time, and if the player's expectation is only spoken and the lottery result notification time is short, such as 3 seconds or 4 seconds, the player is false There was a risk that the excitement time of the game would be reduced because the time for excitement by the notice notice was reduced.

  Modified example 5 makes it possible to set a specific (particularly long) notification time for the winning lottery result that triggered the notification of the continuous notice (including false continuous notice) when winning at the starting gate. On the other hand, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent an increase in the number of random numbers acquired at the time of winning and can reduce the processing load at the time of winning.

  Here, since the type of random numbers and the acquisition timing of random numbers acquired at the time of winning and lottery are different from those of the first embodiment, the type of random numbers and the acquisition timing of random numbers in this modification will be described in detail again.

  In this modified example, there are five jackpot lottery random number counters, jackpot symbol lottery random number counters, jackpot symbol lottery random number counters, lose symbol lottery random number counters, and symbol variation lottery random number counters. Random numbers for different purposes are counted.

  The jackpot lottery random number counter is a counter that counts the jackpot lottery random number value acquired from the hard random number counter based on the fact that the game ball has won the winning slot. The jackpot lottery random number is a special jackpot lottery lottery like the special figure winning random number value of the first embodiment. There are some differences. The acquired random number for jackpot lottery is drawn at the time of the lottery, and based on the lottery result, a process based on the jackpot, the jackpot or lose is performed. The jackpot and lose are the same as in the first embodiment, but the jackpot is not described in the first embodiment and will be described. The difference between jackpot and jackpot is that there is a possibility that it will shift to a state advantageous to the player at the end of operation, and that a jackpot will not shift to a state advantageous to the player at the end of operation. Can be mentioned. Moreover, it is a big hit to divide the attacker into multiple sets, and a small hit to release one set of the attacker. The random number for jackpot lottery is a random value directly related to the amount of profit given to the player.

  The jackpot symbol lottery random number counter is a counter that counts the jackpot symbol lottery random number value acquired from the soft random number counter based on the winning of the game ball in the winning slot. The jackpot symbol lottery random number value is the same as the special figure random number value of the first embodiment as an effect, but differs in small points. First, the jackpot symbol random number for lottery is acquired every time the game ball wins, but is not used when the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning does not win. When it is a big win, it is used to draw a symbol stop mode for notifying that the lottery result is a big win. In FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, the stop symbol is different between the jackpot symbol and the special jackpot symbol, but the random symbol value for differentiating the stop symbol is used as a jackpot symbol lottery random value. Based on this stop symbol, the jackpot (does not shift to the special figure high probability state) and the special jackpot (shifts to the special figure high probability state) are determined, so the random number for the symbol lottery is the jackpot after the jackpot is confirmed The effect is similar to that of the special figure random number value of the first embodiment in that it is a lottery for lottering the amount of profit given by. In this modified example, 2R jackpot (with time), 2R jackpot (without time), 15R jackpot (with time), 15R jackpot (without time), 2R special jackpot (with time), 2R special jackpot Whether or not the lottery is selected based on the random number counter for jackpot symbol lottery from any of 15R special jackpot (with time), 15R special jackpot (without time), and whether or not the lottery result shifts to the normal high probability state Whether to shift to the special figure high probability state and the number of rounds are determined. In addition, even if it is a different symbol, there may be a symbol with the same profit amount to be given to the player (for example, there may be a plurality of symbols with a 2R jackpot and time reduction). Note that the jackpot symbol lottery random value is a random value directly related to the amount of profit given to the player.

  The small-hit symbol lottery random number counter is a counter that counts the random number value for small-hit symbol lottery acquired from the soft random number counter based on the fact that the game ball has won a winning opening. First, the random number value for the lottery symbol lottery is acquired every time the game ball wins, but is not used when the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning is not small. When it is a small win, it is used to draw a symbol stop mode for notifying that the lottery result is a small win. Then, based on the stop symbol selected by the lottery, small hit A (one open count, two open times), small hit B (two open times, two open times) or small hit C (three open times) , Release time 1 second) is displayed, and the attacker release time and the number of releases are set based on the display result. In addition, even if it is a different design, the profit amount given to the player may be the same. Note that the random number for lottery symbol lottery is a random value directly related to the profit amount to be given to the player.

  The lost symbol lottery random number counter is a counter that counts the random symbol value for the lost symbol lottery acquired from the soft random number counter based on the fact that the lottery based on the winning is performed. First, the random number value for the lottery symbol lottery is acquired when the lottery result is a loss, and is used to select which symbol for displaying the notification that the lottery result is a loss. is there. Note that even if there are multiple losing symbols, any losing symbol does not directly affect the amount of profits given to the player, so the losing symbol lottery random value is not directly related to the amount of profits given to the player. It is a random value.

  The symbol variation lottery random number counter is a counter that counts the symbol variation lottery random number value acquired from the soft random number counter based on the fact that the lottery based on the winning is performed. First, the symbol variation lottery random value is acquired regardless of the lottery result. Based on this symbol variation random value, the lottery result notification time, which is the time for notifying the lottery result, is determined, and the lottery result is stopped and displayed after the lottery result notification time has elapsed. The random value is not directly related to the profit amount to be given to the player.

  Hereinafter, the features that are characteristic of this modification will be described.

  In this modified example, the lottery result notification time lottery based on the symbol variation lottery random value is based on the lottery result notification time lottery table selected for each symbol notified as the lottery result and the symbol variation lottery random value. It is determined. As the lottery result notification time lottery table, different lottery tables are prepared for each stop symbol. That is, 2R jackpot (with time reduction) lottery result announcement time lottery table, 2R jackpot (without time reduction) lottery result announcement time lottery table, 15R jackpot (with time reduction) lottery result announcement time lottery table, 15R jackpot (without time reduction) Lottery result notification time lottery table, 2R special jackpot (with time reduction) lottery result notification time lottery table, 2R special jackpot (without time reduction) lottery result notification time lottery table, 15R special jackpot (with time reduction) lottery result notification time Lottery table, lottery result notification time lottery table for 15R special jackpot (no short time), lottery result notification time lottery table for small hits A (one open count, open time 2 seconds), small hit B (two open times, open) Time 2 seconds) lottery result notification time lottery table, small hits C (opening times 3 times, opening time 1 second) Lottery results notification time lottery table and the loss for the lottery result notification time lottery table is prepared. In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure is a predetermined number (3 or more in the present modification example), a lottery result notification time is selected which is shorter than the case where the number is less than the predetermined number (less than 3 in the present modification example). In addition, the following lottery result table is prepared for easy (shortening of fluctuation time). That is, a lottery result announcement time lottery table for variable time reduction 2R jackpot (with time reduction), a lottery result announcement time lottery table for fluctuation time reduction 2R jackpot (no time reduction), a lottery result announcement time for fluctuation time reduction 15R jackpot (with time reduction) Lottery table, Fluctuation time shortening 15R jackpot (no time) lottery result notification time lottery table, Fluctuation time shortening 2R special jackpot (with time) lottery result notification time lottery table, Fluctuation shortening 2R special jackpot (no time reduction) lottery Result notification time lottery table, Fluctuation time shortening 15R special jackpot (with time reduction) lottery result notification time lottery table, Fluctuation time shortening 15R special jackpot (no time reduction) lottery result notification time lottery table, Fluctuation time shortening small hitting A (open) Number of times, opening time 2 seconds) lottery result notification time lottery table, fluctuation Lottery result notification time lottery table for short shortening small hit B (2 times of opening, opening time 2 seconds), lottery result notification time lottery table for short shortening small hit C (3 times of opening, opening time 1 second) and fluctuation A lottery result notification lottery table for time-shortening lost is prepared.

  In addition, as a feature here, in the lottery of the lottery result notification time based on the symbol variation lottery random value when the lose is won in the jackpot lottery, it was a predetermined value with reference to the random number for the jackpot symbol lottery In this case, a predetermined variation time (for example, 40 seconds) is selected, or a lottery result notification time lottery table different from the case of not being a predetermined value is selected. A lottery result notification time lottery table may be selected in which a longer lottery result notification time is more easily selected.

  The lottery of the notice notification performed based on winning at the start opening is when the acquired jackpot lottery random number value is lost and the acquired jackpot symbol lottery random number value is a predetermined value. In addition, the notification probability of the notice notification may be higher than when the acquired jackpot lottery random number value is lost and the acquired jackpot symbol lottery random number value is not a predetermined value (predetermined If it is the value of 100%, it may be 0% if it is a predetermined value).

  In addition, as a feature here, when the lottery is won in the big hit lottery, the lottery result announcement time lottery based on the random number value of the symbol change lottery is a predetermined value with reference to the column value for the lottery symbol lottery. If a predetermined variation time (for example, 40 seconds) is selected, or a lottery result notification time lottery table different from the case of not being a predetermined value is selected, a lottery result notification time lottery when it is not a predetermined value You may make it select the lottery result alerting | reporting time lottery table which is easy to select the lottery result alerting | reporting time longer than a table.

  Then, in the lottery of the notice notification performed based on winning at the start opening, the value of the acquired jackpot lottery random number is lost, and the value of the acquired small bonus symbol lottery is a predetermined value In this case, the notification probability of the notice notification may be higher than the case where the acquired value of the big hit lottery random number is lost and the acquired value of the random number for lottery symbol lotion is not a predetermined value. (If it is a predetermined value, it may be 100%, and if it is a predetermined value, it may be 0%).

  In addition, as a feature here, in the lottery of the lottery result notification time based on the symbol variation lottery random value when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, it is a predetermined value with reference to the random number for the jackpot symbol lottery If a predetermined variation time (for example, 40 seconds) is selected, or a lottery result notification time lottery table different from the case of not being a predetermined value is selected, a lottery result notification time lottery when it is not a predetermined value You may make it select the lottery result alerting | reporting time lottery table which is easy to select the lottery result alerting | reporting time longer than a table.

  And, the lottery of the notice notification performed based on winning at the start opening, the value of the acquired jackpot lottery random number is a small hit, and the value of the acquired jackpot symbol lottery random number is a predetermined value In this case, the notification probability of the notice notification may be higher than the case where the value of the acquired jackpot lottery random number is a small hit and the acquired jackpot symbol lottery random number is not a predetermined value. (If it is a predetermined value, it may be 100%, and if it is a predetermined value, it may be 0%).

  Thus, “in a game machine having a start opening, when there is a winning storage section for storing a predetermined number of winning game balls at the starting opening, and at least one winning storage in the winning storage section. A lottery means for lottering a profit amount to be given to the player, a lottery result notifying means for notifying the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, and before the lottery result is notified, Notice information including notice information that makes the player expect that the result is advantageous to the player at a predetermined notice probability, and a lottery result notice time for lottery of the lottery result notice lottery performed by the lottery means Lottery means, and the lottery result notification time lottery means has a longer time when the random number acquired when the game ball wins at the start opening is a predetermined value than when it is not a predetermined value. When notifying lottery results Is provided so that the probability of selecting is increased, and the notice notification means, when the random number acquired when the starting game ball wins is a predetermined value, than the case where the random number is not a predetermined value It is characterized by the fact that it is provided so that the notice probability of the notice notice is high ”, so that when winning at the starting gate, the winning lottery result that triggered the notice of the continuous notice (including false continuous notice) A game machine capable of reducing the processing load at the time of winning by preventing the increase in the number of random numbers acquired at the time of winning while making it possible to make the notification time of a particular thing (especially long) It is intended to provide.

  Further, “the lottery result notification time lottery means may be characterized in that super reach is easily performed when the long-time lottery result notification time is selected”. As a result, the end of the continuous notice can be ended with super reach, and the interest of the player's game is not reduced.

  In addition, “the random number value acquired when the game ball wins the start opening has a first random number value and a second random number value, and the lottery means uses the first random number value. If the lottery result of the first profit amount to be given to the player is determined and the lottery result of the first profit amount is a predetermined lottery result, the second profit amount is calculated using the second random number value. The lottery result notification time lottery means sets the second random number value as the predetermined value when the lottery result of the first profit amount performed by the lottery means is not a predetermined lottery result. , Characterized by selecting the lottery result notification time ”, which is not directly related to the lottery result, but by selecting the lottery result notification time using the random value acquired at the time of winning a prize, Unevenness can be prevented.

  In addition, “the first random number value and the second random number value may be random values for drawing a profit amount to be given to a player”. Thereby, the last of continuous notice can be ended by the lottery result information time of a long time using the random number value which should be acquired at the time of winning a prize. The first random number value and the second random number value are random numbers for drawing whether or not to shift to the special figure high probability state after the jackpot ends, and shift to the common figure high probability state after the jackpot ends. It may be a random value for drawing whether or not, a random value for drawing lottery profit (number of rounds), and the like. In addition, random number value for drawing how many special drawing lotteries will be maintained until the special figure high probability state is transferred, and how many special maps are transferred to the normal figure high probability state It may be a random value for drawing whether or not the usual high probability state is maintained until the lottery.

  When a specific symbol (such as small hit C) is won, the fluctuation time is not shortened (the lottery result notification time lottery table with a short variation time is not provided), and the random value that the specific symbol wins is acquired. The lottery result notification time may be made easier to select than when the random value is not acquired. This is because if the lottery result notification time changes due to the shortening of the variation time, the lottery result notification time may not be long at the end of the continuous notice. In addition, when a predetermined random number value is acquired, both when the table for changing the variation time is selected and when it is not selected, the lottery result notification time is longer than when the predetermined random number value is not acquired. If you select a table for reducing the variation time, even if you do not select it, select the same variation time when you obtain a predetermined random number value. Lottery data may be set.

  Of the small bonuses, the specific small hits (small hit A and small hit B) have the same symbol variation lottery table as the specific big hits (15R, ordinary high probability state, special figure high probability state, etc.). May be. The small hits (small hits C) that are not specific hits may be different.

(Modification 6)
<Special drawing lottery processing>
In the first embodiment, a random number is acquired by entering the first special figure starting port or the second special figure starting port, and a lottery for notice notification is performed based on the random number. Although a lottery was performed, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, a random number is acquired by entering the first special figure starting port or the second special figure starting port, and a lottery lottery is performed based on the random number, and a lottery for notice notification is performed based on the result of the big jackpot lottery. Also good.
<Main production lottery>
In the first embodiment, the lottery probability of the special figure fluctuation time is different depending on whether the normal figure high probability state or the normal figure low probability state. It may be provided other than the probability state. For example, the lottery probability of the fluctuation time of the special figure may be varied according to the number of reserved balls of the special figure. In this case, the variation (for example, 4) when the number of reserved balls in the special figure is large may be selected more easily than the variation (for example, 1) when the number of reserved balls in the special figure is small. Good. In this way, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure is large, stoppage can be prevented by shortening the fluctuation time, and when the number of reserved balls in the special figure is short, the fluctuation time can be increased to increase the special figure. The non-fluctuating state is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  More specifically, the number of reserved balls in the special figure, which causes the drawing probability of the fluctuation time of the special figure to be different, is the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the case of the fluctuation of the special figure 1, In this case, the number of reserved balls shown in FIG. In this way, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure is large, stoppage can be prevented by shortening the fluctuation time, and when the number of reserved balls in the special figure is short, the fluctuation time can be increased to increase the special figure. The non-fluctuating state is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing. Otherwise, the number of reserved balls in Fig. 2 is 1 and the number of reserved balls in Fig. 1 is 4, and the number of reserved balls in Fig. 2 is 4 and the number of reserved balls in Fig. 1 is 1. Thus, the selection probability of the fluctuation time becomes the same, and when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 4 and the number of the reserved balls in the special figure 1 is 1, a long fluctuation occurs and the stopping time becomes long. There is a case.

  In addition, a factor that changes the lottery probability of the fluctuation time of the special figure may be made different depending on whether or not the notice notification is won. In this case, if you win the notice in Special Figure 1 with a high probability of ordinary figure, if you win the notice in Special Figure 1 with a low probability of ordinary figure, or Special Figure 2 with a high probability of ordinary figure It may be so arranged that the variation time of the special figure selected is shorter than that in the case of winning the previous notice. Furthermore, when the notice notification is continuously performed over a plurality of games, the subsequent fluctuation may be shortened. By doing in this way, when the big win in Special Figure 1 is won, even if it does not stop, the change of Special Figure 2 is not made so much, so that it is 2 In some cases, it is difficult to win a jackpot of times and can prevent a hitting game.

In the first embodiment, if the probability variation state does not occur after the jackpot is over, the game always shifts to the normal high probability game state of 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal high probability state transition lottery may be performed at a predetermined opportunity, such as in the case of jackpot determination, and based on the fact that the lottery is won, the normal high probability state may be shifted. For example, when the big hit probability state lottery is won at the time of jackpot determination, it may be shifted to the 100 times high probability state after the big hit.
<Commands sent from the main control unit>
In the first embodiment, a random number is acquired, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a notice based on the random number before the start of fluctuation based on the random number, and the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a random number may be acquired, a jackpot lottery may be performed based on the random number before the start of fluctuation based on the random number, and the lottery result may be transmitted to the sub-control unit. In this case, in addition to the jackpot lottery result, information such as the number of rounds, fluctuation in probability, and the state of the usual figure after the jackpot may be added. Moreover, you may transmit such information to a sub control part whenever a special figure changes. Further, these pieces of information may be transmitted to the sub-control unit and output from the external information terminal board to an external device such as a hall computer.
<Production contents>
In the first embodiment, the notice notification lottery is performed when the probability change occurs, and when the notice notification is won, the notice notification command is transmitted to the sub-control unit. May send a notice notification command. By doing in this way, 100% notice notification is executed, lottery data and a lottery program are not required, and at least one of reduction of work man-hours, compression of memory capacity or reduction of processing load is performed. Can be achieved.

  In addition, as a notice of notice, changes in the mode of the hold display (the lamp color changes from red to blue when elected, etc.), changes in the background image of the image display device (such as the blue sky background becomes sunset) Also good.

  In addition, when there are two or more jackpots in the holding ball, a notice to indicate that there are two or more jackpots (for example, a display such as “I hit two times” on the image display device) may be performed. However, the lottery probability of two or more jackpot notices may be made different depending on which special figure is hit. Furthermore, the lottery probability of two or more jackpot notices may be made different depending on which special figure is hit by the special figure and the probability state of the usual figure.

  For example, if there is one jackpot for the reserved ball in Special Figure 2 and one jackpot for the special ball in Special Figure 1, two or more jackpots in the high probability state of the ordinary figure than in the low probability state of the ordinary figure You may make it not perform the notice alerting which suggests that there exists. Here, conversely, if a warning notification is made to indicate that there is a jackpot of 2 or more in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state, the player will receive a special figure 2 jackpot. Recognizing that there is no big hit on the reserved ball of Special Figure 1 because no notice was made to suggest that there was a big jackpot of 2 or more, and after the big hit of Special Figure 2 is over, If there is, there is a case where it is stopped to digest the number of reserved balls shown in FIG.

  In addition, when there is a single jackpot on the reserved ball of Special Figure 2 and there is a single jackpot on the special ball of Special Figure 1, it shifts to the normal high probability state after the big hit of the reserved ball of Special Figure 2 ends. In such a case, it may be possible not to perform the notice notification that suggests that there is a jackpot of 2 or more than in the case of not shifting to the normal high probability state. If after the jackpot due to the fluctuation based on the jackpot holding ball in the special figure 2 is in a low probability state, even if it is notified that the big hit in the special figure 1 is informed, it is difficult to enter the special figure 2, so the stop hit game is not performed . However, if it is in a high-probability state after the jackpot due to the fluctuation based on the jackpot reservation ball in FIG. 2, if it is informed that the jackpot is hit in FIG. 1, it is stopped when it is recognized that there is no notification. There is a case.

  In addition, when the notice effect is performed for a predetermined time, and the lottery result notification time of other lotteries until the lottery that triggered the notice effect is performed is less than the predetermined time when the notice effect is performed. Further, by omitting part of the notice effect, the notice time of the notice effect and the lottery result notice time of another lottery may be combined with the time scale to notify. Fade-in and fade-out may be performed again after the omission. In particular, when the notice effect is performed in a movie or the like, it is preferable to have data in the first half and the second half and fade in the second half movie at a predetermined timing.

Also, when the notice effect is performed for a predetermined time, and the lottery result notification time for other lotteries until the lottery that triggered the notice effect is performed is longer than the predetermined time for the notice effect. The notification time of the notice effect and the lottery result notification time of other lotteries may be combined with the time scale to notify.
<Return from power interruption>
Further, the sub-control unit may not store the notice information when power is interrupted.

  Further, the main control unit may transmit the advance notice information together with the power-on information when the holding ball has a big hit at the time of return from power interruption.

  During the big hit, it is not necessary to give a notice of notification based on the entrance of the special figure 1. However, if the post-hit end is in a normal high probability state, a notice may be given.

  As a method of not performing the advance notice, the lottery probability may be 0, or the lottery itself may not be performed.

  To summarize this modified example 6, “when a predetermined prize opening is won, the movement probability to the predetermined game area is either the first movement probability or the second movement probability higher than the first movement probability. A movement probability changing means for changing from the above to a second movement probability, a profit amount lottering means for selecting a profit amount of a profit to be given to a player by a lottery when winning the predetermined prize opening, and the predetermined amount Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a specific game area in the game area, a profit amount giving means for starting to give a profit amount lottered by the profit amount lottery means, and a winning probability for the predetermined start opening A winning probability selecting means for selecting one of the first winning probability and a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability, and the profit amount lottery before the profit amount giving means gives a profit. The lottery result of the means is a specific result And a notice notifying means for notifying at a predetermined notice probability, wherein the notice notice means indicates the notice probability of notice notice when the winning probability selecting means selects the second winning probability. A gaming machine characterized by having a probability lower than the notice probability of notice notice when the probability selection means selects the first winning probability. "become.

(Modification 7)
If the variable time can be changed depending on whether or not the continuous notice (including continuous false notice) is won, the continuous notice will be separated from the variable game subject to the continuous notice. It is possible to feel more expectation than necessary for fluctuations during notification, and some players may feel emotional and paralyze self-control and consume more money than necessary. For this reason, even when winning the continuous notice notice, if it is not the winning variable game, it is necessary to refer to the variable time lottery table when the continuous notice notice is not won. However, in such a game machine, there is a problem that the continuity of the continuous notice may be lost when a long variation time is selected for the start timing of the continuous notice.

  The means for solving this problem is “a game stand having a game board with a predetermined winning opening, and when a game ball wins the predetermined winning opening, a profit is given to the player. A lottery means for selecting a profit amount, and a lottery result notifying means (symbol changing means) for notifying a lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when a predetermined notification start condition (such as the symbol is not changing) is established. And a notification time lottery means for lottering the notification time of the lottery result notification means, and a prior notice for suggesting that the lottery result is a specific result before the predetermined notification start condition is established. A notice notification control means for controlling to perform with probability, wherein the notice notification control means notifies the case where the lottery result of the notice time lottery means is the first result and the first result. Second result with a long time In the case, the amusement machine than the second result towards the first result, wherein the high start probability of the notice informing. "become.

  By doing so, it is possible to provide a game table that prevents a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In the case of a loss, it is not necessary to notify the advance notice.

(Modification 8)
If the change time can be changed depending on whether or not the advance notice (including false advance notice) is won, the change during the advance notice will be changed separately from the variable game subject to the advance notice. In contrast, it was possible to get more expectation than necessary, and some players were feeling high and paralyzed and self-control was paralyzed, and more money was consumed than necessary. For this reason, even if the notice notification is won, if it is not the winning variable game, it is necessary to refer to the variable time lottery table when the notice notice is not won. However, in such a game stand, since it is not possible to change the fluctuation time even for the variable game that is the target of the gasse notice when the gasse notice is given, the fluctuation that is the subject of the important notice There was a possibility that the player's expectation could not be felt and the interest of the game was reduced.

  The means for solving the above-mentioned problem is: “A game stand having a game board with a predetermined winning opening, and when a game ball wins the predetermined winning opening, a profit is given to the player. The first winning combination (big win), the second winning combination (small winning) that is less profitable to the player than the first winning combination, and the third winning combination (losing) that does not give a profit to the player ) And a lottery means for selecting a profit amount to be given to the player by lottery, and a lottery performed by the lottery means when a predetermined notification start condition (such as the symbol is not changing) is established. A lottery result notifying means (symbol changing means) for notifying the lottery result, and a notice notification indicating that the lottery result is the first winning combination before the predetermined notification start condition is established. A notice / informing control means for controlling In preparation for the above, the notice notification control means controls so that a false notice notice suggesting that the player has won the first winning combination is performed at a predetermined probability when the lottery result is not the first winning combination. The game table is characterized in that the notice probability of the false notice notice is higher when the lottery result is the second winning combination than when the lottery result is the third winning combination. "become.

  In addition, “the game table characterized in that the second winning combination is a small hit that does not shift to the special figure high probability state or the normal figure high probability state based on the winning”.

  Further, “the game stand characterized in that the false notice of notice is a false continuous notice of notice given over a predetermined number of games. It may be.

  Furthermore, “the notice notification control means determines the number of times that the false continuous notice notification is performed over a predetermined number of games in the second winning combination rather than the case where the lottery result is the third winning combination. A gaming table characterized by a higher probability of selecting a greater number of times in some cases. It may be.

  By doing so, it is possible to provide a game table that prevents a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In the case of a loss, it is not necessary to notify the advance notice.

(Other changes)
The following are one-off limitations. The limitation is that, in a game machine having a start opening, there is a winning storage section for storing a predetermined number of game balls won in the starting opening, and one or more winning storages in the winning storage section. In addition, the lottery means for drawing the profit amount to be given to the player, the lottery result notifying means for notifying the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, and before the lottery result is notified, A game table equipped with a notice device that provides notice information including notice information that makes the player expect that the result is advantageous to the player at a predetermined notice probability. You may apply to Embodiment 1 and you may apply to the said modification.

  First, “The notice notice means that the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 during the jackpot is in a low probability state after the jackpot, the figure is in a high probability state after the jackpot. It may be done with a higher probability than the case. This is because the player is unlikely to be hit by a player when the jackpot is in a low probability state.

  In addition, “the notice notifying means notifies the notice of the lottery result when the jackpot is confirmed before the winning at the time when the special figure 1 is won, and indicates that the figure is in a low probability state after the jackpot game. In this case, the game may be performed with a higher probability than when the normal game is in a high probability state after the jackpot game. This is because the player is unlikely to be hit by a player when the jackpot is in a low probability state.

  In addition, the “notice notification means is the first lottery that works more disadvantageously after the lottery is executed than when the lottery is executed when there is a prize at a specific starting port and the lottery of the winning result is executed. The notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the result may be performed at a lower probability than the second lottery result that works more advantageously than the first lottery result ”. For example, if a 2R timeless big hit is drawn during the probability change, the player's interest will be reduced by notifying the advance notice. In addition, the first lottery result that acts disadvantageously includes “the lottery result for changing the special figure high probability state to the special figure low probability state”.

  In addition, the “notice notification means is the first lottery that works more disadvantageously after the lottery is executed than when the lottery is executed when there is a prize at a specific starting port and the lottery of the winning result is executed. The notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the result may be performed with a higher probability than the second lottery result that works more favorably than the first lottery result ”. For example, when a 2R timeless big hit is drawn during the probability change, the player will recognize that the special figure high probability state will end in advance by giving a notice of advance notice, and the game will end suddenly. May be able to alleviate sudden irritation. In addition, the first lottery result that acts disadvantageously includes “the lottery result for changing the special figure high probability state to the special figure low probability state”.

  Further, “a first start port, a second start port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state, and a first start port, A third prize opening that is harder to win than the start opening, and the notice notifying means notifies the first start opening or the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the third prize opening. It is characterized by having a higher probability than the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the second starting opening ”, so that the third starting opening that rarely wins ( It is possible to increase the interest of the player's game by notifying the player with a high probability of winning a prize (called a VIP start opening).

  In addition, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state. , Storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the first starting port, and storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the second starting port; When the storage unit stores one or more winning prizes, the lottery means for lottery of the profit amount to be given to the player, and the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, The lottery result notifying means for giving a notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the start opening in preference to the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting opening, and notifying the lottery result. Before, the lottery result is advantageous to the player A notice notifying unit that performs notice notification including notice information that makes the player expect the result to be a fruit with a predetermined notice probability, and the notice notifying unit is configured such that the second starting port is in the difficult-to-win state. The lottery means provides a notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting opening in the lottery, and the lottery means draws the profit from the difficult winning state by drawing the profit amount in the winning to the second starting opening. The probability of selecting the lottery result to be in the easy state is lower than the probability of selecting the lottery result from the difficult to win state to the easy to win state by lottery of the profit amount in the winning to the first start opening By “being characteristic”, if you have 4 suspensions in Special Figure 1 during the low probability of usual figure and notice notification has not started, you won the jackpot that will trigger the transition to high probability in Special Figure 2 Stop after the jackpot Because there is a fear Chiosa is, jackpot with special symbol 2 is likely to be time reduction has to be lower than the possibility that a time reduction in the jackpot special symbol 1. It should be noted that “the lottery means does not have to make the winning easy state from the difficult to win state by lottery of the profit amount in the winning to the second starting port”.

  In addition, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state. , Storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the first starting port, and storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the second starting port; When the storage unit stores one or more winning prizes, the lottery means for lottery of the profit amount to be given to the player, and the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, The lottery result notifying means for giving a notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the start opening in preference to the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting opening, and notifying the lottery result. Before, the lottery result is advantageous to the player A notice notifying unit that performs notice notification including the notice information that makes the player expect the result to be a result at a predetermined notice probability, and the notice notifying unit includes a lottery result based on a winning at the first start opening. It may be characterized by notifying the notice of the lottery based on the winning to the second starting port without notifying the notice ". If there is 4 suspensions in Special Figure 1 during the usual low probability and the notice notification has not started, and if you win a jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability in Special Figure 2, stop after the jackpot ends Since there is a risk of being hit, the jackpot notice is not given at the first special figure starting port, and the jackpot notice is given at the second special figure starting point. In addition, “the advance notice unit notifies the advance notice of the lottery result based on the winning to the first starting port in the easy winning state, and the lottery result based on the winning to the second starting port in the easy winning state. The notification of the lottery result based on the winning to the first starting port in the difficult to win state is notified to the second starting port in the difficult to win state. It may be controlled to have a lower probability than the notice of a lottery result based on a prize ”.

  In addition, “the notice notification unit may notify that the lottery result is a specific result”. The final announcement is not to simply suggest the lottery result, but to notify the lottery result with certainty, for example, a “big hit” is notified by text or voice.

  In addition, “the lottery means the first lottery probability to draw the specific result with a first probability, and the second result with a second probability that is higher than the first probability. And a second lottery probability. The special figure high probability state is a state where a lottery is drawn with a second probability, and the special figure low probability is a lottery with a first probability.

  In addition, “the notice notification unit may perform a fixed notification with a higher probability in the special figure high probability state than in the special figure low probability state”. Since the special figure high-probability state ends immediately, there are cases where the player's game interest is enhanced by making a final announcement rather than making a series of advance notices.

  Further, “the start port may be a general start port”, and “the first start port and the second start port may be a first general start port and a second general start port”. .

  In addition, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state. , Storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the first starting port, and storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the second starting port; When the storage unit stores one or more winning prizes, the lottery means for lottery of the profit amount to be given to the player, and the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, The lottery result notifying means for giving a notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the start opening in preference to the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting opening, and notifying the lottery result. Before, the lottery result is advantageous to the player A first notification unit that includes a predetermined notification probability, and includes a first control unit including the lottery unit and the advance notification person, and the first control unit. And a second control unit provided with a notice notification execution means for executing the notice notification in response to a notice command from the control unit. First, even if “the second control unit discards or does not receive the notice command when the first control part transmits a notice command to the second control part in the easy winning state” Good. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the first special figure start opening winning in the normal figure high probability state. Further, “the second control unit is characterized in that the advance notice notification execution means indicates that the advance notice notification is being executed, and that the advance notice notification is being executed when the advance notice is being executed”. Also good. Since the second control unit (for example, the sub-control unit) often has a more complicated program capacity and data capacity than the first control unit (for example, the main control unit), the first control unit in the usual high probability state is used. There is a risk of requesting a prior notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the drawing start winning prize not to be understood by a certification body (such as a maintenance association) prior to shipment. For this reason, if the second controller is provided with an LED or the like that is always lit while the notice is being given, it can be surely notified that the notice is being executed. The notification during the advance notification may be performed by the first control unit.

  In addition, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state. , Storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the first starting port, and storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the second starting port; When the storage unit stores one or more winning prizes, the lottery means for lottery of the profit amount to be given to the player, and the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, The lottery result notifying means for giving a notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the start opening in preference to the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting opening, and notifying the lottery result. Before, the lottery result is advantageous to the player A notice notifying unit that performs notice notification including notice information that makes the player expect to be a fruit at a predetermined notice probability, and the notice notifying unit notifies other lottery result notifications until the lottery result is notified. When the time is the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting port when the second starting port is in the easy winning state, the second starting port is The probability of selecting the lottery table for the notification time when no notice notification is performed is higher than in the case of the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting port in the case where it is difficult to win a prize. It may be a feature. The notice of other lottery results until the notice of the lottery results is made open for a long time is included in the notice notice.

  In addition, “in a game stand having a start opening, when there is a winning storage section for storing a predetermined number of winning game balls at the starting opening, and when the winning storage section has one or more winning storages, A lottery means for performing a lottery of a profit amount to be given to the player, a lottery result notifying unit for notifying the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, and the lottery result is advantageous for the player before notifying the lottery result. A notice notifying unit that performs notice notification including notice information that makes the player expect a result to be a predetermined result at a predetermined notice probability, and includes a first control unit that includes the lottery means and the notice notifier, A second control unit provided with a notice notification executing means for executing the notice notification in response to a notice command from the first control unit, and the first control unit is connected to the second control unit. Even after sending the advance notice, the predetermined conditions Continues to hold the information about the notice command until satisfied, it may be characterized "to retransmit the notice instruction when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the “information relating to the notice command” includes information transmitted as the notice command and information on the contents of the notice command (information on the result of the notice lottery). In this way, for example, when a power interruption occurs, even if the notice information disappears, the sub-control unit can reliably notify the notice by transmitting the notice information when the power is restored. .

  In the above modification, the notice notification execution means is a liquid crystal display device (variable display device), but is not limited thereto, and the notice notification can be executed by any notification device such as a speaker or a lamp.

  In addition, as a difference between big hit and small hit, it is a big hit that there is a possibility of shifting to a state advantageous to the player at the end of the operation, and a small hit is not shifting to a state advantageous to the player at the end of the operation Can be mentioned.

  Further, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening based on the predetermined jackpot may be the same as the number of opening of the big winning opening based on the predetermined small winning.

  Further, the length of time for opening the big prize opening based on one predetermined jackpot may be substantially the same as the length of time for opening the big prize opening based on one predetermined small jackpot.

  In addition, when the opening / closing of the big prize opening is repeated based on the predetermined big win and the predetermined small win, the length of the total opening time may be substantially the same.

  In addition, the length of time may be substantially the same when the length of time is less than the time required from when the door of the grand prize opening receives a game ball until it is detected that a prize has been won at the big prize opening.

  In addition, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state. , Storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the first starting port, and storing a predetermined number of game balls won at the second starting port; When the storage unit stores one or more winning prizes, the lottery means for lottery of the profit amount to be given to the player, and the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, The lottery result notifying means for giving a notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the start opening in preference to the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting opening, and notifying the lottery result. Before, the lottery result is advantageous to the player A notice notifying unit that performs notice notification including notice information that causes the player to expect the result to be a result with a predetermined notice probability, and the notice notifying unit is configured such that the winning storage unit has a game at the first start opening. The first in the case where a predetermined number of 1 or more is stored that the ball has won, and the same number as in the first starting port is stored that the gaming ball has been won in the second starting port. When the second start port is in the difficult easy state, the lottery lottery result based on the winning to the first start port is notified, and the second start port is in the difficult to win state. It may be characterized in that it is performed at a higher notice probability than the notice notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port of 1 ”. In other words, when there are the same number of suspensions in the first special figure start opening and the second special figure start opening, the notice notification based on winning the first special figure start opening is won in the second special figure start opening. It is higher than the previous notice. Accordingly, since the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port is preferentially performed, the notice notification based on the winning of the first special figure starting port is more than the notice notice based on the winning of the second special figure starting port. It is possible to give notices for a long time, and to enhance the fun of the game. In addition, there may be a case where the special drawing 2 lottery is interrupted in the middle, and from this point of view, the notice notification based on the winning of the first special figure starting port is longer than the notice notification based on the winning of the second special figure starting port. Time notice can be made.

  The lottery result notifying time lottery means for lottery of the lottery result notification time performed by the lottery result notifying means, wherein the lottery result notifying time lottery means includes the first time and the first time. The lottery is performed from any one of the long second times, and the notice notification means starts another notice until the lottery that triggers the notice effect is performed. When the lottery result notifying time lottery means the first time as the lottery result notifying time, the notice notification is continued even after the lottery result notifying based on the first time is finished, and the lottery result notifying is continued. When the time lottery draws the second time, the notice notification may be ended after the lottery result notification based on the second time is ended. Thereby, the end of the notice effect can be ended with an effect that maximizes the interest of the player, such as super reach. In particular, “the advance notice is a false notice, and if the notice is a notice, the notice of the lottery result based on the second time may be continued even after the repair is performed” may be used. .

  In the first embodiment, when the main control unit transmits the advance notice information to the sub control unit, and the sub control unit receives the advance notice information from the main control unit, the advance notice is performed if no advance notice is currently being provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control unit may perform a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the notification effect after receiving the notification information from the main control unit.

  In the first embodiment, when the sub-control unit receives the notice information from the main control unit, the sub-control unit performs the notice if the notice is not currently given. When the notification is being executed, the notification notification indicating that the notification notification has been executed may be further performed. In this case, it is desirable to make notification so that it is clear which lottery is based on which notice notification is being made. For example, in the case where two notices, ie, hold 3 in FIG. 1 and hold 2 in FIG. This may be done by introducing a notice character.

  In order to start the notice notification based on the other lottery winning lottery while the notice notification started based on the lottery winning lottery, it is common for all other than the lottery result of the lottery winning jackpot to be held last. It may be a condition that it is not a big hit that does not shift to the probability state.

  In the first embodiment, the sub-control unit performs the notification of the advance notice. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the main control unit may perform the advance notice. For example, a sense of expectation may be obtained by changing the lighting color of the hold lamp LED.

  In addition, in the second lottery result notification time, which is expressed to the effect that there is a first lottery result notification time and a second lottery result notification time, and the second lottery result notification time is longer, Super reach may be performed.

  Also, a plurality of small hits may be provided, and the specific big hit may be the same as the specific big win and the symbol variation lottery table (a table for selecting reach from multi-line reach, etc.). Small hits that are not specific hits may be different.

  Further, for example, a small hit may be provided. Small wins are drawn separately from big wins or misses according to the special figure 1 winning random number described below, and when winning, the attacker will only open for 1R and will not enter the normal high probability state or special high probability state It refers to things. There may be one or more small winning symbols corresponding to the small hits, but when multiple small hitting symbols are provided, the small hits are separate from the special figure 1 lottery random value or the special figure 2 random lottery values described later. When the symbol random number value is acquired in the winning acceptance process, and the small winning symbol is won in the special symbol 1 symbol lottery processing or the special symbol 2 symbol lottery processing, the small bonus symbol is determined based on the small bonus symbol random value. Also good. In addition, when winning a small hit, a timer number selection table dedicated to small hits may be provided as the timer number selection table described above, and the hit flag is off for the variation time selected by the small hit dedicated timer number selection table. In this case, the variation time longer than the variation time selected in the normal number low probability timer number selection table or the general high probability timer number selection table may be selected. In addition, when multiple small hit symbols are provided, one of the small hit symbols may be selected more easily than the other small hit symbol, and may be selected more easily. When a random number value won by the first small winning symbol is received in the winning acceptance process, the second small winning symbol whose variation time is shorter than the first small winning symbol is likely to be selected. The probability that the continuous notice is performed may be higher than the case where the random number value won is received in the prize receiving process. 2R jackpot (no time saving) was chosen as the opening time or opening mode of the big prize winning opening when the second jackpot symbol is easy to be selected when the variation time is shorter than the first jackpot symbol The opening time or the opening mode may be similar so that the case and the player cannot be distinguished from each other (the opening time or the opening mode may be the same).

  Further, the attention attracting operation performed by the attention diverting means may be an indication of pressing the chance button. For example, the player's attention may be concentrated on the chance button by displaying “Press the chance button” on the image display during the pseudo symbol display period. Further, the attention attracting operation may be an effect performed when the chance button is pressed.

  Further, in this embodiment, in S2115, the symbol is determined based on the number of rounds and the presence or absence of certainty change. However, the symbol lottery is performed, and the number of rounds and the presence or absence of certainty variation are determined based on the lottery result of the symbol. You may make it do.

  Moreover, you may make it make the timing of the reduction | decrease of the hold | maintenance of the number-of-holds displayed on the decoration design display part differ from the special figure hold lamp. For example, the decrease timing of the hold number display displayed on the decorative symbol display unit may be slightly delayed from the decrease of the hold number display, such as one second after the symbol change start command is received.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the change of the special figure 2 is performed with priority over the special figure 1, but the invention is not limited to this, and the change may be made in the order of winning, or the special figure 2 and the special figure 1 may be performed. These changes may be performed in parallel. In particular, when the fluctuations of the special figure 2 and the special figure 1 are performed in parallel, a notification device that notifies other symbols may perform a notification to attract attention as the attention attracting operation. For example, when the special figure 2 and the special figure 1 are variably displayed by different decorative symbol displays, when the pseudo continuous variation is performed in the special figure 2, the decorative symbol display of the special figure 1 is displayed within the pseudo symbol display period. “Attention!” Or the like may be displayed as an attention attracting notification.

  In addition, as a method of giving priority to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 over the special figure 1, when the special figure 2 is changed in a state where there is no hold in the special figure 2, the special figure 2 receives a prize. Alternatively, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 may be interrupted, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 may be performed, and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 may be restarted. In this case, in particular, when the lottery by the second special figure starting opening prize is more advantageous than the first special figure starting opening prize, the drawing of the special figure 1 is stopped and the special drawing 2 is used. By performing the lottery, it is possible to provide a symbol variation that is more advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, the attention attracting operation is always performed in the case of the pseudo continuous notice, and the attention attracting operation is always performed in the case of the continuous notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the case of continuous notice, the attention attracting operation may not necessarily be performed.

  Further, except for the short time, the probability of executing the continuous notice is made higher than the pseudo continuous notice, and when the attention attracting operation is performed, at least one of the true change start and the true change stop is performed. The probability that the notification content of the notification device that changes the notification content changes may be high.

  Also, during the time reduction, the probability of executing the continuous notice is made lower than the pseudo continuous notice, and when the attention attracting operation is performed, at least one of the true change start and the true change stop is performed. The probability that the notification content of the notification device that changes the notification content does not change may be high. As a result, even if the notification device happens to be seen during the distraction notification, the notification content of the notification device has a high probability of changing, so that the distraction notification in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation can be more effectively deflected.

  In addition, since pseudo continuous notice can be performed even when there is one hold, it may be superior to continuous notice. On the other hand, the continuous notice has the effect that the symbol variation time per unit time can be shortened because the symbol lottery is performed twice when the same effect is displayed on the display as the pseudo continuous notice.

  In addition, the decorative design does not necessarily have to be set with numbers. For example, a skier wearing blue clothes as decoration 1, a skier wearing red clothes as decoration 2, a skier wearing yellow clothes as decoration 3, etc. You may make it alert | report a jackpot or loss by having stopped-displayed in the predetermined | prescribed aspect.

  In addition, the continuous notice and pseudo-continuous notice are the same production, the production of the story is continuous, the production of the same system (the first time the frog appeared from the background waterfall, the second time the frog from the background waterfall Appearance, the third time, a dragon appears from the waterfall in the background, etc.), and the display other than the symbol variation such as the background effect is not interrupted by the true symbol stop or the pseudo symbol stop.

  In addition, if the pseudo continuous notice is performed, the number of fluctuations of the special figure per unit time is reduced, so that the operation is lowered, which is not preferable as a game store. However, the pseudo-continuous notice can be made regardless of the number of holds (even one). Therefore, when the number of holdings is the first value (for example, two), the pseudo continuous fluctuation is more likely to be performed than the continuous notice is difficult to perform, and the number of holdings is smaller than the first value. In the case of a value (for example, four), it is possible to make it difficult for continuous notice to be performed instead of facilitating pseudo continuous variation.

  Further, when the continuous notice is performed, the continuous notice is performed for the value corresponding to the number of suspensions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous notification may be performed for the number of suspensions or less. For example, the continuous notice performed as a false notice effect when there are four holds may be performed only twice. Moreover, it is not necessary to perform all the number of holdings. For example, the continuous notice performed as the notice effect when there are four holds may be performed for the first time, the third time, and the fourth time.

  In addition, when the change of the special figure 1 based on the first special figure start opening prize during the time reduction is not notified, the change of the special figure 1 based on the first special figure start opening prize during the time reduction is pseudo continuous. The fluctuation may not be performed. In addition, the notice notice for the fluctuation of the special figure 1 based on the first special figure starting opening prize during the short time has a lower notice probability than the notice notice for the fluctuation of the special figure 2 based on the second special figure starting opening prize during the short time. In this case, the quasi-continuous fluctuation with respect to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 based on the first special figure starting opening prize during the time reduction is more than the pseudo continuous fluctuation with respect to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 based on the second special figure starting opening prize during the time reduction. The probability may be lowered. In addition, the notice notification for the fluctuation of the special figure 1 based on the first special figure start opening prize during the short time is lower than the notice notice for the fluctuation of the special figure 1 based on the first special figure start opening prize other than the short time. In this case, the quasi-continuous fluctuation for the fluctuation of the special figure 1 based on the first special figure starting opening prize during the time reduction is more pseudo than the pseudo continuous fluctuation for the fluctuation of the special figure 1 based on the first special figure starting opening prize other than the time reduction. The continuous variation probability may be lowered.

  In addition, the notification probability of notice notifications for fluctuations in special figures based on special chart start opening prizes during short hours is lower than the notification probability of notice notices for changes in special figures based on special figure start entry prizes other than during short hours. Also good. This is because the change in time is quicker than that other than during the time, so the player is less likely to be idle, so there is less need to give the player a sense of expectation by a notice. If a quasi-continuous variation is performed at this time, the player can easily recognize that the quasi-continuous variation is caused when attention is not diverted by the distraction alert. The execution probability of the pseudo continuous variation with respect to the variation in the diagram may be lower than the execution probability of the pseudo continuous variation with respect to the variation of the special diagram based on the special drawing start opening prize other than during the short time.

  Further, if the notice probability of the notice notification is high as the number of reservations increases, the notice notice is difficult to be executed when the number of reservations is small due to the balance of effects. For example, when the nail adjustment of a game store is made bad and a lot of suspensions are not collected, it becomes difficult to execute the notice notification. Even in this case, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the player's game by performing the pseudo continuous notice by the pseudo continuous variation. That is, when the hold is the first value (one), the notice notification is less likely to be selected than when the hold is the second value (four) greater than the first value, and the hold is the first. In the case of the value of, the pseudo continuous notice may be selected more easily than in the case where the hold is the second value. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to provide a game machine that can easily balance production.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern which becomes the big hit through the first reach after performing the pseudo continuous fluctuation three times, and the fluctuation pattern which becomes the big hit through the second reach having a longer time than the first reach after performing the pseudo continuous fluctuation twice. , With a quasi-continuous variation once, a variation pattern that is a big hit through the third reach that is longer than the second reach, and a big hit with a fourth reach that is longer than the third reach without performing the quasi-continuous variation If all of these variation patterns have the same variation time and pre-read that this variation pattern was selected at the time of winning the start opening, a continuous notice will be given until this variation pattern is drawn, The variation pattern at the time of the variation pattern lottery may be determined according to the number of continuous notices made before the variation pattern lottery. For example, when three continuous notices are made before the variation pattern lottery, a big hit may be made after one pseudo continuous variation. As described above, when a plurality of variation patterns of the same timer having different numbers of pseudo continuous variations are provided and a variation timer for selecting the variation pattern is selected, the plurality of variation patterns are executed before the lottery is performed. Any variation pattern may be selected according to the number of continuous notices. By doing so, for example, if a big hit is made through a long super reach (the third reach in the above example) after performing pseudo continuous fluctuation four times, a very long fluctuation time is required. The production must be selected at a certain rate in order to enhance the player's interest, but by linking the continuous notice, the proportion of the same production in the same production mode as seen from the player is not reduced. It is possible to prevent the operating rate from being lowered.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit selects a timer number, and the sub-control unit performs lottery or no variation pattern with pseudo continuous variation or variation pattern without pseudo continuous variation according to the timer number. Although it was determined, the present invention is not limited to this. The main control unit determines from the time from the start of true fluctuation to the last pseudo-determined display (time determined according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) and the last pseudo-determined display. The time until the true confirmation display (time for reach fluctuation etc.) is determined separately, and these two fluctuation patterns are output to the sub-control section so that they can be identified. The sub-control section is based on the input from this main control section. Thus, a variation pattern with pseudo continuous variation may be determined. For example, if the main control unit receives a fluctuation timer that performs two pseudo-continuous fluctuation timers and multi-line reach, the sub-control unit starts true fluctuation ⇒ pseudo-notification notice ⇒ pseudo-variation stop ⇒ warning distraction notice ⇒ pseudo Confirmation ⇒ Pseudo-variation start ⇒ Pseudo-notice notification ⇒ Pseudo-variation stop ⇒ Distraction notice ⇒ Pseudo-confirmation display ⇒ Pseudo-variation start ⇒ Multi-line reach ⇒ True variation stop ⇒ Bonus .

  Also, when the variation pattern is pre-read and it is determined that the number of times of pseudo continuous variation is the predetermined number of times of pseudo continuous variation as the pre-reading result, notification notification or notice distraction notification starts based on the number of times of pseudo continuous variation You may make it determine a time. For example, if the fourth variation pattern for holding is looked ahead and the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is two, and there are four holding balls, the continuous notice is started from the second holding ball. Also good. In this case, true start ⇒ true stop ⇒ true confirmation display (first time) ⇒ true start ⇒ advance notice ⇒ true stop ⇒ notice distraction notice ⇒ true confirmation display (second time) ⇒ true start ⇒ notice notice ⇒ true stop ⇒ notice distraction notice ⇒ True confirmation display (third time) ⇒ True start ⇒ Pseudo notice notification ⇒ Pseudo stop notification ⇒ Pseudo confirmation display ⇒ Pseudo start ⇒ Pseudo notice notification ⇒ Pseudo variable stop ⇒ Notice distraction notification ⇒ Pseudo confirmation display ⇒ Pseudo start ⇒ Pseudo Notice announcement ⇒ Multiline reach ⇒ True change stop ⇒ Big hit. In addition, the notification start timing of the notice effect may be started from a change before a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4 times) from the pre-read pseudo continuous change count.

  Further, the “notification device” here is not limited to the notification device itself, and may be a predetermined display area in the notification device. For example, when the notification device is a decorative symbol display and the number of reserved symbols is displayed in the display area, attention may be diverted from the display of the number of reserved symbols.

  In addition, during the pseudo continuous variation, the hold display in the decorative design may be erased. As described above, during pseudo continuous fluctuation, when at least one of the true fluctuation start and the true fluctuation stop is performed, a notification device whose notification content changes or a predetermined display area in the notification device is shielded or made inconspicuous. By doing so, the distraction notice may be performed more effectively.

  Further, a shorter variation may be selected as the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation increases.

  Further, the distraction notice may be performed without notice.

  In addition, the variation time may be determined based on the number of symbol fluctuations performed before the prize-held hold at the time of winning and the number of balls held at the start of the fluctuation. For example, when there are three holds before the winning hold when winning, the number of symbol fluctuations is set to three, and the number is stored. Then, at the start of the winning variation, the symbol variation pattern may be selected based on the number of symbol variation three times and the number of holds (for example, three).

  Further, the pseudo-determined display period and the true-determined display period may or may not include immediately after the start of change. Immediately after the start of fluctuation is, for example, while the symbol fluctuation is accelerating.

  Further, when performing pseudo continuous fluctuations twice or more, the pseudo advance notice may not be performed at least once from the true start to the pseudo stop or from the pseudo start to the pseudo stop. The one time may be a pseudo stop from a true start. Further, even when the pseudo notice is not performed, the distraction notice may be performed after the pseudo stop at that time.

  In addition, when the symbol variation of the special figure 2 interrupts during the continuous notice in the special figure 1, one or both of the notice effect and the distraction notice may not be performed in the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 2.

  In addition, “the game ball includes a lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player based on the winning of the game once, and the symbol display means displays the symbol variation display for each lottery. A symbol that is displayed once and represents a symbol representing the result of the lottery as a final symbol, and the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on the fact that the lottery has won first is displayed as a final symbol. The lottery based on the fact that the prize was won later is put on hold until the end of the variable display. Further, before the lottery means the lottery means the lottery, the lottery results in what kind of lottery result. And a notice notification determining means for notifying the player that the result of the lottery is a specific result, and when the notice notification determining means determines that the notice notification is performed. Judgment It relates characterized "game machine further comprising a notice informing means for performing the announcement notification before true determine display the symbol as a defined symbol representing the result of. In addition, although the example of a change demonstrated further from here is not restricted to the example which changed the said embodiment, all what can be applied to the said embodiment shall be applied.

(Modification A)
A conventional game stand with continuous notices has a monotonous effect when the game is performed by giving a continuous notice that the lottery result for a specific lottery that is on hold is expected to be advantageous to the player. Prevented the interest of the fall. However, since there has been no continuous notice that the player is determined to be disadvantageous, a lottery result that is disadvantageous for the player (for example, 2R that shifts to a low probability of a special figure during a high probability of a special figure) There was no continuous notice of jackpots). For this reason, when the special figure high probability state ends unexpectedly, the player will feel a sudden transition from the special figure high probability state to the special figure low probability state, feel frustrated, and the interest of the game will decline was there. On the other hand, the following solution is proposed. That is,
“Based on the fact that the game ball wins once at the start opening, it has lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player, and the symbol display means displays the symbol variation display once for each lottery. The symbol representing the result of the lottery is displayed as a confirmed symbol, and the lottery means displays the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on winning first as a symbol for the symbol variation display. The lottery based on the fact that the prize has been won is put on hold until the game ends, and the lottery results before the lottery means the lottery means the lottery means A determination is made when a notice notification determining means for making a notice that the player predicts that the result of the lottery is a specific result, and when the notice notification determining means determines that the notice notification is performed. Result of lottery Notice information means for performing the notice notice before the symbol representing the symbol is displayed as a confirmed figure, and the notice notice determining means indicates that the lottery result is a disadvantageous result for the player. It may be a “game table characterized by performing a notice to be predicted by a person”.

  In this way, the player is not disadvantaged in advance by not only notifying the player that the result is an advantageous lottery result, but also by causing the player to predict that the result is an unfavorable lottery result. You can predict that it ’s a bad result, and you ’ll be prepared for an adverse result, so you can lessen the shock of an adverse result than if a sudden negative result comes, It is possible to prevent the low interest of the game due to the shock of an unfavorable result.

  An unfavorable result means that, for example, when the gaming state is a special figure high probability state, a prize ball due to a jackpot can hardly be obtained (for example, 2R jackpot), and the special figure is low after the jackpot ends. This is a case where a transition is made to a probability state. In such a case, for example, if a lottery of 2R jackpot (no special figure high probability state transition) is made at the time of the fourth hold to be drawn four times later, as the production, the result of the first lottery result In the display, the picture of the bomb written as “4” is displayed on the liquid crystal display. In the display of the second lottery result, the picture of the bomb written as “3” is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and the third lottery. In the result display, a picture of the bomb written as “2” is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and in the display of the 4th lottery result, which is a notification of the lottery result of the 2R jackpot (no special figure high probability state transition) The picture of the bomb written as “1” is displayed on the liquid crystal display and the change of the pattern is started. Before the design is confirmed, the picture of the bomb written as 0 is displayed and then the bomb is displayed to explode. After the 2R jackpot is made, the gaming state is set to a special figure low probability state. By doing in this way, the player can predict in advance that the lottery that will end the special figure high probability state has been made, so the shock due to the sudden termination of the special figure high probability state is eased, It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player's game. In addition, it corresponds to a notice of notice for allowing the player to predict that it is an unfavorable lottery result to display bomb pictures continuously.

  Note that, regardless of the number of rounds, any configuration may be used as long as the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is disadvantageous than the current gaming state. For example, even when a gaming state is a special figure high probability state, even if a 15R jackpot (no special figure high probability state transition) is won, a notice notification may be made to predict the player to be an unfavorable lottery result. Good.

  In addition, when the gaming state is a normal high-probability gaming state, a notice notification is made to allow the player to predict that the result will be an unfavorable lottery result even if the gaming state wins a jackpot to shift to the normal low-probability gaming state. You may go.

  In addition, the notice notification for allowing the player to predict that the result is an unfavorable lottery result may be performed when the unfavorable lottery result is not actually obtained. For example, when bomb pictures are continuously displayed, “1” does not have to be displayed when a lottery result is notified after the bomb picture is displayed as “2”. By doing so, the player pays attention to the display of the lottery result with a wish that it is not an unfavorable lottery result, and the interest in the game can be increased, and the interest in the game is also improved.

  In addition, the notice notification determination means also performs a notice notification that causes the player to predict that the lottery result is an advantageous lottery result for the player, and predicts that the lottery result is an advantageous lottery result. The notice notification that predicts that the result is an unfavorable lottery result may be made in such a manner that the player looks like the same until the lottery performs the lottery. For example, in the example of displaying a picture of a bomb on a liquid crystal display, even when a notice notification is made to predict that a lottery result is advantageous to the player, the above-mentioned “4”, “3”, “2” The picture of the bomb is displayed and the player feels uneasy, and the symbol variation that informs the result of the lottery displays “1” and displays as if the bomb explodes. ”Is displayed, and a lottery result advantageous to the player is displayed.

  Note that the game state may be notified by any of the notification devices so that the game state can be understood. For example, “Normal game” or “Probability fluctuation game” may be displayed on the liquid crystal display.

(Modification B)
In addition, a game machine having the following configuration is provided for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game compared to conventional game machines. That is, “the game ball includes a lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player based on a winning once at the start opening, and the symbol display means displays the symbol variation display for each lottery. A symbol that is displayed once and represents a symbol representing the result of the lottery as a final symbol, and the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on the fact that the lottery has won first is displayed as a final symbol. The lottery based on the fact that the prize was won later is put on hold until the end of the variable display. Further, before the lottery means the lottery means the lottery, the lottery results in what kind of lottery result. And a notice notification determining means for notifying the player that the result of the lottery is a specific result, and when the notice notification determining means determines that the notice notification is performed. Judgment Prior notice means for performing the advance notice before the symbol representing the lottery result is displayed as a definite symbol, and the notice means changes the BGM until the result of the lottery is truly displayed. It may be a “game table characterized by providing a notice of notice”.

  The BGM notice notification changes the BGM over a plurality of lottery results notice until the lottery result of the lottery subject to the notice notice is performed based on the fact that the notice notice determination means decides to notify the notice. Is.

  Note that the BGM that changes over the lottery result notification of multiple lotteries is the lottery result of the lottery subject to the notice of notice by increasing the tempo or increasing the volume each time the lottery result is notified. An expectation may be given to the notification.

  Further, the BGM that changes over the notification of the lottery results of a plurality of lotteries may be reproduced without interruption.

(Modification C)
In addition, a game machine having the following configuration is provided for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game compared to conventional game machines. That is, “the game ball includes a lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player based on a winning once at the start opening, and the symbol display means displays the symbol variation display for each lottery. A symbol that is displayed once and represents a symbol representing the result of the lottery as a final symbol, and the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on the fact that the lottery has won first is displayed as a final symbol. The lottery based on the fact that the prize was won later is put on hold until the end of the variable display. Further, before the lottery means the lottery means the lottery, the lottery results in what kind of lottery result. And a notice notification determining means for notifying the player that the result of the lottery is a specific result, and when the notice notification determining means determines that the notice notification is performed. Judgment A notice notifying means for notifying the notice before the symbol representing the result of the lottery as a confirmed symbol is displayed, and the notice notifying means determines that the notice notice determining means performs the notice notice; In addition, when the notice notification determining means does not determine that the notice notification is performed, the fixed display time from when the symbol variation display is truly confirmed until the next symbol variation display is started is made different. It may be a “game table characterized by that”.

  By making the true confirmation display time when the notice notification is performed different from the true confirmation display time when the notice notification is not performed, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and increase the degree of attention to the production. it can. The notice notification itself may be such that the true confirmation display time when the notice notification is performed is different from the true confirmation display time when the notice notification is not performed.

  It should be noted that the fact that the true confirmation display time when the notice notification is performed is different from the true confirmation display time when the notice notification is not performed is, specifically, when the notice notification is performed. The true confirmation display time is set to 4 seconds, the true confirmation display time is set to 3 seconds when the notice notification is not performed, etc. In this case, the true definite display time is selected from the first true definite display time lottery table, and the true definitive display time in the case of not performing the notice notification is selected from the second true definite display time lottery table. Then, the first true confirmation display time lottery table and the second true confirmation display time lottery table may have different times or lottery probabilities as the lottery results. In this case, the first true confirmation display time lottery table may make it easier to draw the true confirmation display time shorter than the second true confirmation display time lottery table, and conversely, the first true confirmation display time lottery table. The lottery table may make it easier to draw a true decision display time longer than the second true decision display time lottery table.

  Further, “true confirmation display time” may be replaced with “pseudo confirmation display time”. Further, “true confirmed display time” may be replaced with “true confirmed display time and pseudo confirmed display time”.

(Modification D)
In addition, a gaming table represented by a pachinko machine is configured so that a predetermined profit can be obtained by launching a ball from a launching device and entering a predetermined winning opening provided in a predetermined gaming area. . In such a game machine, a game machine with a so-called continuous notice effect that performs a continuous effect with a plurality of continuous symbol variations is provided. For example, JP2005-111149A. However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the main side determination is made at the time of detection of the winning at a timing (different determination timing) different from the jackpot determination performed immediately before the start of the symbol combination game based on the winning detection. It is determined whether or not the value of the read jackpot random number matches the main determination value (notice determination value). Then, it is determined whether or not to notify the notice using the notice determination value. When the advance notice is given, the continuous notice will be started. For example, when the continuous notice is given four times, the game state changes and the jackpot determination result performed immediately before the start of the symbol combination game is different. When it becomes a thing, there is a case where it is required to acquire the notice determination value again, and the processing load may be concentrated. In response, the following solution is proposed. That is,
“Based on the fact that a game ball has won a predetermined winning opening, a count value storage unit that acquires and stores a count value used in a predetermined lottery, and executes a lottery with the count value stored in the count value storage unit And a profit amount lottery unit for drawing a profit amount to be given to a player based on the gaming state at the time of the game, before the profit amount lottery unit draws the profit amount, Based on the count value stored in the count value storage unit and the gaming state, a profit amount preliminary lottery unit that draws in advance a profit amount to be given to the player, and preliminary lottery information that is a lottery result of the profit amount preliminary lottery unit Based on the preliminary lottery information, a preliminary lottery information storage unit for storing a notice to notify the player that the lottery result of the lottery performed by the profit lottery unit is an advantageous result for the player is performed. A notice and notification section; The profit amount preliminary lottery portion draws in advance a profit amount to be given to the player for each of a plurality of gaming states, and the preliminary lottery information storage unit includes a plurality of the preliminary lotteries corresponding to the gaming state Information may be stored, and the notice notification unit may provide the notice notification based on the preliminary lottery information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of executing the notice notice. Good.

  By doing so, it is possible to provide a game machine that can distribute the processing load.

  The main control unit acquires and stores a count value used as a random number for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player based on the fact that the game ball has won at the start opening from a predetermined random number counter, Based on the count value and the plurality of gaming states (for example, the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state) that are stored as a result of the lottery, whether or not the lottery based on the count value is a big win The lottery results for each of the states (for example, 15R special big hit if special figure high probability state, lose if special figure low probability state, etc.) are stored in the prior lottery information storage unit. Furthermore, when the lottery of the profit amount is performed and the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit, any one of the preliminary lottery information stored in the preliminary lottery information storage unit based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery is stored. Select and output to the sub-control unit. For example, in the case of a special figure low probability state at the time of lottery, pre-lottery information preliminarily drawn as a special figure low probability state is output. The sub-control unit controls the advance notice based on the received prior lottery information. For example, when there are three holds, the prior lottery information storage unit stores information on whether or not the inside of the hold in the special low probability gaming state is a big hit (for example, hold 1 is lost, hold 2 is lost, hold 3 is Loss, hold 4 is no hold) and information on whether or not the hold in the special high probability gaming state is a big hit (for example, hold 1 is lost, hold 2 is lost, hold 3 is hit, hold 4 is not held ) Is stored in advance notice information for each of the gaming states. The main control unit outputs the advance notice information for each of the gaming states stored in the prior lottery information storage unit at the start of the change, and at that time, outputs the advance notice information corresponding to the gaming state at that time to the sub control unit. . For example, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the advance notice information for the special figure high probability state stored in the preliminary lottery information storage unit (hold 1 is lost, hold 2 is lost, hold 3 is hit, hold 4 is not held) Is output at the start of fluctuation. The sub-control unit draws a notice effect from the notice effect lottery table when the received notice information includes a hit, and draws a gase notice effect from the gasse notice effect lottery table when no win is included. And a notice effect is performed based on a lottery result. Here, when the sub-control unit performs the continuous announcement that performs the announcement effect over a plurality of fluctuations based on the hit, the notice information received from the main control unit no longer includes the hit (continuous notice When the game state has changed during the game, the sub-control unit stops the execution of the continuous advance notice). Even if the gaming state is changed, the sub-control unit does not stop executing the continuous notice if the notice information includes a hit. In addition, although described here simply as “around”, this may be any of those described in the first embodiment. Further, it may be a “hit” only at the 15R special jackpot, and may be “lost”. This “around” or “losing” may be 1-bit information. In this case, “no hold” may be stored in a manner indistinguishable from “losing” (for example, “around” ON, “Lose” and “No hold” are bits off, etc.).

  Note that “the count value storage unit is provided so as to be able to store the count value up to a predetermined number, and the profit amount lottery unit is predetermined when the count value storage unit stores a plurality of count values. It is also possible to use a gaming machine characterized in that the profit amount lottery is performed based on the count value stored in the count value storage unit in this order. In a game machine in which a plurality of count values are drawn in a predetermined order, the degree of expectation with respect to a specific symbol variation can be increased in advance by performing a notice for a count value that has not been drawn.

  It should be noted that “comprising at least a first control board having the preliminary lottery information storage unit and at least a second control board having the notice notification unit, wherein the first control board has a front A pre-lottery information output unit is provided that outputs the pre-lottery information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of output from the plurality of pre-lottery information stored in the pre-article lottery information storage unit to the second control board. It may be a “game table characterized by that”. By selecting the prior lottery information according to the gaming state at the time of output, the preliminary lottery information can be output with a simple control structure.

  The “preliminary lottery information storage unit may store the preliminary lottery information with a data capacity smaller than the count value stored in the count value storage unit”. By storing with a small data capacity, the RAM capacity can be reduced. Furthermore, in the configuration in which information is output to another control unit, the number of commands may be reduced.

  The profit amount preliminary lottery unit performs preliminary lottery on the target count value to be acquired and stored when the count value storage unit acquires and stores the count value. It may be a “playing machine”. By acquiring the preliminary lottery information at the time of starting winning, it is possible to acquire the preliminary lottery information in addition to storing the count value in the RAM, and it is not necessary to provide the timing for acquiring the preliminary lottery information again, thereby reducing the processing load. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, by acquiring pre-lottery information for the count value at the time of winning a prize, it may not be necessary to update the pre-lottery information that has already been stored on hold and unnecessary processing may be performed.

  “The count value storage unit acquires and stores a count value used for a predetermined lottery based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at the first start port and the second start port, and the profit amount The lottery unit performs the lottery of the profit amount based on the winning to the second starting port in preference to the lottery of the profit amount based on the winning to the first starting port. It may be. There are two special charts, and in the game machine in which special figure 2 changes with priority, the fluctuation of special figure 2 is interrupted, so it becomes difficult to grasp the game state at the time of the future lottery. It is desirable to obtain prior lottery information corresponding to a plurality of gaming states.

  Note that, based on a predetermined condition, the profit amount lottery is more disadvantageous for the player than the first game state from the first game state where the profit amount lottery is advantageous for the player. A gaming state changing unit that changes to the gaming state or changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, and the gaming state changing unit uses the profit amount lottery unit based on a predetermined reference A gaming machine characterized by changing the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when a profit amount lottery is performed a predetermined number of times. Although the gaming state changes when a predetermined number of lotteries are performed, it is not necessary to acquire the prior lottery information while grasping the predetermined number in order to predict a change in the gaming state, thus reducing the processing load. There are cases where it is possible. In particular, in a game machine having a plurality of special figures and special figures 1 and 2, the fluctuation of special figure 2 interrupts, so even if the predetermined number of times is grasped, the future gaming state is predicted. There are cases where it is not possible.

The profit amount lottery unit may be a gaming table that performs a lottery regarding whether or not to win a jackpot based on the count value and the gaming state.
The game table may be “a game table characterized in that a lottery regarding a jackpot stop symbol is performed based on the count value and the gaming state”.

  The lottery result notifying unit for notifying the lottery result of the lottery performed by the profit amount lottery unit, the profit amount lottery unit while the lottery result notifying unit is notifying the lottery result, It may be a “game table characterized by not performing a lottery of profits”.

  The lottery result output unit for outputting the lottery result of the lottery performed by the profit lottery means, and the preliminary lottery information output unit is configured to output the lottery result when the lottery result output unit outputs the lottery result. It may be a “game table characterized by outputting lottery information”.

  Since this change example D is applied when the gaming state changes during the continuous notice, for example, during the continuous notice in the special figure low probability state, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 becomes an interrupt and a special jackpot. Even when the figure becomes a high probability state, the main control unit does not need to acquire the advance notice information again because the special figure high probability state is obtained, and the processing load can be distributed.

(Modification E)
As a method of performing a continuous notice, which is a notice over a plurality of symbol variations, (1) whether a symbol variation is regarded as a plurality of symbol variations within a plurality of symbol variations within a pseudo symbol variation. (2) Conventionally, there are two types of methods of giving a notice across multiple symbol variations. A method of combining these two types is also conceivable. For example, if there are three holds and a big win is made in the third symbol variation, “Chance” is displayed in the first symbol variation, “Chance” is displayed again in the second symbol variation, and the third time. In the case of the symbol variation of, when “chance” is displayed, pseudo-stop is performed, pseudo-start is displayed after pseudo-fixed display, “chance” is displayed again after pseudo-start, super-reach is performed and jackpot is displayed It is. However, in this case, there is a case where the third symbol variation is sufficiently expected because the continuous notice is given within the first symbol variation and the second symbol variation. It is also considered that there is a low need for seeking an improvement in the expectation of continuous notices due to pseudo continuous fluctuations within the pattern fluctuations. In response to this, the following solutions are proposed. That is,
“Based on the fact that the game ball wins once at the start opening, it starts a true variation that starts the variation of the symbol, and when the determined variation time has elapsed, performs a true variation stop that stops the variation of the symbol, and continues In the gaming machine having a symbol display means for performing a series of symbol variation display from the start of the true variation to the true definite display, performing the true definite display that continues to display the definite symbol for a predetermined time, the symbol display means, In the series of symbol variation display, pseudo variation stop that makes it appear as if the true variation stop has been performed, pseudo confirmed display that makes it appear that the true decision display has been performed, and the start of true variation are performed. A pseudo-symbol display means for executing a pseudo-symbol display in which a pseudo-variation start that appears as if it has been received is performed, and the game ball is attached to the player on the basis that the game ball is won once at the start opening. A lottery means for performing a lottery of the profit amount to be performed, wherein the symbol display means performs the symbol variation display once per lottery and displays the symbol representing the result of the lottery as a confirmed symbol. The lottery means suspends the lottery based on winning a prize until the symbol variation display that truly displays the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on winning first as a confirmed symbol is terminated, In addition, before the lottery means the lottery means, the game table determines what kind of lottery result the lottery result becomes, and informs the player that the lottery result is a specific result. Preliminary notification determining means for performing a preliminary notification to be predicted, and the preliminary notification before the symbol representing the result of the lottery determined when the preliminary notification determining means determines to perform the preliminary notification is displayed as a final symbol. Notice display means for performing, when the pseudo symbol display means performs a series of symbol variation display performed after the lottery by the lottery means, the notice notification by the notice notification means for the lottery was performed In this case, it may be a “game table characterized in that the probability that the pseudo symbol display is performed is lower than in the case where the notice notification by the notice notifying means is not performed for the lottery”.

  Further, according to the winning status of the game ball at the start opening, the symbol change display control unit for causing the symbol display means to continuously perform the symbol change display a plurality of times, and before the pseudo change stop is performed. An effect unit that performs a first effect and performs a second effect that is a continuation of the first effect after the start of the pseudo-variation performed after the stoppage of the pseudo-variation is performed, and the effect unit includes two times In the symbol variation display continuously performed as described above, a third effect that is indistinguishable from the first effect is performed for the player before the true variation stop in the symbol variation display performed before the last symbol variation display. And a fourth effect that is indistinguishable from the second effect for the player after the start of the true variation in the symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display in which the third effect is performed. It may be.

  In this way, if there is a need to increase the expectation, it can be increased, and if it is not necessary to increase the expectation, it cannot be increased, so an appropriate expectation improvement effect can be performed. Can enhance the interest of

  For example, if the third hold is a big hit and a notification is to be given, “chance” is displayed for the first change, and “chance” is displayed for the second change. In the third variation, the pseudo-continuous notice is not selected, and the jackpot is easily displayed through the super reach. On the other hand, when the notice notification is not performed, the fact that the third fluctuation result is a highly expected fluctuation result in both the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation is not notified, and in the third fluctuation, `` Chance '' is displayed, pseudo-stop is performed, pseudo-display is performed, and pseudo-start is performed. After starting, display “chance” again, and then make it easy to display the jackpot through super reach. As for how to make it easy to display, when a notice effect is won, a flag such as a notice effect execution flag is set. When the lottery of the effect that informs that it is a big hit, when the notice effect execution flag is set, from the effect lottery table that is less likely to select the pseudo-continuous notice than when the notice effect execution flag is not set Perform a lottery for pseudo-continuous notice.

  When the notice effect execution flag is set, the pseudo continuous notice may not be performed at all. Specifically, the pseudo continuous notice lottery may not be performed.

  Further, when the notice effect execution flag is not set, it is possible to make it easier to display the jackpot due to the developed super reach than when the pseudo continuous notice execution flag is set. Advanced Super Reach is: (1) Character fights (2) Character loses (3) Help character helps (4) Help character wins (5) First super reach that is jackpot, (1) Character fights (2) Character loses (3) Help character helps (4) Help character loses (5) Second help character appears (6) Second help The character wins. (7) There is a second super reach that is a big hit, and when the notice effect execution flag is not set, the second super reach is easily selected. The second super reach has a feature that the reach is developed more than the first super reach.

  Further, full rotation reach may be performed only when the notice effect flag is not set.

  It should be noted that “the pseudo-symbol display means, when performing a series of symbol variation display performed after the lottery means by lottery means, if the notice notification means by the notice notification means has been performed for the lottery, On the other hand, it may be a “game machine characterized in that the probability that the number of times of the pseudo symbol display is reduced is higher than in the case where the advance notice is not given by the advance notice means”. For example, when the notice notification flag is set, an average of one pseudo continuous notice is performed, whereas when the notice notice flag is not set, an average of three pseudo continuous notices are performed. That is.

(Modification Example F)
In addition, a game machine having the following configuration is provided for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game compared to conventional game machines. That is, “the game ball includes a lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player based on a winning once at the start opening, and the symbol display means displays the symbol variation display for each lottery. A symbol that is displayed once and represents a symbol representing the result of the lottery as a final symbol, and the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on the fact that the lottery has won first is displayed as a final symbol. The lottery based on the fact that the prize was won later is put on hold until the end of the variable display. Further, before the lottery means the lottery means the lottery, the lottery results in what kind of lottery result. And a notice notification determining means for notifying the player that the result of the lottery is a specific result, and when the notice notification determining means determines that the notice notification is performed. Judgment Prior notice means for giving a notice before the symbol representing the result of the lottery as a confirmed symbol is displayed, a first notice stage for giving the notice in the first form, and a second notice notice in the second form. A game machine characterized by comprising stage switching means for switching between two notice stages, and may have the following characteristics.

(Modification Example F-1)
“The stage switching means prevents the stage from being switched while the notice notification means performs the notice, and allows the stage to be switched while the notice information does not perform the notice. It may be a “characteristic game stand”. In game machines that perform stage switching lottery based on a predetermined condition such as every change, stage switching lottery is not performed while notice notification is being performed, and stage switching lottery is performed while notice notification is not being performed. If you win, you may switch the stage. Similarly, when the stage is switched by the player's operation, the stage switching operation is not accepted while the notice is being given, and the stage switching operation is accepted while the notice is not being given. Good.

  It should be noted that the stage is an effect stage, and is intended to widen the range of effects, for example, by changing the background or the appearance characters. For example, there is a princess stage as the first stage (a princess character appears, and if you hit a dart jackpot with a background about the festival, you will reach a jackpot), and the second stage is a samurai stage. ) Appeared, and in the background of the castle, if you defeat the sneak into the hall, you will reach a big win). Because the stage selection lottery table is different for each stage, the conditions for selecting the stage are different. In addition, a plurality of stages can be provided by selecting or drawing lots of effects that make up the kite stage.

  In the princess stage, a notice that a cute doll appears continuously is given, and in the samurai stage, a notice that the countdown for the sneak is performed is performed. In particular, in the song stage, the songr will say “1” as a notice for the first change, and the song “2” will be given as a notice for the second change. As a notice notification, the sound of the songer saying “3” is output and the sneaky reach production is developed. In this case, if you can freely change the stage during the notice, you will not know who the player will suddenly start from “3” when you switch to the puppet stage after two cute dolls on the princess stage. As a result, the entertainment reach of the music declines.

(Modification F-2)
The game table may be characterized in that the notice information means ends the notice information when the stage is switched by the stage switching means. This also prevents the display of effects when the stage is switched for the same reason as in the modified example A from being strange. Note that the stage switching method may be any method, such as a lottery method or a player's operation, as in the modification example F-1.

(Modification Example F-3)
“The stage switching means is provided so that it can also be switched for the third notice stage that does not give notice, and when the stage is changed while the notice notice is giving notice, the stage is changed to the third notice stage. May be a game machine characterized in that it can be switched to the third stage while the advance notice means is not making a notice. By not shifting to the third stage where the continuous notice is not executed, the continuous notice can be enjoyed to the end. Note that the stage switching method may be any method, such as a lottery method or a player's operation, as in the modification example F-1.

(Modification Example F-4)
“The notice notification means performs a non-story notice notice with no story and a story notice notice with story in the second stage, and the stage is switched while the notice notice is given in the first stage. In such a case, it may be a “game table characterized in that a non-story notice is performed without performing a story notice as a notice in the second stage”. In the example of the modified example F-1, in addition to the advance notice that the musician counts up on the second stage, the advance stage notice that the musician appears continuously is performed. The notice that the musician counts up is completed with "Ichini no San!", So if the player suddenly starts with "san!", The player will feel uncomfortable, but the notice that the musician will appear continuously Since there is no story, even if the first and second notices are made with a lovely doll on the princess stage and the third notice is made with a notice that the musician appears, the player will not feel any sense of incongruity. Note that the stage switching method may be any method, such as a lottery method or a player's operation, as in the modification example F-1.

(Modification G)
Further, as in the modification example D, the main control unit acquires the advance notice information at the time of winning a prize, collects the advance notice information on hold at the start of fluctuation, and outputs the information to the sub control part. The sub control unit is based on the input advance notice information. There are the following problems in a gaming machine that performs a notice effect and a sub-control unit that draws a notice effect by lottery.

  For example, when the sub-control unit receives the advance notice information and the advance notice information is only the notice information for the loss, the sub-control unit performs lottery drawing of the continuous notice. It is assumed that the lottery probability of Gase continuous notice is 1/20. The main control unit outputs a notice information together with a change start command based on the end of the previous symbol change. Here, it is assumed that one game ball is won at the start port while the symbol variation is being performed, so that the number of holds increases by one, and the total number of holds reaches two (all lost). In this case, the sub-control unit inputs the advance notice information together with the change start command, and since all of the advance notice information is lost, the sub-control unit performs lottery of the continuous notice of advance at 1/20. As another example, it is assumed that three game balls are won at the starting port while the symbols are changing, so that three holds are added and the total number of holds is four (all lost). Also in this case, the sub-control unit inputs the advance notice information together with the change start command, and since all of the advance notice information is lost, the sub-control unit performs lottery of the continuous notice at 1/20. However, when the number of holds increases by one and when the number of holds increases by three, naturally, the case where the number of holds increases by three is greater than the case where the number of holds increases by one (for example, other than lost and small hits). The probability is three times higher. In such a case, even if it is a loss, it is necessary to excite the player by performing a series of advance notice and enhance the player's game interest, but the notice probability is not changed according to the increase in the hold However, there is a problem that the player cannot be effectively spoken and the interest of the player cannot be enhanced effectively.

This is solved by the following method. That is,
“Based on the fact that the game ball wins once at the start opening, it has lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player, and the symbol display means displays the symbol variation display once for each lottery. The symbol representing the result of the lottery is displayed as a confirmed symbol, and the lottery means displays the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on winning first as a symbol for the symbol variation display. The lottery based on the fact that the prize has been won is put on hold until the game ends, and the lottery results before the lottery means the lottery means the lottery means A preliminary determination means and a preliminary determination execution lottery based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, and based on the preliminary determination execution lottery, it is determined whether or not to notify the player that a specific result is predicted. Advance notice decision And notice information means for performing the notice notice before the symbol representing the result of the lottery determined when the notice notice determining means decides to perform the notice notice is displayed as a confirmed symbol. The notice notification determining means may be a “game table that performs the notice execution lottery” based on the increase in the number of lotteries held by the lottery means. Since it is possible to perform a notice execution lottery that takes into account the increase in the number of holds, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, “the game ball is provided with a lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player based on the winning of the game once at the start gate, and the symbol display means displays the symbol variation display for each lottery. A symbol that is displayed once and represents a symbol representing the result of the lottery as a final symbol, and the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on the fact that the lottery has won first is displayed as a final symbol. The lottery based on the fact that the prize was won later is put on hold until the end of the variable display. Further, before the lottery means the lottery means the lottery, the lottery results in what kind of lottery result. Whether or not to perform the advance notice lottery from the judgment result of the advance judgment means and whether or not to make a notice to the player to predict that the specific result is based on the advance notice lottery. Notice to be decided Knowledge determining means, and notice information means for performing the notice notice before the symbol representing the lottery result determined when the notice notice deciding means decides to perform the notice notice is displayed as a confirmed symbol. The notice notification determining means performs the notice execution lottery based on the increase in the number of the lotteries held by the lottery means between the previous notice execution lottery and the current lottery. It may be a “game table characterized by”. Since the advance notice lottery can be performed in consideration of the number of reserved balls increased from the previous run to the current run, the advance notice lottery according to the degree of expectation can be performed. In addition, when developing a game machine, it may be easy to predict a lottery value of a notice execution lottery, and the development man-hour may be reduced.

  The main control board includes at least a main control board including at least the lottery means and the preliminary determination means, and a sub-control board including at least the advance notice determination means and the advance notice means. When the lottery means performs the lottery, the determination result of the preliminary determination means is output to the sub control board together with the lottery result, and the sub control board is based on the input determination result of the preliminary determination means It may be a “game table characterized in that the advance notice lottery is performed by the advance notice determining means”. In such a case, the processing structure is simplified, but the determination result of the prior determination means cannot be acquired freely by the sub-control unit or cannot be acquired for each increase in the number of holdings. By providing a structure for performing a lottery, it is possible to provide a game stand that can appropriately raise the player's expectation, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player's game.

  In addition, when the determination result of the preliminary determination unit is a first profit amount (15R special jackpot, etc.), the preliminary notification determination unit performs a preliminary execution lottery using a first lottery table, and the preliminary determination If the determination result of the means is the second profit amount (such as a loss), the notice execution lottery is performed using the second lottery table. Further, “the notice notification determining means performs the lottery using the second lottery table. The lottery means holds the lottery hold number when the first hold number is smaller than the first hold number than when the second hold number is less than the first hold number. It may be a “game table characterized by a low notification probability of performing“. The lottery based on the second lottery table is, for example, a lottery for continuous gaze notice. For example, in the previous example, the sub-control unit inputs the advance notice information together with the change start command, and since all the advance notice information is lost, it is assumed that the lottery of the continuous announcement is 1/20, but the advance notice information is all lost. If there is one hold, it will be 1/20, if there are two hold, 1/30, if there are three hold, 1/40, if there are four hold, it will be 1/50. In addition, a correction value is entered in accordance with the number of pending increases. In this case, if the number of on-hold increases is not considered, the greater the number of holds, the smaller the execution probability of the notice. This is related to the fact that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of suspensions increases. In other words, when there are four holds, it is easy to select a short variation time so that the change will end soon because there is no more hold, and when there is zero hold, if the change ends quickly, the game Since the player may be freed up, the recent game machines have a shorter variation time as the number of on-holds increases. Therefore, if it becomes easy to make a notice when it is easy to select a short change time, the change will end immediately after making a notice, so the interest of the game will decline for some players There is a case. Therefore, the execution probability of the notice is made smaller as the number of suspensions increases.

  However, in this case, if the notice lottery is not performed in consideration of the increase in the number of holds, for example, in the previous notice execution lottery, the number of holds is 1, and in the case of the current notice execution lottery, there are four holds. In such a case, the expectation to the player due to the gasse notice notification for the three holdings becomes 1/50, which is not preferable. Therefore, for example, 1- (19/20 × 29/30 × 39/40 × 49/50) = 147039/1200000 (about 12%) is performed, so that the player's gaming interests are appropriate. It can be improved with timing. In addition, when the lottery hold number held by the lottery means is the first hold number when the lottery is held by the first lottery table, the notice notification determining unit performs the first hold. It may be a “gaming table characterized in that the notification probability of performing the notification in advance is larger than that in the case of the second reserved number which is a number smaller than the number”. Since the player's expectation can be raised as consecutive notices continue, if the 15R special jackpot is hit, if there are four holds, the notice of the player's game will be surely made by giving as many notices as possible Can be improved.

  In addition, the “notice notification determining means is characterized in that a lottery for notice notification is performed according to the number of holdings that are increased by the number of holdings of the lottery held by the lottery means”. There may be. For example, when the number of holdings increases by three, conventionally, a 1/20 lottery was performed once, but it may be performed three times. In this case, the lottery probability is 1− (19/20) 3 = 14%. In addition, the game according to the present invention is characterized in that the notice notification determination means performs a notice notification lottery in accordance with the number of holdings obtained by increasing the number of holdings of the lottery held by the lottery means and the storage location. Stand ". When the increased hold is stored in the third hold and the fourth hold, the lot may be drawn by the lottery table for the third hold and the lottery table for the fourth hold.

  In addition, when the lottery hold number held by the lottery means is the first hold number when the lottery is held by the second lottery table, the notice notice determining means is the first hold It may be a “gaming table characterized in that the notification probability of performing the notification in advance is larger than that in the case of the second reserved number which is a number smaller than the number”.

(Modification example H)
In addition, a game machine having the following configuration is provided for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game compared to conventional game machines. That is, “the game ball includes a lottery means for drawing a profit amount to be given to the player based on a winning once at the start opening, and the symbol display means displays the symbol variation display for each lottery. A symbol that is displayed once and represents a symbol representing the result of the lottery as a final symbol, and the symbol representing the result of the lottery based on the fact that the lottery has won first is displayed as a final symbol. The lottery based on the fact that the prize was won later is put on hold until the end of the variable display. Further, before the lottery means the lottery means the lottery, the lottery results in what kind of lottery result. And a notice notification determining means for notifying the player that the result of the lottery is a specific result, and when the notice notification determining means determines that the notice notification is performed. Judgment Notice information means for giving a notice before the symbol representing the result of the lottery is displayed as a confirmed figure, and effect control means for controlling the effect determined based on the lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means; Driving means for driving a movable object for presentation provided for the presentation, wherein the notice notification means outputs a drive signal to the drive means as the notice of notice, and the effect control means includes the notice notice Even when the means is planning to output a drive signal to the drive means, if it is decided to perform a specific effect, the drive signal is output in preference to the drive means. It may be a “game table characterized by the fact that”. When the notice effect is set, the effect for driving the effect device (for example, the shutter) is not selected or selected by the effect determined based on the lottery of the profit amount to be given to the player by the lottery means. Even if it is done, the production is not executed. This is to prevent the continuous notice from being overwritten with the production based on the lottery of the change at that time and becoming invisible. However, in the case of special figure 1, when a big win is made in the lottery four times ahead, a big hit is won in special figure 2 which is preferentially changed over special figure 1 on the way. In this case, it is assumed that an effect for making a definite notification that the jackpot has been won is selected by the effecting device (which is always a jackpot when the effect is performed). In this case, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player's game by giving priority to the confirmation notification. In addition, it may be an effect with a high degree of expectation of the jackpot, and is not limited to the fixed notification.

(Modification Example I)
In addition to simply starting the game and displaying the results, it has become possible to improve the interest by making the player have a sense of expectation in the middle of the game, but the range of games can be expanded In addition to the fear that a player will soon get bored if a special function is not installed, in conventional game machines, a determination as to whether or not the right to change the symbol is made in advance before the change of the symbol is started (so-called In the case where it is determined that an advantageous gaming state is generated, the range of game play has been expanded by changing the time (fluctuation time) of the symbol change before the symbol change based on the right.

  However, when changing the variation time based on the result of the determination of success / failure in advance, it becomes possible to increase the number of success / failure lotteries more than before, so the number of jackpots will naturally increase, There was a problem that unfairness was given to the player and gambling was increased. On the other hand, if the symbol change time is changed regardless of the game result, there is a risk that the game machine will perceive the game machine as if it had caused a special figure change, and the player was distrusted about fairness. It makes me feel. Therefore, by not changing the change time in the case of performing the advance notice based on the result of performing the determination as to whether or not (pre-reading result), it is possible to suppress gambling without giving the player an unfair feeling. .

  However, when a notice is given without changing the variation time based on the result of determining whether or not it is determined in advance, the last symbol variation of the continuous symbol variation stop display may not be a long variation time. In this case, there is a possibility that the effect of notifying the notice in the continuous symbol fluctuation stop display is lowered, and the interest of the player is lowered.

  For this reason, when notifying the notice without changing the fluctuation time, it is possible to ensure that the last symbol fluctuation of the continuous notice notice is made a long fluctuation time by making the time of symbol fluctuation that becomes a hit or a loss always longer. However, in that case, the fluctuation time of the losing that accounts for the majority of the fluctuation time in the normal time will naturally become longer, so the player will be stopped until the lottery result is notified, and the operation of the game table will be reduced There is a problem that the interest of the player is lowered because the number of times the lottery is performed is significantly reduced. In addition, there is a problem that it is not possible to provide a notice with a high production effect.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game stand that can improve the effect of the advance notice without giving an unfair feeling to the player, and has been made to solve such conventional problems. To do. That is,
“When a game ball is won at a predetermined start opening, a symbol display means for performing a variable stop display for a predetermined variation time after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a symbol form displayed by the symbol display means is a specific symbol. Special gaming state starting means for starting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when it is an aspect, a specific variable time group including only a specific variable time satisfying the first specific condition, and a non-specific variable time not satisfying the specific condition A non-specific variation time group including a plurality of variation time groups including at least one of the variation time groups determined in advance is determined when a game ball wins the predetermined start opening Variable time group determining means, variable time group storage means for storing the variable time group determined by the variable time group determining means, and Fluctuation time determining means for determining a fluctuation time corresponding to a second specific condition from the stored fluctuation time groups at the start of stop display, and the variable stop display on the symbol display means based on the determined fluctuation time Display control means for performing the above and when there is one or a plurality of prior variable stop displays that are the variable stop displays that start before the start of the specific variable stop display based on any specific variable time in the specific variable time group In addition, it may be a gaming table characterized in that it includes a prior notice notifying means for giving a prior notice notifying that the special gaming state is started in the first variable stop display. In this way, the specific change stop display based on the change time satisfying the specific condition is performed after the advance notice is given in advance change stop display without changing the change time. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effects of the advance notice and the specific variation stop display without giving the player an unfair feeling, and to improve the interest of the player. Further, since there is no need to have a plurality of symbol types, it is not necessary to perform control processing related to the type lottery, and the control burden can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the burden of document preparation by reducing the description items related to the symbol type described in the documents to be submitted to the inspection organization (such as Secure Electronic Communication Technology Association).

  In addition, the “preliminary advance notice means performs the advance notice in the advance change stop display when the advance change stop display is the non-specific change time”, Also good. In this way, in order to perform the specific change stop display that is the specific change time after performing the advance notice notification during the first change stop display that is the non-specific change time, the effect of the advance notice and the specific change stop display is further improved. Can increase the interest of the player.

  In addition, “the advance notice notification unit may be configured to display the advance notice in the change display from the previous change stop display to the specific change stop display when the previous change stop display may be the specific change time. It may be a “game table characterized by not performing the game”. By doing so, since there is no prior notice when there is a possibility that the first variable stop display becomes the specific variable time, it is possible to prevent the effect of the advance notice and the specific variable stop display from being reduced. it can.

  In addition, “the advance notice notification unit displays the prior variable stop display when the specific variable stop display does not display the specific symbol form and the prior variable stop display may be the specific variable time. To the specific change stop display may be a gaming machine characterized in that the advance notice is not performed. By doing so, the advance notice is not given when the specific change stop display is lost and the previous change stop display may become the specific change time, so the effect of the advance notice and the specific change stop display is reduced. Can be prevented. In addition, when the specific change stop display is around and the previous change stop display may become the specific change time, even if the advance notice is given and the effect is reduced, the player is advantageous. There is no loss of interest in

  Further, it may be “a game machine characterized in that the specific variation time is longer than the non-specific variation time”. By doing this, the fluctuation time of the first variable stop display can be shortened and the fluctuation time of the specific variable stop display can be increased. By performing the specific variation stop display for a long variation time, it is possible to enhance the effects of the advance notice and the specific variation stop display, and to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, “the non-specific variation time group includes a first non-specific variation time group including only the non-specific variation time, and a second non-specific variation time group including the specific variation time and the non-specific variation time. The prior notice notification means includes the first advance stop notification when the all-first advance stop indication is based on any non-specific change time in the first non-specific change time group. When a prior notice is given and at least one of the one or more preceding variable stop displays is based on any variable time of the second non-specific variable time group, from the previous variable stop display to the specific variable stop display It may also be a “game table” in which the advance notice is not performed in the variable display. By doing so, when the first change stop display is based on the change time of the first non-specific change time group, the change time is always the non-specific change time, so that it is possible to make advance notice with a high effect of production. . In addition, when the previous variable stop display is based on the variable time of the second non-specific variable time group, the variable time is not necessarily the non-specific variable time. It is possible to prevent the production effect from decreasing.

  In addition, “when a game ball wins at the predetermined start opening, the right of the variable stop display is reserved up to a predetermined number, and when the variable stop display ends when the hold number is 1 or more, Holding means for subtracting 1 from the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the case where the number of holdings at the start of the variable stop display among the variable times of the variable time group is a predetermined number of holds is the variable stop display start time The variation time corresponding to a case where the number of suspensions is greater than the predetermined number of suspensions, and the variation time determination means is configured to select the variation stop display from the stored variation time group at the start of the variation stop display. When a change time corresponding to the number of holds is determined, and the prior notice notification unit has the previous change stop display based on any change time of the second non-specific change time group, the previous change stop display When the change time corresponding to the specific hold number that may be the initial hold number is a non-specific change time, the advance notice is given in the prior variable stop display, and the specific hold number is supported. Even if any of the variation times to be performed is a specific variation time, the game table is characterized in that the advance notice is not performed in the variation display from the previous variation stop display to the specific variation stop display. Good. In this way, even if the previous fluctuation stop display is based on any fluctuation time in the second non-specific fluctuation time group, if the non-specific fluctuation time is always selected at the start of the previous fluctuation stop display, a prior notice is given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the occurrence probability of the advance notice. In addition, when the non-specific variation time is not always selected at the start of the destination change stop display, the advance notice is not performed, so that it is possible to prevent the effect of the advance notice from being deteriorated. In the second non-specific variation time group, the specific variation time (relatively long) and the non-specific variation time (relatively short) are associated with each variation time when the number of holdings is small and large. When the number of holds is large, the lottery result is notified to the player early to shorten the state where the number of holds cannot be held, thereby preventing the player from stopping, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo. When there is a small number, it is possible to delay the notification of the lottery result to provide a period in which the number of holdings is increased, and to shorten the time during which the variable stop display is not performed, thereby preventing the player from being less interested in the game.

  The “preliminary advance notice means may perform the advance notice in the specific change stop display”. By carrying out like this, even if it carries out prior notice notification also by specific fluctuation stop display, the effect of advance notice information and specific fluctuation stop display can be heightened, and a player's interest can be improved.

  In addition, “the game table characterized in that the specific variation stop display when the specific symbol mode is not displayed has a higher incidence than the specific variation stop display when the specific symbol mode is displayed”. There may be. By doing so, the advance notice in case of losing is more likely to occur, so it is possible to show the advance notice to the player more and improve the interest of the player.

(Change Example J)
In addition, a game machine having the following configuration is provided for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game compared to conventional game machines. In other words, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a relatively difficult-to-win state. A plurality of types of stop symbol forms including a first specific symbol form and a second specific symbol form that display a change of symbols over a predetermined fluctuation time based on the winning of a game ball at the first start opening. A series of symbol fluctuation stop display is executed to stop and display one type of the stop symbol mode after the fluctuation time has elapsed, and a predetermined fluctuation is determined based on the winning of the game ball at the second start opening. A symbol display means for performing a series of symbol variation stop display for displaying a variation of symbols over time and stopping and displaying one type of stop symbol mode among a plurality of types of stop symbol modes after the passage of the variation time; Design When the stop symbol mode stopped and displayed by the motion stop display is the first specific symbol mode, the symbol is shifted to the first special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined normal state and is stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display. When the mode is the second specific symbol mode, the special game state transition means for shifting to the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state but disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state And when the symbol display means stops and displays any one of the first specific symbol mode and the second specific symbol mode by the symbol variation stop display, before the stop display, Notice notification means for performing a notification with a predetermined probability that suggests that the symbol display means is likely to stop and display the first specific symbol form, and the notice notification means stops the specific symbol variation stop In the symbol change stop display of a plurality of consecutive times, the notice notification is made, and the symbol display means draws the profit amount based on the winning to the second starting port, the first start It is prioritized over the lottery of the profit amount based on the winning in the mouth, and in the case of the difficult to win state, the game includes the first specific design mode based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting port. (2) A game board characterized by executing a series of symbol fluctuation stop display for stopping and displaying one type of a stop symbol mode among a plurality of types of stop symbol modes not including a specific symbol mode. There may be.

  In the difficult-to-win state, the special figure 1 is mainly changed, and the special figure 1 is reserved, and a continuous notice for the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. In this case, if a special winning is won in the special figure 2, the opening operation of the big winning opening by the special winning in the special figure 2 is performed during the continuous notice, and the continuity of the continuous notice may be hindered. For this reason, in the difficult-to-win state, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1, and the small hit symbol is not displayed in the special figure 2. Note that the opening operation of the big winning opening with a small hit may be performed for about 8 seconds, for example.

  In addition, “the symbol display means, over the fluctuation time of either one of the predetermined long fluctuation time and the short fluctuation time shorter than the long fluctuation time, based on the game ball entering the predetermined start opening. A series of symbol fluctuation stops in which a change display of the symbols is performed and one type of the stop symbol mode among the plural types of stop symbol modes including the first specific symbol mode and the second specific symbol mode is stopped and displayed. Display, and when the symbol display means displays the variation of the symbol and stops and displays one of the first specific symbol aspect and the second specific symbol aspect, It may be a “game table characterized in that the symbol variation display in the specific symbol variation stop display for displaying the symbol mode is performed over the long variation time”. Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out a prize ball. In addition, such a gaming table is provided with a symbol display device such as a 7-segment display, and when a game ball wins at the start opening, the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates for a predetermined time, and the symbol after the change is predetermined. When a specific symbol mode is reached, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, such as opening a variable prize opening for a predetermined time. In the game machine, the interest of the game machine is improved by increasing or decreasing the opportunities for the player to obtain the above-mentioned benefits by controlling the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player. As for such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that informs a player in advance that the symbol after the change becomes a specific symbol mode before the symbol ends the variation (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 3- 73180). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, in addition to simply changing the symbol, the player is informed in advance that the symbol after the change will be in a specific symbol form. It has become possible to improve the interest to some extent, such as becoming possible, but if you do not further improve the gameability and sustain the player's willingness to play, you will soon get bored by the player There is a fear. Accordingly, it is an object to provide a gaming table that can enhance game playability and maintain a player's willingness to play.

  Further, “the notice notifying unit is configured such that the variation time of the symbol variation display in the first symbol variation stop display is longer than a predetermined time in a plurality of consecutive symbol variation stop displays including the specific symbol variation stop display last. For example, it may be a “game table characterized in that the notice notification is not performed while the first symbol variation stop display is executed”.

  Further, “when the notice notification unit executes symbol variation stop display for performing symbol variation display over the long variation time in a plurality of consecutive symbol variation stop displays with the specific symbol variation stop display as the last. The game table may be characterized in that, in the symbol variation display over the long variation time, the notice notification is repeatedly performed at intervals not exceeding the short variation time.

  Further, in the “game table characterized in that the symbol display means performs a temporary stop display of a symbol different from the symbol stop display during the symbol variation display in the symbol variation stop display”. There may be.

  In addition, “the gaming machine characterized in that the special gaming state transition means shifts to the third gaming state advantageous to the player, with at least one of the conditions being the end of the second gaming state”. There may be.

  In addition, the game table may be characterized in that the symbol display means has a higher probability of stopping and displaying the second specific symbol mode in the third gaming state than in the normal state.

  Further, it may be “a gaming table characterized in that the symbol display means has a higher probability that the first specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed in the third gaming state than in the normal state”.

  Note that, in the difficult-to-win state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is the main, the suspension is accumulated in the special figure 1, and the continuous notice for the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. In this case, if the super reach is won in the special figure 2, the super reach is performed in the special figure 2 during the continuous notice, and the continuity of the continuous notice may be hindered. For this reason, in the winning easy state, the super reach may be easily performed in the special figure 2, and the super reach may be difficult to be performed in the special figure 2. In other words, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a difficult-to-win state. A plurality of types of stop symbol forms including a first specific symbol form and a second specific symbol form that display a change of symbols over a predetermined fluctuation time based on the winning of a game ball at the first start opening. A series of symbol fluctuation stop display is executed to stop and display one type of the stop symbol mode after the fluctuation time has elapsed, and a predetermined fluctuation is determined based on the winning of the game ball at the second start opening. A symbol display means for performing a series of symbol variation stop display for displaying a variation of symbols over time and stopping and displaying one type of stop symbol mode among a plurality of types of stop symbol modes after the passage of the variation time; Strange design When the stop symbol mode stopped and displayed by the stop display is the first specific symbol mode, the symbol mode is shifted to the first special game state advantageous to the player from the predetermined normal state, and is stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display. Is a second specific symbol form, special game state transition means for shifting to a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state but disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state; When the symbol display means stops displaying the specific symbol mode of either the first specific symbol mode or the second specific symbol mode by the symbol variation stop display, the symbol is displayed before the stop display. Notice means for performing a notice with a predetermined probability indicating that the display means is likely to stop and display the first specific symbol mode, and the notice notice means includes the specific symbol variation stop table. In the multiple symbol fluctuation stop display that is consecutively repeated, the notice notification is performed, and the symbol display means is more likely to receive the second starting port in the difficult-to-win state than in the easy-to-win state. A gaming table characterized in that a variation time having a short variation time based on the winning of a game ball can be easily selected.

  It should be noted that “the first symbol lottery means for lottery to acquire the first random number and stop in the first specific symbol mode; and the second random number to acquire and stop in the second specific symbol mode. 2nd symbol lottery means for lottery, wherein the second symbol lottery means does not acquire the second symbol lottery random number when the winning is difficult. Good. In the case of the normal figure low probability state, the big hit symbol lottery random number is acquired and the small hit symbol lottery random number is not acquired.

(Modification Example J-1)
In addition, a game machine having the following configuration is provided for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game compared to conventional game machines. In other words, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a relatively difficult-to-win state. Based on the winning of the game ball at the first start opening, the symbols are displayed over a predetermined variation time, and one of the plurality of types of stop symbols is displayed as the variation time. A series of symbol variation stop display is performed to stop display after a lapse of time, and based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at the second starting port, a symbol variation display is performed over a predetermined variation time, and a plurality of types of symbol variation display are performed. A symbol display means for executing a series of symbol variation stop display for stopping and displaying one type of the stop symbol modes among the stop symbol modes, and the stop symbol mode stopped by the symbol variation stop display. A special game state transition means for shifting to a first special game state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state in the case of the specific symbol mode, wherein the symbol display means is in the difficult to win state A series of symbol fluctuations based on winning in the first starting port when there is a winning in the second starting port during a series of symbol variation stop display based on winning in the first starting port The stop display is interrupted and the symbol variation based on the winning at the second starting port is started to execute a series of symbol variation stop display, and when the series of symbol variation stop is finished, the first variation is interrupted. A series of symbol variation stop display based on winning at the starting port of the first is restarted, and the second start is performed during a series of symbol variation stopping display based on winning at the first starting port in the easy winning state. If there is a prize in the mouth, the first It may be a gaming table characterized "in that the series of symbol variation stopped and displayed based on the winning to the start hole does not halt. Since it is easy to enter the starting port 2 in the easy-to-win state, a stop game is performed until a reach with a high jackpot probability is selected in FIG. 1, and when a reach with a high jackpot probability is selected, the stop game is subsequently played. If the game is canceled and the special figure 2 is obtained, it is possible to obtain two jackpots in one easy winning state. At this time, since the player plays the stop game, there is a problem that the operation of the game store side is lowered. This modification solves this problem. It should be noted that the interruption variation of special figure 2 may not be performed especially when the special figure 1 is a big hit.

(Modification K)
Unlike the declaration described in the section of the modification example, the modification example K is not limited to a gaming machine provided with a notice notification means. And the game machine provided with the following structure is provided for the purpose of raising the interest of a game rather than the conventional game machine. In other words, in a gaming machine having a first starting port and a second starting port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a relatively difficult-to-win state. A plurality of types of stop symbol forms including a first specific symbol form and a second specific symbol form that display a change of symbols over a predetermined fluctuation time based on the winning of a game ball at the first start opening. A series of symbol fluctuation stop display is executed to stop and display one type of the stop symbol mode after the fluctuation time has elapsed, and a predetermined fluctuation is determined based on the winning of the game ball at the second start opening. A symbol display means for performing a series of symbol variation stop display for displaying a variation of symbols over time and stopping and displaying one type of stop symbol mode among a plurality of types of stop symbol modes after the passage of the variation time; Design When the stop symbol mode stopped and displayed by the motion stop display is the first specific symbol mode, the symbol is shifted to the first special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined normal state and is stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display. When the mode is the second specific symbol mode, the special game state transition means for shifting to the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state but disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state When the first specific symbol form is stopped in the easy-to-win state, the special game state is always followed by shifting to the easy-to-win state, and special when the second specific symbol form is stopped in the difficult-to-win state. A winning difficulty level transition means for transitioning to either the difficult winning state or the easy winning state after the gaming state ends, and the symbol display means, when in the easy winning state, the second start port Based on the winning of a game ball, one type of stop symbol mode is displayed after the variation time has elapsed, including the first specific symbol mode and not including the second specific symbol mode. It may be a gaming machine characterized by executing a series of symbol fluctuation stop display. Special Figure 2 rarely wins when it is difficult to win, and wins a lot when it is easy to win, but even if the winning is in the easy win state, it only makes sense to raise the base. In the case where an effect is performed over a plurality of fluctuations during the easy-to-win state (for example, a mission mode for notifying the player that a big hit has been made by displaying to achieve the conditions presented in advance). Since the big prize opening is opened unnecessarily by small hits, there is a case where the entertainment interest of the game is reduced by angering the performance performed over a plurality of fluctuations represented by the mission mode. is there.

  It should be noted that “the first symbol lottery means for lottery to acquire the first random number and stop in the first specific symbol mode; and the second random number to acquire and stop in the second specific symbol mode. 2nd symbol lottery means for lottery, wherein the second symbol lottery means does not acquire the second symbol lottery random number when the winning is difficult. Good. In the case of the normal figure low probability state, the big hit symbol lottery random number is acquired and the small hit symbol lottery random number is not acquired.

(Modification example L)
Unlike the declaration described in the section of the modification example, the modification example L is not limited to a gaming machine provided with a notice notification means. And the game machine provided with the following structure is provided for the purpose of raising the interest of a game rather than the conventional game machine. That is, “based on the fact that a game ball has entered a predetermined start opening, the variation display of the symbol is performed over either one of a predetermined long variation time and a short variation time shorter than the long variation time. A symbol that executes a series of symbol fluctuation stop display that stops and displays one type of stop symbol mode among the plural types of stop symbol modes including the first specific symbol mode and the second specific symbol mode If the display means and the stop symbol mode stopped and displayed by the symbol variation stop display are the first specific symbol mode, the display unit shifts to the first special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined normal state. When the symbol mode stopped and displayed by the display is the second specific symbol mode, the player shifts to the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state but disadvantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. Let When the symbol mode stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display is the third specific symbol mode, the third game is more advantageous to the player than the normal state but disadvantageous to the player than the second special game state. When the symbol mode that has been shifted to the state and stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display is the fourth specific symbol mode, the fourth special gaming state has the same advantage as the case where the third specific symbol mode is stopped and displayed. And a special game state transition means, and a large winning opening opening means for performing a control for opening a predetermined winning opening for a predetermined period when the special gaming state is entered, wherein the symbol display means In the case of stopping and displaying any one of the first specific symbol aspect, the second specific symbol aspect and the third specific symbol aspect by stop display, the symbol display means before the stop display But Notice notification means for performing a notification with a predetermined probability to suggest that there is a high possibility that the first specific symbol mode is stopped and displayed, and the symbol display means performs a variable display of the symbol and displays the first specific symbol. When the specific symbol aspect of any one of the aspect, the second specific symbol aspect, and the third specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed, the change of the symbol in the specific symbol variation stop display that stops and displays the one specific symbol aspect The notification is performed over the long variation time period, and the advance notice means performs the advance notice in a plurality of consecutive symbol change stop displays with the specific symbol change stop display last, and the big prize The game opening characterized in that the mouth opening means prevents the player from distinguishing between the opening states of the second special gaming state and the fourth special gaming state. It may be. The first specific symbol mode is, for example, a 15R special jackpot symbol. The second specific symbol mode is, for example, a 2R special jackpot symbol. The third specific symbol mode is, for example, a small hit for use in the gasse continuous notice, and the fourth specific symbol mode is a small hit for appearing as a 2R special jackpot symbol. In addition, when the 2R special jackpot symbol is won, the probability variation state that shifts after the second special game state performed by the 2R special jackpot is changed from the probability variation state that transitions after the game state distinguished from the first that is performed by the 15R special jackpot. In comparison, the notification degree of notification that the player has a probability variation may be low. The probability variation state that shifts after the 2R special gaming state may be a so-called hidden probability variation.

  Note that “the game stand characterized in that the special winning opening releasing means is configured such that the period of the fourth special gaming state is shorter than the period of the third special gaming state”. Since the 3rd special game state is for making it difficult to understand the 2R probability change, it is necessary to set the special game state for a certain period in order to make the 2R probability change appear. Since it is a win, the period of the special gaming state may be as short as possible. In the third special gaming state, the grand prize opening may be opened twice, and in the fourth special gaming state, the grand prize opening may be opened once.

  It should be noted that “the first symbol lottery means for lottery to acquire the first random number and stop in the first specific symbol mode; and the second random number to acquire and stop in the second specific symbol mode. 2nd symbol lottery means for lottery, wherein the second symbol lottery means does not acquire the second symbol lottery random number when the winning is difficult. Good. In the case of the normal figure low probability state, the big hit symbol lottery random number is acquired and the small hit symbol lottery random number is not acquired.

(Modification example M)
Moreover, the following game machines may be sufficient.

  When the result of prefetching is a specific result such as two jackpots included, the state of production may be switched.

  In addition, when the result of prefetching in a predetermined period is a predetermined result, the state of production may be switched.

In addition, as the state of production, either one of QR image A or QR image B is selected and displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and any one of QR image A, QR image B, or QR image C is selected and liquid crystal is displayed. The display period B displayed on the screen may be included. Also, the predetermined period is during a predetermined jackpot, during a predetermined short time, during a predetermined special figure probability fluctuation, during a predetermined normal figure high probability, during a predetermined gaming state, A predetermined time elapses after a predetermined game operation such as a chance button or a launching handle is detected by the player until a predetermined number of changes in the special figure is completed after the predetermined game state is completed. Any period such as during a predetermined notice display, during a predetermined reach fluctuation, during a predetermined stage of production, etc. may be applied.

  In addition, the predetermined result includes a predetermined number of jackpots including two or three jackpots, a predetermined jackpot, a predetermined jackpot type, a predetermined jackpot, or a predetermined lose reach. It may be applied to a case where a specific identifier is included in the hold, such as an identifier determined to be included, or a combination of specific identifiers is included.

  In addition, for the QR image to be displayed, a privilege may be obtained on a homepage on the Internet associated with the QR, or in order to set a normal state of production when playing the next pachinko / pachislot machine It may be a password.

  In place of the QR image, a barcode, a combination of characters having a predetermined number of digits, a combination of images having a predetermined number of colors and shapes, and the like may be used.

(Modification N)
“In a game machine having a first start port and a second start port that takes one of a relatively easy-to-win state and a relatively difficult-to-win state. A lottery means for performing a lottery of a profit amount to be given to a person based on winning one of the first start port and the second start port, and a lottery lottery performed by the lottery unit There is an announcement of the result, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the second starting port is prioritized over the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first starting port. A lottery result notifying unit for performing, and prior to notifying the lottery result, a notice notifying unit for notifying the player of the fact that the lottery result is expected to be advantageous for the player, In addition, a third starting port and movable The movable member (electrical chew) that switches the winning probability of the second starting port and the random contents obtained based on winning at the third starting port determine the movable content of the movable member. Movable member movable content determining means, wherein the notice notification means is based on the random number before the movable member movable content determining means performs the lottery, and the state of the second starting port is the difficult to win state In this case, the game machine may be configured to determine whether or not to give a notice to the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first start opening. Further, “the movable member movable content determination means controls the movable member to be moved to a first movable position and a second movable position that is harder to win the second starting port than the first movable position. The notice notification means moves to the first movable position when the movable member movable content determination means performs a lottery based on a random number acquired based on winning in the third starting port. Is determined at the first notification probability, and the movable member movable content determination means performs a lottery based on a random number acquired based on winning the third start opening. If it is determined that it is not determined to move to the first movable position, the game table is characterized in that the advance notice is given at a second advance probability higher than the first advance probability. It may be. In this case, the first notice probability may be zero. The notice notification may be a notice notice performed when a special figure jackpot random number is included, or a false notice notice performed when a special figure jackpot random number is not included. Different notice probabilities may be used. Note that “the notice notifying unit determines that the state of the second start port is based on the lottery result based on the random number before the lottery result is determined after the movable member movable content determining unit performs the lottery. It may be a “game table characterized in that it is determined whether or not to give a notice to the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting port when it is difficult to win a prize”. According to the configuration described so far, the special figure 1 fluctuation is main in the difficult-to-win state, but when the special figure 2 fluctuation interrupts the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure 2 fluctuation takes priority. There is a problem that the continuity of the continuous notice is impaired or the interruption of Special Figure 2 must be included in the continuous notice, and it becomes difficult for the continuous notice to appropriately enhance the interest of the player's game. is there. In order to solve this, in the difficult-to-win state, it is determined whether or not to notify the advance notice based on the lottery result of the usual figure hold or change. In addition, it was decided whether or not the notice effect based on the winning of the first special figure starting entrance in the difficult-to-win state is based on the holding of the ordinary figure or the lottery result of the changing ordinary figure. The notice effect based on the 2nd special figure start entrance prize, the notice effect based on the 1st special figure start entrance prize in the easy-to-win state, and the notice effect based on the 2nd special figure start entrance prize in the easy-to-win state, The notice content may or may not be determined based on the lottery result of the usual map that is changing.

(Modification P)
A game table equipped with a continuous variation pattern (pseudo continuous variation) showing the result of the lottery to the player through two or more symbol variation effects by performing pseudo continuous variation in addition to the normal variation. is there. For example, it is Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2008-161392. The game table “after the normal fluctuation of a predetermined time, after temporarily stopping the stop symbol candidate in a detachment manner, the stop symbol candidate is variably displayed again. Pseudo continuous variation is defined as “representing such variation after normal variation as“ pseudo continuous variation ””. In addition, the game stand is equipped with a hold lamp for displaying the number of holds, such as “the lottery hold lamp 20 is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights in the lottery is displayed according to the number of lights on”. Yes. In the case of a general game machine, the number of reserves is added at every winning, and subtracted every time a lottery is started, and the display mode of the hold lamp changes in accordance with the addition / subtraction. . For this reason, even if an attempt is made to show the result of the lottery for two or more times as a pseudo-continuous variation to the player through the design variation effect, the holding lamp is used for a re-variation from a temporary stop. If attention is paid, the player may be able to recognize that it is a pseudo continuous variation. For this reason, it may take less time for a player to report a winning result with one symbol variation per winning lottery than to report a winning result with multiple symbol variations per winning lottery. There is a problem that there is a case where it feels that time is wasted or not, and the interest in games may be reduced. This is not only the hold lamp, but also, for example, even if attention is paid to a symbol variation indicator that is externally connected to a special symbol display device or a game stand and displays the number of jackpots or the number of symbol variations, it is also a pseudo continuous variation. I understand. On the other hand, a game is made by playing a violent sound at the time of re-change from a temporary stop so that the player does not recognize that there is no change in the notification mode of the notification device related to symbol change such as a holding ball display lamp. It is conceivable to give a notice to distract the attention of the person. However, if notification is given to distract attention, it is assumed that pseudo-continuous variation has been performed or has been performed. In this case, if notification to distract attention is performed, the player has said that pseudo-continuous variation has been performed or has been performed. There is a problem that the original purpose of distracting notification to lose sight of the pseudo continuous fluctuation is lost.

As a game stand to solve this problem,
“Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting port, the symbol change starts after the start indication to start the symbol change. After the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the symbol is stopped and the stop display is continued for a predetermined period. And a symbol display means for executing a series of symbol variation display for confirming display, wherein the symbol display means is a series of symbols performed on the basis of having entered one start opening. In the variable display, the pseudo stop display that appears as if the stop display was performed, the pseudo confirmed display that appears as if the final display was performed after the pseudo stop display, and the start display after the pseudo final display And a pseudo-continuous display means that makes it appear as if there have been multiple symbol fluctuations by performing a pseudo-start display that appears as if the symbol display means has the start display and the stop display. Is further provided with a distraction notification means for distracting a player's attention to a notification device whose notification mode changes based on the confirmation display, and the distraction notification means includes the distraction notification, Performed when the pseudo continuous notification means displays the pseudo start display, the pseudo confirmed display, or the pseudo stop display, and also when the symbol display means performs the start display, the stop display, or the confirmed display. Is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, attention distraction notification that only needs to be performed during the pseudo stop display or the pseudo start display is purposely performed during the stop display or the start display. As a result, even if a player who does not know the presence of pseudo-continuous fluctuation is not distracted even if a warning distraction notification is made, even if he or she happens to pay attention to the notification device regarding the symbol fluctuation, If it is performed at the time of the start display, it is possible to prevent the expression “distraction alert = pseudo continuous variation” from being established. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from perceiving that pseudo-continuous variation is performed (or has been performed) when notification for distracting attention is made, and a plurality of symbol variations can be performed per winning / failing lottery. Since it is more difficult to understand that the game is being performed, it is possible to prevent the player from experiencing a sense of wasting time and reducing the interest of the game by recognizing the pseudo continuous variation.

  A specific example of this modification will be described below.

  Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting gate, it is given to the player such as a random number for jackpot lottery, a random number for stop symbol lottery, a random number for special figure high probability state transition lottery, a random number for special figure high probability state transition lottery A lottery random number acquisition means for acquiring one or a plurality of random numbers for lottery of profits acquires lottery random numbers. One or more random numbers used for one lottery acquired by the lottery random number acquisition means are stored in the lottery random number storage unit. In addition, a holding number storage unit is provided for storing the number of symbol fluctuations in which the game ball has entered the starting port but the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied and the fluctuation has not started. In the present modification example, the lottery random number acquisition means acquires one or a plurality of random numbers used for one lottery based on the fact that the game ball has won the start opening, and stores it in the lottery random number storage unit. At the same time, 1 is added to the reserved number storage unit. Note that the lottery random number storage unit may also serve as the hold number storage unit. In other words, the number of pending numbers may be determined based on how many sets of one or more random numbers used for one lottery are present.

  When there is a change start condition such as there is a hold number of 1 or more in the hold number storage unit, the symbol is not changing, and the jackpot game is not being played, the symbol display means starts the symbol change. The start of symbol variation means that the symbol that has been stopped and displayed is scrolled vertically, horizontally, or back and forth. In this modified example, a special symbol display for displaying symbols on the 7-segment LED and a decorative symbol display for displaying symbols on the image display are provided. The start display is a display performed when notification of the lottery result is started. In the special symbol display, it means that the symbol being stopped is started to change. In the image display, it means that the symbols that are being stopped are started to change, for example, the left, middle, and right symbols that are being stopped are accelerated, and the display is made to appear as if they are changing at high speed. . The symbol display means performs the variable display after the start display. Fluctuation display refers to variably displaying a symbol, and a special symbol display quickly switches the display of a 7-segment LED. In the image display device, it means the display until the stop display is performed, such as stopping the left and inside of the symbols after the accelerated display and performing a reach effect. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the symbol display means performs stop display. At this time, the symbols to be stopped and displayed are based on the lottery result. After the stop display, a definitive display is performed to leave the stopped display symbol on the screen for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), thereby ending the series of symbol variation display.

  Here, the pseudo continuous variation will be described. Pseudo continuous variation is a pseudo stop display that resembles a symbol stop display, a pseudo confirmed display that resembles a symbol fixed display, and a symbol start display during the series of symbol variation display of decorative symbols performed on an image display. By performing the pseudo start display similar to, a variation that makes it appear as if a lottery result has been displayed a plurality of times in spite of a single lottery result display. Pseudo continuous variation is a series of symbol variation display, symbol variation start display, symbol variation display, symbol pseudo variation stop display, symbol pseudo confirmed display, symbol pseudo variation start display, symbol variation display, symbol variation stop display, symbol confirmed display. I do. The special symbol displayed on the special symbol display is displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the decorative symbol, but the symbol pseudo variation stop display, the symbol pseudo fixed display, and the symbol pseudo variation start display are not performed.

  Next, a notification device related to symbol variation will be described. The notification device related to symbol variation refers to a reserved number indicator provided in the gaming machine, a special symbol indicator, a data indicator for notifying the symbol rotation number provided outside the gaming machine, and the like. The display mode of the reserved number indicator and the data display changes based on the start of symbol variation, and the special symbol indicator has a display mode based on the stop of symbol variation or the start of symbol variation. Change. In other words, the display mode does not change based on the symbol pseudo-variation stop display, symbol pseudo-confirmed display, or symbol pseudo-variation start display. If it is made to change, the player may be misled in order to improve the interest of the game, but if the real information is not reported somewhere, the interest of the game will be significantly improved This is because it may be disadvantageous for the player or the hall personnel may not be able to obtain accurate information.

  Next, attention distraction notification will be described. As described above, since the mode of the notification device regarding the symbol variation does not change based on the symbol pseudo variation stop display, the symbol pseudo confirmation display, and the symbol variation pseudo start display, the player Depending on whether or not there is a change, it is known whether the symbol pseudo-variation stop display or symbol variation stop display, the symbol pseudo-decision display or symbol determination display, or the symbol pseudo-variation start display or symbol variation start display. The attention distraction notification is an effect notification that is performed at the time of the symbol pseudo-variation stop display, symbol pseudo-decision display, or symbol pseudo-variation start display so that the player does not pay attention to whether or not there has been a change in the mode of the notification device regarding the symbol variation. That's it. In the present modification example, this distraction notification is also performed during symbol variation stop display, symbol confirmation display, or symbol variation start display. As a result, it is not necessary to recognize the quasi-continuous fluctuation due to the distraction notice, which makes it more difficult to understand the quasi-continuous fluctuation.

  Further, the distraction notification may be performed by sound, a lamp, a liquid crystal display, or a movable operation of a movable object. In particular, it is preferable not to perform the distraction notification in the vicinity of the notification device regarding the symbol variation (particularly, the reservation indicator, the special symbol indicator, or the reserved symbol display displayed on the liquid crystal display). Thereby, it becomes difficult to notice that it is a pseudo continuous variation.

  Also, the distraction notification performed in the symbol pseudo-variation stop display and the symbol variation stop display may be performed at substantially the same timing. The same applies to the symbol pseudo-confirmed display and symbol definite display, and the symbol pseudo-variation start display and symbol variation start display. Thereby, it becomes difficult to notice that it is a pseudo continuous variation.

  Further, the symbol pseudo variation stop display and the symbol variation stop display may not be completely the same display. For example, there may be a stop display mode unique to the symbol pseudo-variable stop display. The same applies to symbol pseudo-determined display, symbol definite display, and symbol pseudo-variation start display or symbol variation start display. For example, the confirmation display time of the symbol pseudo-determined display and the symbol definite display may be different. As a display mode, the symbol at the time of the symbol pseudo-determined display is displayed as if it is slightly shaken. The symbol may be completely stopped, the fourth symbol at the time of symbol pseudo-deterministic display may continue to be displayed in a variable manner, and the fourth symbol at the time of symbol fixed display may not be displayed as a variable. Further, the symbol at the time of the symbol pseudo-variation start display may start to change at a high speed, and the symbol at the time of the symbol change start display may start to change at a low speed. However, the display must be similar to that at first glance and can be recognized by the player.

  The attention distraction notification may be started at the time of symbol pseudo-variation stop display or during symbol pseudo-confirmed display. A general player pays special attention to a holding ball display device other than decorative symbols when playing a game. The special symbol display device only needs to look at the display of the decorative symbol displayed in conjunction, and the data display is not information linked directly to the player, but when there are four holds Since it is disadvantageous to stop the launch of the game ball, the display of the number of reserved balls is the most noticed by the player. Therefore, in particular, it is necessary to distract the player's attention from the display of the number of reserved balls. Since the number-of-holds display changes at the time of symbol variation start display, it is necessary to attract attention by distraction notification before symbol pseudo variation start display. On the other hand, since the player pays attention to the symbol variation before the pseudo symbol variation stop display, even if the attention distraction notification is started at this time, the player may not be attracted effectively. Therefore, it is effective to start during the symbol pseudo-determined display immediately before the pseudo symbol variation stop display, particularly during the symbol pseudo-determined display. Furthermore, it is desirable to start immediately before the symbol pseudo variation start display during the symbol pseudo confirmation display.

  In addition, the time from the symbol variation start display to the symbol variation stop display that is performed as a result display based on the first lottery is determined at the time of winning the starting opening that triggered the first lottery. Also good.

  In addition, the time from the symbol variation start display to the symbol variation stop display that is performed as a result display based on one lottery may be determined when the first lottery is performed.

  Here, an example in which the notice notification by the notice notification means introduced in the above-described embodiment is taken into account will be described.

  The quasi-continuous variation has little effect of enhancing the player's game interest simply by continuously performing the symbol variation, and it is common to enhance the player's game interest by performing a quasi-continuous effect. For example, symbol variation start display, “chance!” Sound notification, symbol pseudo variation stop display, symbol pseudo fixed display, symbol pseudo variation start display, “still chance!” Sound notification, symbol pseudo variation stop display, symbol Pseudo-confirmed display, symbol pseudo-variation start display, “Large chance!” Sound notification, symbol variation display as super reach variation display, symbol variation stop display (winning), symbol confirmation display Enhancing the interest of the player's game by continuously performing the performance. At this point, when a warning distraction notification is given, the symbol variation start display, “Chance!” Sound is notified, the symbol pseudo-variation stop display, and the symbol pseudo-confirmation display are informed with another sound! (Notice distraction notification), symbol pseudo-variation start display, “Still chance!” Sound alert, symbol pseudo-variation stop display, symbol pseudo-decision display alert “sound once again” and the lamp fully lit, symbol pseudo Change start display, “Large chance!” Sound notification, symbol change display as super reach change display, symbol change stop display (hit), symbol fixed display, distract attention, and pseudo continuous notice It is possible to increase the interest of the player's game while not being noticed. Here, this alert distraction notification is characterized by the fact that it is performed other than pseudo-continuous variation. Therefore, when applied to an example other than pseudo-continuous variation, symbol variation start display, “Chance!” Sound, and symbol variation stop During the display and symbol confirmation display, the alarm is sounded once again and the lamp is fully lit, the symbol variation start display, the symbol "Still chance!" Is announced, the symbol variation stop display, and the symbol confirmation display "!" Sound and the lamp is fully lit, symbol variation start display, "Large chance!" Sound notification, symbol variation display as super reach variation display, symbol variation stop display (winning), symbol confirmation display, etc. . However, if the expectation of the last change in the continuous notice is not determined at the beginning of the continuous notice over a series of symbol changes, even if the continuous notice effect is started, the continuous notice effect is started. Whether or not the end of the jackpot is the same as the lottery probability of the lottery performed at the end of the continuous notice, the expectation of the jackpot due to the start of the continuous notice is not different from the expectation of the jackpot of normal fluctuations, the player May be annoyed by such a series of notices. Therefore, in the case of performing distraction notification other than pseudo continuous fluctuation, it is desirable to perform continuous notice corresponding to pseudo continuous notice and when the notice is being executed. In other words, the fluctuation other than the pseudo continuous fluctuation may be a fluctuation accompanied by a notice of notice. Examples of pseudo-continuous notice and continuous notice include those having a story, those in which the same effects are repeated, and those in which similar effects are gradually emphasized.

  Note that continuous notice and pseudo-continuous notice may be combined. In the previous example, the symbol variation start display, “Chance!” Sound notification, symbol variation stop display, and the symbol confirmation display during the symbol confirmation display, “Lamp once again” sound, all lamps lit, symbol variation start display , “Small chance!” Sound, symbol pseudo-variable stop display, symbol pseudo-confirmed display “another!” Sound, all lamps lit, symbol pseudo-variation start display, “Large chance!” Sound In this case, notification, symbol variation display, super reach variation display, symbol variation stop display (winning), symbol confirmation display may be used. (1) As the number of consecutive performances becomes more rooted in the player's consciousness, the second distraction notice is easier to distract the player than the first distraction notice. It can be said that the third distraction notice is easier to distract the player than the distraction notice. In addition, (2) the fact that the number of reserved balls does not decrease despite the end of symbol variation as in the pseudo-continuous notice, the total symbol variation is less than the decrease in the number of retained balls despite the end of symbol variation. Since the percentage of the game is small, if there is nothing happened, the number of reserved balls will decrease when the symbol change ends (conversely, the player will normally hold the number of reserved balls even after the symbol change ends) If you see a scene where the number of reserved balls has not decreased, the impression will remain in your mind for a while, so you may be wary of displaying the number of reserved balls. Here, when trying to shorten the fluctuation time per unit time of one symbol change by combining the continuous notice and the pseudo continuous notice (three pseudo continuous notices are 50 seconds for one change, 2 Quasi-continuous notice + 1 continuous notice will be shortened by 15 seconds per change), and the first change will be easier for the player to pay attention to the hold lamp of the player's attention. From (1), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the pseudo continuous notice is being performed. On the other hand, if pseudo-sequential notices are made in the order of continuous notices, the player is more likely to notice that the pseudo-sequential notices are given from (1), and the successive productions after (2) It may become easy to notice. In addition, the time from the symbol variation start display to the symbol variation stop display that is performed as a result display based on one lottery is determined when the lottery is performed. By making it easy for a long variation to be selected, the long variation can be applied to the pseudo-continuous notice, and the player may be prevented from thinking that the reach effect is redundant.

  The stop after super reach may be a symbol pseudo-variable stop display.

(Modification Q)
Conventionally, when a notice for a holding ball is made, notice information for making a notice when the main control unit obtains a random number for lottery based on a winning game ball (the lottery random number itself, whether or not a big hit There is a first method of acquiring information on the information and transmitting the notice information to the sub-control unit. In addition, there is a second method of acquiring the advance notice information based on the information stored in the hold that is not drawn at the time of the lottery at the time of starting the change, and transmitting the advance notice information to the sub-control unit. The first method is often transmitted together with a reserved ball number change command (specifically, information indicating an increase in the number of held balls) transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. In many cases, the main control unit is transmitted together with a change start command transmitted to the sub control unit. According to the first method, it is possible to notify the notice at the time of winning, so for example, when a game ball wins at the start opening and the random number obtained there is a random number with a high expectation value of jackpot, It is possible to make a notice with high expectation. For example, if a game ball wins at the starting point and a jackpot random number is obtained, a lottery based on the ball that has just won a prize will be made by notifying a loud sound “Zudon” at that time. Can be performed with high-impact notification, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. On the other hand, in the second method, notice information regarding other hold is acquired at the start of the lottery, and therefore, when the notice effect is performed in accordance with the start of the lottery, the lottery based on the latest notice information can be performed.

  Thus, both the first method and the second method are characteristic. However, the notice effect that is possible in the first method but not in the second method is a notice effect that is performed between the time a prize is received and the next start of change is not performed. When not mounted, it was supposed to be performed by the second method.

  However, when the development is proceeding by the second method, the specification is suddenly changed at one time, and there is a case where it is said that a notice effect is desired to be performed after winning a prize and starting the next variation. In this case, there is a problem that the person in charge of the control is forced to make a large correction of the control, and the development process is greatly delayed.

As a game stand to solve this problem,
“A series of symbol variation stop display that displays a variation of a symbol over a predetermined variation time based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting port and stops and displays a predetermined stop symbol form after the variation time has elapsed. The symbol display means for executing, and when the stop symbol mode stopped and displayed by the symbol variation stop display is a specific symbol mode, the special game state transition means for shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player, When the symbol display means stops and displays the specific symbol aspect by the symbol variation stop display, the notice notification suggests that the symbol display means is likely to stop and display the specific symbol aspect before the stop display. A notice information acquisition unit for obtaining information on the basis of the establishment of the first condition and obtaining the notice information based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition. Gaming table "and the like, characterized.

  According to this gaming machine, the sub-control unit can perform a notice effect based on the notice information output based on a plurality of conditions, and can reduce an increase in work man-hours associated with the specification change. In addition, it is possible to prevent the fun of the game table itself from being lowered by the fact that the high level of entertainment of the game intended by the planner is not performed because the specification cannot be changed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  When the notice information acquisition unit is in the main control unit, the first condition may be that the game ball has won a start opening, and the second condition may be that a lottery is started.

  Further, the main control unit may transmit the acquired advance notice information to the sub control unit. In this case, the advance notice information acquired under the first condition may be output when the reserve ball increase command is output, and the advance notice information acquired according to the second condition may be output when the change start command is output. In addition, it may be output at an arbitrary command output timing such as a change stop command or a symbol confirmation command.

  Further, the sub-control unit may not perform the notice effect based on the notice information acquired under the first condition, but may perform the notice effect based on the notice information obtained according to the second condition. The notice effect may be performed based on the notice information acquired under the first condition, and the notice effect may not be performed based on the notice information acquired according to the second condition. Since both are sent in order to be able to respond flexibly even if there is a specification change, if it is a specification that only performs a notice effect based on the notice information of only one of them, it is unified to either This is because the program capacity of the sub-control unit can be reduced.

  Further, the notice notifying means may differ between the notice effect produced based on the notice information acquired under the first condition and the notice effect produced based on the notice information obtained according to the second condition. There are cases in which the processing load can be reduced by providing a notice in advance suitable for each.

In addition, after the first winning, the establishment of the first condition is established before the establishment of the second condition, and the notice effect performed based on the establishment of the first condition is a sound effect. May be. At this time, it is desirable that the sound notified as the notice effect is output from a dedicated channel or an abnormality / error notification channel. In the case of notification from an abnormality or error notification channel, it is desirable that the abnormality or error notification sound is given priority over the sound that is notified as a notice effect. This is because if the sound that is notified as the notice effect has priority over the abnormality or error notification sound, there is a risk that cheating is promoted.
(Modification example R)
Conventionally, when a notice for a holding ball is given, notice information for giving a notice when the main control unit obtains a random number for lottery based on a winning game ball (the lottery random number itself, whether or not a big hit Or the like), and the advance notice information is transmitted to the sub-control unit. This method is often transmitted together with a reserved ball number change command (specifically, information indicating an increase in the number of held balls) transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. However, since this method gives a notice at the time of winning a prize, if the conditions for notification such as the gaming state change from the time of winning the start opening to the start of the lottery, it can not be flexibly handled, and when the gaming state changes If notice information based on the gaming state after the change is not transmitted again to the sub-control unit, there may be an effect that gives a sense of incongruity. This is a problem listed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-344526.

  However, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-344526 provides an invention in which a notice effect is not performed immediately before the gaming state is switched as a countermeasure for this problem. If it does in this way, since the notice effect is not performed, there was a possibility that the interest of a game might fall.

As a game stand to solve this problem,
“A series of symbol variation stop display that displays a variation of a symbol over a predetermined variation time based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting port and stops and displays a predetermined stop symbol form after the variation time has elapsed. The symbol display means for executing, and when the stop symbol mode stopped and displayed by the symbol variation stop display is a specific symbol mode, the special game state transition means for shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player, When the symbol display means stops and displays the specific symbol aspect by the symbol variation stop display, the notice notification suggests that the symbol display means is likely to stop and display the specific symbol aspect before the stop display. A notice information acquisition unit for obtaining notice information for performing the first notice information when the state at the time of the lottery is the first state and the state at the time of the lottery. Amusement machine, characterized in that to obtain the second advance notice information when it is second state, the "and the like.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a notice effect that can be handled regardless of whether the lottery is in the first state or the second state, and it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from deteriorating.

  The first state may be a special figure high probability state, and the second state may be a special figure low probability state.

  The notice information acquisition part is provided in the main control part, the main control part outputs the notice information to the sub control part, and the notice notifying means of the sub control part performs the notice effect based on the notice information from the main control part. May be executed. This may eliminate the need for troublesome control such as re-acquiring notice information and outputting it to the sub-control unit when the gaming state changes.

  Note that the first notice information and the second notice information may be acquired at the same timing.

Note that the first notice information and the second notice information may be output to the sub-control unit at the same timing (Modification S).
In the modified example S, when the usual figure hold is pre-read and the hold is included, the notice for the lottery of the special figure 1 based on the winning of the first special figure starting port 126 is not performed. .

  In the modified example S, the lottery in FIG. 2 and the announcement of the lottery result are made difficult to interrupt during the notice of the lottery in FIG. 1 based on the case where the first special figure starting port 126 is won. The purpose is to complete the notice with just one.

  That is, “a first start port and an open obstruction member (electrical chew) are provided, and when a predetermined open lottery is won, the obstruction of the open obstruction member is released for a predetermined period, so that a prize can be won. In a gaming machine having a starting port and a third starting port, the first starting port stores a predetermined number of gaming balls and the second starting port receives a gaming ball. A first prize storage section for storing up to a predetermined number, a second prize storage section for storing up to a predetermined number of game balls won at the third start opening, and the first prize storage. A second lottery means for performing lottery for drawing a profit amount to be given to a player and a lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means when the section has one or more winning memories; Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning prize to the mouth The lottery result notifying means for giving priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the prize, and making the player expect that the lottery result is an advantageous result for the player before notifying the lottery result. Whether or not to cancel the obstruction of the opening obstruction member when there is a notice notice means for giving notice notice including notice information at a predetermined notice probability, and when there is one or more winning memories in the second winning memory section And a drive unit that drives the open obstruction member to a position that does not interfere with the obstruction release member when winning the interference cancellation lottery by the interference cancellation lottery means. When the storage unit has a winning memory for winning the interference cancellation lottery by the interference cancellation lottery means, than the case where the second winning memory unit does not have a winning memory for winning the interference cancellation lottery by the interference cancellation lottery means. May be characterized "in that execution probability of the warning notification is set lower.

  The notice notification means does not execute the notice notification when there is a prize memory in which the disturbance cancellation lottery by the disturbance cancellation lottery means is won in the second prize storage section during normal low probability. Also good.

  Further, the notice notification means may end the notice notice being executed when the second prize storage section has a winning memory for winning the disturbance cancellation lottery by the disturbance cancellation lottery means. This end may end immediately or at the next fluctuation start timing.

(Modification example α)
In addition, a variation timer for a plurality of symbols changes that are on hold may be prefetched, and the total change time of the hold may be displayed so as to be recognized by the player. For example, when the first hold is 30 seconds, the second hold is 20 seconds, and the third hold is 10 seconds, a total of 60 seconds may be displayed. In addition, this game stand may be provided with special figure 1 and special figure 2 so that there is an easy-to-win state that makes it easy to win special figure 2 and a difficult-to-win state that makes it difficult to win special figure 2. . In addition, the game table may be such that the lottery result shown in FIG. 2 is more advantageous than the lottery shown in FIG. Further, in this gaming machine, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 may be changed with priority over the fluctuation of the special figure 1. With the above configuration, even if the player wants to take a break, such as when he wants to go to the toilet in a special figure winning state, or when he wants to go to buy juice, There was a problem that it was not possible to go because it did not want to be done, but by displaying the total fluctuation time, for example, when a long reach was taken, the player can go to the toilet, worsening the player's health There is an effect that it is possible to prevent it or to take a moderate break. It should be noted that the total variation time of the total number of reservations may be displayed only when the special figure 2 is in the winning easy state. In addition, when both the special figure 2 and the special figure 1 have a holding, the total variation time for all the holdings in the special figure 2 may be displayed. Further, the total variation time may be displayed when the player operates the predetermined operation unit. In this case, the contents of the presentation may be varied such as reducing the volume of the speaker in accordance with the display of the total variation time, or reducing the light amount of the lamp or liquid crystal. Further, the total variation time may not be added together, and may be displayed individually such as 30 seconds, 20 seconds, 10 seconds, and the like. If there is a jackpot in the hold, the total change time may not be displayed, or instead of displaying the total change time, a jackpot announcement may be given, and A time obtained by subtracting the fluctuation time from the total fluctuation time may be displayed as the total fluctuation time. Further, the display of the total variation time may be a display in which the bar is gradually contracted instead of a numerical display. Further, the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation that is currently fluctuating may or may not be added to the total fluctuation time.

  Finally, it is noted that it is not directly related to the present invention.

(Appendix 1)
A symbol display means for starting a variation display of symbols when a game ball wins at a predetermined start opening;
Special gaming state starting means for starting a special gaming state when the symbol display stopped by the symbol display means is a specific symbol aspect;
When there is a destination variation display that is a variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means that is started before the start of the specific variation display that is a variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means scheduled to display the specific symbol aspect A prior notice device for performing a prior notice related to the content of the specific variation display in the first variation display,
The advance notice means determines the number of advance notices,
Amusement stand.

(Appendix 2)
The advance notice unit determines the number of the advance notices for the first change display based on the number of changes until the specific change display is started.
The game table according to appendix 1.

(Appendix 3)
The advance notice unit determines the number of advance notices to be larger as the number of changes until the specific variation display is started is smaller.
The game table as set forth in Appendix 2.

(Appendix 4)
The advance notice means determines the number of advance notices in the forward change display to be equal to or greater than the advance notice number in the forward change display and less than the advance notice number in the subsequent advance display.
The game table as set forth in Appendix 3.

(Appendix 5)
The advance notice means performs the advance notice in the specific variation display,
The game table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4.

(Appendix 6)
The advance notice includes a temporary stop display of a symbol different from the stop display of the symbol,
The game table according to any one of appendices 1 to 5.

(Appendix 7)
A first image showing a first situation in a predetermined scenario and a second image showing a second situation that has progressed along the scenario more than the first situation can be displayed on the symbol display means. Configure
The advance notice unit displays the first image as the advance notice, and displays the second image as the advance notice after the first image display.
The game table according to any one of appendices 1 to 6.

(Appendix 8)
The first image and the second image are in the same display mode,
The game table according to appendix 7.

(Appendix 9)
The first image includes a first character image;
The second image includes a second character image different from the first character image,
The game table according to appendix 7.

(Appendix 10)
The second image further includes the first character image.
The game table according to appendix 9.

(Appendix 11)
The first image and the second image include one or more character images,
The total number of the character images included in the second image is greater than the total number of the character images included in the first image,
The game table according to appendix 7.

(Appendix 12)
The size of the second image is larger than the size of the first image,
The game table according to appendix 7.

(Appendix 13)
The first image and the second image include numerical information,
The numerical information included in the second image is larger than the numerical information included in the first image.
The game table according to appendix 7.

(Appendix 14)
Including one or more notification means for performing predetermined notification;
The notice notification means includes
While the first image is being displayed, the notification means is notified in a first notification mode indicating a first situation of the predetermined scenario, and the second image is displayed. During the display, the notification means causes the notification means to perform notification related to the notification in the second notification mode indicating the second status that has progressed along the scenario rather than the first status,
The game table according to appendix 7.

(Appendix 15)
The notice notification means performs the notice notice in the symbol variation display by the symbol display means when the specific variation display is not scheduled to start and a specific condition is satisfied,
The game table according to any one of appendices 1-14.

(Appendix 16)
The probability of setting the number of the advance notices for the forward change display to be equal to or greater than the number of the advance notices when the specific change display is not scheduled to start and a specific condition is satisfied Characterized in that the number of times is higher than the probability of making it less than the number of notices to be made when the specific variation display is not scheduled to start and a specific condition is satisfied,
The game table as set forth in Appendix 15.

(Appendix 17)
When the game ball wins at the predetermined start opening and the variation start prohibition condition is not established, the symbol display means is configured to start the symbol variation display,
When the game ball wins at the predetermined starting port and the variation start prohibition condition is satisfied, the symbol display means starts the symbol variation display after the change start prohibition condition is not satisfied. Starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of starting information for
When the symbol mode determination information constituting a part or all of the starting information is the specific symbol mode determination information, the specific symbol mode is selected as the symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Design aspect selection means,
The advance notice means performs the advance notice when the symbol form determining information constituting a part or all of the start information is specific symbol form determining information.
The game table according to any one of appendices 1 to 16.

(Appendix 18)
A plurality of the symbol display means;
When the first symbol display unit of the plurality of symbol display units stops and displays the specific symbol mode, the notice notification unit is configured such that the second symbol display unit of the plurality of symbol display units The advance notice is given during the variable display of the design,
The game table according to any one of appendices 1 to 17.

(Appendix 19)
The advance notice means performs the advance notice before the first symbol display means starts the variable display,
The game stand according to appendix 18.

(Appendix 20)
When the game ball wins at the second starting port among the predetermined starting ports and the second symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means is started. Configured to
When a game ball is won at the second starting port in a state where the second variation start prohibition condition is satisfied, the second variation start prohibition condition is changed to a state where the second variation start prohibition condition is not satisfied. Second starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of second starting information for starting the display of variation of the symbols by the two symbol display means;
When the second variation start prohibition condition is not established, the second symbol display means starts the symbol variation display using the second starting information stored in the second starting storage means. And a second start storage management means for setting the second start storage means in a state in which the second start information is not stored,
When the second symbol display means stops and displays a symbol aspect other than the specific symbol aspect, the second variation start prohibition condition is not satisfied while the first variation start prohibition condition is satisfied. Change to
The advance notice means is started based on a winning of a game ball at the second start opening during the change display of the symbols by the second design display means at least partially overlapping with the time of the advance notice. The advance notice is also given during the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means.
The game table according to appendix 18 or 19.

(Appendix 21)
There is provided an effect display means for performing both an effect display for producing a variable display of symbols by the first symbol display means and an effect display for producing a variable display of symbols by the second symbol display means. ,
The game table according to any one of appendices 18 to 20.

(Appendix 22)
When the first symbol display means is performing symbol variation display, the effect display means performs variation display of a predetermined symbol as the effect display, and the second symbol display means performs symbol variation display. When the display is performed, it is configured to display a variation of a predetermined symbol as an effect display,
The effect display means changes the symbol both when the first symbol display means stops and displays the specific symbol aspect and when the second symbol display means stops and displays the specific symbol aspect. After the display, a special design mode is stopped and displayed.
The effect display means performs a decoration effect display that produces a change display of the predetermined symbol as the effect display in addition to the change display of the predetermined symbol,
The effect display means performs the specific effect display as a part of the decoration effect display.
The gaming table according to attachment 21.

(Appendix 23)
The effect display means performs the specific effect display as a part of the change display of the predetermined symbol,
The game table according to appendix 21 or 22.

(Appendix 24)
A first symbol display means for starting a variation display of symbols when a game ball wins at the first start opening;
A game table provided with a second symbol display means for starting a variable display of symbols when a game ball wins at the second starting port;
Special gaming state starting means for starting a special gaming state when the symbol form stopped by the first symbol display means or the second symbol display means is a specific symbol aspect;
In relation to changing the size of the entry portion of the game ball of the second start port from the first size to a second size larger than the first size, The winning rate of the game ball can be changed, and when the gaming state is the first gaming state, the winning rate of the gaming ball to the second starting port is the first winning rate, and the gaming state During the second gaming state, the control means for controlling the winning rate of the game ball to the second starting port to be a second winning rate higher than the first winning rate;
When the first symbol display means stops and displays the specific symbol aspect, the first symbol display means stops the specific symbol aspect while the second symbol display means displays the symbol in a variable manner. A notice control means for controlling the display so as to notify the player of the notice with a predetermined notice probability;
The notice probability in the second gaming state is configured to be lower than the notice probability in the first gaming state.
Amusement stand.

(Appendix 25)
A game machine comprising a plurality of symbol display means for starting symbol variation display when a game ball wins at a predetermined start opening,
A special gaming state starting means for starting a special gaming state when the symbol aspect stopped by the symbol display means among the plurality of symbol display means is a specific symbol aspect;
When the first symbol display means among the plurality of symbol display means stops and displays the specific symbol aspect, the second symbol display means among the plurality of symbol display means displays the symbols in a variable manner. , Wherein the first symbol display means notifies the player that the specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed,
Amusement stand.

(Appendix 26)
The notice notification is performed before the first symbol display means starts the variable display,
The game machine as set forth in Appendix 25.

(Appendix 27)
The game area further includes a specific variable winning opening that can change the size of the entrance into which the game ball can enter from the first size to a second size larger than the first size,
The entrance size of the specific variable prize opening is changed from the first size to the second size during the special gaming state,
The game stand according to appendix 25 or 26.

(Appendix 28)
When the game ball wins at the first starting port among the predetermined starting ports and the first variation start prohibition condition is not satisfied, the symbol variation display by the first symbol display means is started. Configured to
When a game ball is won at the first start port in a state where the first variation start prohibition condition is satisfied, the first variation start prohibition condition is changed to a state in which the first variation start prohibition condition is not satisfied. First starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of first starting information for starting the display of variation of the symbols by the one symbol displaying means;
When the symbol mode determination information constituting one part or all of the first start information is specific symbol mode determination information, the specific symbol mode is displayed as the symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display means. And a symbol aspect selecting means for selecting the symbol aspect of
The notice notification is performed when the symbol mode determination information constituting a part or all of the first start information is specific symbol mode determination information.
The game table according to any one of appendices 25 to 27.

(Appendix 29)
The notice notification is performed even when a specific condition is satisfied instead of the specific symbol mode determining information constituting part or all of the first starting information. And
The game stand according to appendix 28.

(Appendix 30)
When the first variation start prohibition condition is not established, the first symbol display unit starts displaying the symbol variation using the first start information stored in the first start storage unit. If so, first start storage management means for setting the first start storage means in a state where the first start information is not stored;
When the symbol pattern determination information constituting a part or all of the predetermined first trigger information stored in the first trigger storage means is specific symbol pattern determination information Characterized in that the notice of notice is given during the symbol variation display by the first symbol display means that has started variation based on the first starting information different from the first starting information.
The game table according to appendix 28 or 29.

(Appendix 31)
The specific notification mode of the notice notification performed during the symbol variation display by the first symbol display means can be notified as the notice notification performed during the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means. Features
The game stand according to any one of appendices 25 to 30.

(Appendix 32)
A first image showing a first situation in a predetermined scenario and a second image showing a second situation that has progressed along the scenario more than the first situation can be displayed,
The symbol display by one of the first symbol display unit and the second symbol display unit prior to the start of the symbol change that causes the first symbol display unit to stop display the specific symbol mode. During the change display, the first image is displayed as the advance notice, and the advance notice is displayed during the change display of the symbol by the other design display means that has started to change after the one display means stops. The second image is displayed as a notification,
The game stand according to any one of appendices 25 to 30.

(Appendix 33)
The symbol display by one of the first symbol display unit and the second symbol display unit prior to the start of symbol variation that causes the first symbol display unit to stop display the specific symbol mode. A specific image is displayed as the advance notice during fluctuation display, and the specific image is displayed as the advance notice during display change of the symbol by the other design display means.
The game stand according to any one of appendices 25 to 32.

(Appendix 34)
A second character image can be displayed after the first character image is displayed among the plurality of character images;
The symbol display by one of the first symbol display unit and the second symbol display unit prior to the start of the symbol change that causes the first symbol display unit to stop display the specific symbol mode. During the variable display, the first character image is displayed as the advance notice, and during the symbol variation display by the other symbol display means that has started the variation after the one symbol display means stops displaying, The second character image is displayed as a notice of notice,
The game table according to any one of appendices 25 to 33.

(Appendix 35)
A first image and a second image having a different size from the first image can be displayed;
The symbol display by one of the first symbol display unit and the second symbol display unit prior to the start of the symbol change that causes the first symbol display unit to stop display the specific symbol mode. The first image is displayed as the advance notice during change display, and the second image is displayed as the advance notice during display change of the symbol by the other display means.
The game stand according to any one of appendices 25 to 34.

(Appendix 36)
When the game ball wins at the second starting port among the predetermined starting ports and the second symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means is started. Configured to
When a game ball is won at the second starting port in a state where the second variation start prohibition condition is satisfied, the second variation start prohibition condition is changed to a state where the second variation start prohibition condition is not satisfied. Second starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of second starting information for starting the display of variation of the symbols by the two symbol display means;
When the second variation start prohibition condition is not established, the second symbol display means starts the symbol variation display using the second starting information stored in the second starting storage means. And a second start storage management means for setting the second start storage means in a state in which the second start information is not stored.
When the second symbol display means stops and displays a symbol aspect other than the specific symbol aspect, the second variation start prohibition condition is not satisfied while the first variation start prohibition condition is satisfied. Change to
The second symbol display means started based on the winning of a game ball at the second starting port during the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means at least partially overlapping with the notice time. The notice notice is also given during the display of the variation of the symbol by
The game stand according to any one of appendices 28 to 35.

(Appendix 37)
A first image showing a first situation in a predetermined scenario and a second image showing a second situation that has progressed along the scenario more than the first situation can be displayed,
Based on the winning of a game ball at the second starting port during the variable display of the symbols by the second symbol display means at least partially overlapping with the display timing of the first image displayed as the advance notice. The second image is displayed as the advance notice during the display of the variation of the symbol by the second symbol display means that has started.
The game stand according to appendix 36.

(Appendix 38)
Started based on winning of a game ball at the second starting opening during the display of the variation of the symbol by the second symbol display means at least partially overlapping the display time of the specific image displayed as the advance notice. The display of the specific image is performed as the advance notice during the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means.
The game stand according to appendix 36.

(Appendix 39)
A first image and a second image having a different size from the first image can be displayed;
Based on the winning of a game ball at the second starting port during the variable display of the symbols by the second symbol display means at least partially overlapping with the display timing of the first image displayed as the advance notice. The second image is displayed as the advance notice during the display of the variation of the symbol by the second symbol display means that has started.
The game stand according to appendix 36.

(Appendix 40)
There is further provided an effect display means for performing both an effect display for producing a variable display of symbols by the first symbol display means and an effect display for producing a variable display of symbols by the second symbol display means,
The effect display means performs the advance notice by performing a specific effect display during the effect display of the variation display of the symbol by the second symbol display means,
The game stand according to any one of appendices 25 to 39.

(Appendix 41)
The effect display means includes:
When the first symbol display means is performing symbol variation display, the predetermined symbol variation display is performed as an effect display, and the second symbol display means is performing symbol variation display. Is configured to display a variation of a predetermined symbol as an effect display,
The effect display means changes the symbol both when the first symbol display means stops and displays the specific symbol aspect and when the second symbol display means stops and displays the specific symbol aspect. After the display, a special design mode is stopped and displayed.
The effect display means includes:
In addition to the change display of the predetermined symbol, a decoration effect display that produces a change display of the predetermined symbol is performed as the effect display.
The effect display means performs the specific effect display as a part of the decoration effect display,
The game stand according to appendix 40.

(Appendix 42)
The effect display means performs the specific effect display as a part of the change display of the predetermined symbol,
The game stand according to appendix 40 or 41.

(Appendix 43)
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting port, the first specific is performed by displaying the symbol variation over one of the predetermined long variation time and the short variation time shorter than the long variation time. A symbol display means for executing a series of symbol fluctuation stop display for stopping and displaying one type of stop symbol mode among the plurality of types of stop symbol modes including the symbol pattern and the second specific symbol pattern;
When the stop symbol form stopped and displayed by the symbol variation stop display is the first specific symbol aspect, the first special game state (for example, 15R jackpot) that gives the player an advantageous game value by changing the game state The game state is changed to (gaming state), and when the symbol mode stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display is the second specific symbol mode, the second special gaming state that gives the player an advantageous game value without changing the gaming state Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to (for example, small hit gaming state);
When the symbol display means stops and displays the first specific symbol aspect by the symbol fluctuation stop display, the symbol display means is highly likely to stop display the first specific symbol aspect before the stop display. Notice that suggests,
When the symbol display means stops and displays the second specific symbol aspect by the symbol variation stop display, the symbol display means is highly likely to stop display the first specific symbol aspect before the stop display. A notice notifying means for performing a false notice that suggests,
The symbol display means displays the variation of the symbol, and when one of the first specific symbol aspect and the second specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed, the one specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed. The specific symbol variation display in the specific symbol variation stop display is performed over the long variation time,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the notice notification means performs the notice notice or the false notice notice in a plurality of consecutive symbol change stop displays with the specific symbol change stop display as the last.

  By doing so, the last variation display can be performed for a long variation time (for example, 40 seconds) when performing multiple notifications or false notifications. Compared to the case where the last variation display has a short variation time (for example, 5 seconds), it is possible to prevent the effect of the announcement notification or the false announcement notification from being reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. . In addition, since the notice notification or the false notice notice is made, the player can recognize that the first special game state or the second special game state that is hardly advantageous is started, so that the advantage is high. The player can be interested in whether or not the first special game state is started, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, even if the first special gaming state is not started after performing the false advance notice indicating the start of the first special gaming state a plurality of times, the second special gaming state is started instead. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating as compared to the case where an advantageous state does not occur after the false notice.

(Appendix 44)
As an effect including a victory effect, an effect based on a successful story (for example, victory or the appearance of the main character) and an effect based on a failure story (for example, defeat or the appearance of an enemy character) are prepared, and one of these effects is selected. In the case of winning, an effect based on a failure story may be performed. That is,
The symbol display means selects and displays either an effect based on a successful story or an effect based on a failure story before stopping and displaying the stop symbol aspect, and before stopping and displaying the second specific symbol aspect, A game table characterized by selecting and displaying an effect based on a failed story.
It may be. By doing so, it can be emphasized that the small hit is gusset.

(Appendix 45)
In addition, as one of the notice announcement effects, in the first notice in the case of continuous notice, a notice that presents the player with specific conditions such as “win the enemy within a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, four times)!” (Advance notice in mission mode), if 15R jackpot, the last symbol change stop display will give a notice that meets the specific conditions such as winning the enemy, and if small hit, the last symbol change stop display the enemy A notice that does not satisfy a specific condition, such as defeat, may or may not be given. That is,
The notice notification means includes
In the first symbol variation stop display of a plurality of consecutive symbol variation stop displays with the specific symbol variation stop display as the last, a specific condition presentation advance notice for presenting a specific condition to the player is performed, and the specific symbol variation stop display is performed. In the last symbol variation stop display of a plurality of consecutive symbol variation stop displays, the first specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed, a specific condition establishment advance notice is given to satisfy the specific condition, and the first symbol variation stop display is performed. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific condition establishment advance notice is not performed when the specific symbol form is stopped and displayed.
It may be. By doing so, the player is interested in whether or not the specific condition is satisfied by presenting the specific condition, and can concentrate on the game.

(Appendix 46)
In addition, when the result of the last variation display of the continuous variation display is a small hit with a short variation time (2R big hit camouflaged small hit), a notice for presenting a specific condition may be given. That is,
The game table characterized in that the notice notification means performs the specific condition presentation notice notification when the symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol form by the symbol variation stop display.
It may be. Here, when the specific condition presentation notice is made based on the small win, the notice of establishment of the specific condition is not given, so the last variation time is shortened in order to make the player recognize early that it is a notice of gasse. It ends with a small hit that is a variable time. Therefore, the player can be switched so as to promptly expect the next change from the discouragement of being a gusset.

(Appendix 47)
Applying specific reach lose eyes (combination of decorative symbols from the combination of jackpot symbols) such as “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” and “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 5” Also good. Also, it may not be displayed in case of loss. That is,
The stop symbol mode includes a plurality of symbols in which the display order of the variable display is predetermined,
In the first specific design aspect, all the designs are the same,
In the second specific symbol aspect, the symbols other than the specific one symbol are the same, and the display order of the specific one symbol is before or after the other symbols,
The game stand characterized in that the stop symbol aspect excluding the first specific symbol aspect and the second specific symbol aspect are different from the first specific symbol aspect and the second specific symbol aspect.
It may be. By doing this, all the symbols are the same as the jackpot, so there is a sense of unity and the appearance is beautiful. In addition, since two symbols are the same for a small hit and one symbol is a symbol before and after the same symbol, an impression close to a big hit can be given. Furthermore, since all the symbols are different or two are the same and one is a symbol other than the front and back of the same symbol (two or more frames are shifted), it is possible to give an impression far from the big hit. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

(Appendix 48)
When a specific small hit (for example, 2R big hit camouflaged symbol) is displayed as a decorative symbol, a specific reach lose eye may be applied to the combination of the small hit symbols. That is,
The stop symbol mode includes a plurality of symbols in which the display order of the variable display is predetermined,
The second specific design aspect includes a first design aspect and a second design aspect,
The special game state transition means starts the third special game state on condition that the display of the first symbol aspect and the end of the second special game state are completed,
In the second symbol aspect, the game table is characterized in that symbols other than one particular symbol are the same, and the display order of the one particular symbol is before or after the other symbols.
It may be. By doing so, it is possible to give an impression close to jackpot to the jackpot for 2R jackpot camouflage.

(Appendix 49)
In the decorative symbol display device 110 shown in FIG. 2, a left symbol display area 110a, a middle symbol display area 110b, and a right symbol display area 110c are prepared, and a decorative symbol is displayed in each area. Here, the decorative symbol displayed in the left symbol display area 110a is referred to as the first symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 110b is referred to as the second symbol, and the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 110c. Will be referred to as the third symbol. In the aspect in Supplementary Note 7, the decorative symbol display device 110 displays the fourth symbol separately from these first to third symbols.

In the decorative symbol display device 110, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol symbol display areas 110a, 110b, 110b, and 110c. In addition, the fourth symbol is displayed at a position where the lower left corner of the effect display area 110d provided below these areas 110a to 110c is inconspicuous. In the fourth symbol, variable display for switching between monochromatic displays such as red, blue, and green is performed. For example, the decoration symbol display 110 in the case of winning a small hit ends the variation display of the decoration symbol, the first symbol 1101 of the decoration 7 is displayed in the left symbol display area 110a, and the decoration symbol display 110b in the middle symbol display area 110b. 6 second symbols 1102 are displayed, and the third symbol 1103 of decoration 7 is displayed in the right symbol display area 110c. Also, the 4th symbol also finishes the variable display and continues to light red. Further, for example, the decorative symbol display device 110 in the case of losing also ends the variable symbol display, the first symbol 1101 of the ornament 7 is displayed in the left symbol display area 110a, and the ornament 6 is displayed in the middle symbol display area 110b. The second symbol 1102 is displayed, and the third symbol 1103 of the decoration 7 is displayed in the right symbol display area 110c. That is, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, which is the same as the combination of the decorative symbols when winning a small hit. On the other hand, the 4th symbol which has finished the variable display continues to be lit in blue. That is,
The stop symbol form includes a plurality of first symbols and second symbols in which the display order of the variable display is predetermined,
In the second specific symbol mode, the first symbol other than the specific one first symbol is the same, and the display order of the specific one first symbol is before or after the other first symbol. And the said 2nd pattern is a 1st aspect,
The symbol stop mode in which the special gaming state starting means does not start a gaming state advantageous to the player is the same as the first symbol other than the specific one first symbol, and the specific one first symbol. The game table is characterized in that the display order is before or after the other first symbol and the second symbol is different from the first mode.
It may be. By doing so, since the difference between the small win and the stop display of the loss is only the 4th symbol, it can be difficult to determine that the small win is won. In addition, in the case of performing false continuous notice based on the small hit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the false continuous notice is performed based on the small hit.

(Appendix 50)
If the acquisition of the corresponding random number is the first small hit that becomes the condition for starting the pseudo-continuous, the variable winning opening 130 is opened once, and the acquisition of the corresponding random number does not become the condition for starting the pseudo-continuous (the hidden probability variation is changed). In the case of the second small hit (for smelling), the variable winning opening 130 may be opened a plurality of times (the same number of times as when the 2R probability is changed). That is,
The second specific design aspect includes a third design aspect,
When the symbol display means stops displaying the third symbol aspect, the variation time of the variation display is the short variation time,
The special game state transition means starts a third special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the symbol display means stops and displays the third symbol aspect,
The second special gaming state includes a large special gaming state and a small special gaming state that is less advantageous than the large special gaming state,
The special gaming state transition means starts the small special gaming state after stopping and displaying the first symbol mode (for example, a small hit by false continuous notice), and the second symbol mode (2R large bonus hit camouflaged small hit) Alternatively, the gaming machine is characterized in that the large special gaming state is started after the third symbol aspect (2R probability variation jackpot) is stopped and displayed.
It may be. In this way, when the first symbol form is stopped and displayed, the first special gaming state is not started and the small special gaming state is started while performing the effect expected by the player by the false continuous notice. For this reason, a player's discouragement by not starting a 1st special game state can be reduced. When the first symbol mode is stopped and displayed, the large special gaming state is started in the same manner as when the third symbol mode is stopped and displayed. The player can expect whether or not.

(Appendix 51)
One or all of the first symbol forms (small hits by false continuous notice) will stop the special figure if one or all of the second symbol aspects (small 2R jackpots) Close to the mode, one or all of the second symbol modes may be closer to the stop mode of the special graph at the time of 2R probability change than one or all of the first symbol modes. For example, as shown in FIG. 3 (a), if the special figure display device 114 displays a symbol using a 7-segment LED, the number of segments and the lighting position are close to the special figure stop mode in the case of deviation. Alternatively, it may be close to the stop mode of the special figure at the time of 2R probability change. That is,
One or all of the first design aspects are closer to the special feature stop mode when not advantageous to the player than one or all of the second design aspects,
One or all of the second symbol aspects are closer to the third symbol aspect than one or all of the first symbol aspects.
It may be. By doing so, since the second symbol aspect is closer to the third symbol aspect than the first symbol aspect, the player can misidentify the second symbol aspect as the third symbol aspect, and the player The game can be continued. In addition, since the first symbol aspect is closer to the lost symbol aspect than the second symbol aspect, the first symbol aspect can have an impression far from the big hit.

(Appendix 52)
In the first special figure starting port 126 and the second special figure starting port 128, the distribution of the first small hit (the opportunity of continuous notice) and the second small hit (latent confusion) at the time of winning the small hit may be different. The second special figure starting port 128 may have a higher probability of being assigned to the first small hit than the first special figure starting port 126. That is,
The symbol display means includes a first symbol display means and a second symbol display means,
The start opening includes a first start opening, and a second start opening that is changeable between a state in which a game ball is easily won and a state in which a game ball is difficult to win,
The first symbol display means performs a variable stop display when a game ball enters the first start opening, and the second symbol display means stops a change when a game ball enters the second start opening. Display
A gaming machine characterized in that the second symbol display means is more likely to stop display the first symbol aspect than the first symbol display means.
It may be. By doing so, the second symbol display means can show the player more continuous notices than the first symbol display means.

(Appendix 53)
The second special figure starting port 128 may have a higher probability of continuous notice without being based on the small hit than the first special figure starting port 126. Note that the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may perform a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/128) if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, and may perform a continuous notice based on the winning. That is,
The notice notification means performs the notice notice based on winning a lottery with a predetermined probability, and the symbol variation stop display based on the second symbol display means has the predetermined probability rather than the first symbol display means. A game stand that has a high probability of winning a lottery.
It may be. By doing so, the second symbol display means can show the player more continuous notices than the first symbol display means.

  Note that the type of special figure is not limited to that shown in FIG. For example, all combinations of conditions such as the number of rounds of jackpot (2R or 15R), presence / absence of time reduction, presence / absence of probability change may be adopted.

(Appendix 54)
Moreover, as an aspect having the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the first special figure starting port (non-VIP) and the third special figure starting port (VIP) corresponding to the special figure 1 are provided, and the special figure 2 is also provided. Probability of starting the continuous notice when the second special figure starting port (electrical chew) is provided and the random number extracted in the third starting port winning is a specific small hit judgment value is the random number extracted in the first starting port winning May be higher than the probability of starting the continuous notice in the case of a specific small hit judgment value. That is,
The start port includes a third start port,
The first symbol display means performs a variable stop display when a game ball enters the third starting port,
It is possible for the notice notifying means to perform the notice notification in the symbol change stop display based on the entry of the game ball into the third start opening rather than the symbol change stop display based on the game ball entering into the first start opening. A game table characterized by high performance.
It may be. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game characteristic with a sharpness such that a direction with a sense of expectation is more easily developed when winning at the third starting opening than when winning at the first starting opening. There is.

  It should be noted that, even if the special figure starting port that is a specific small hit condition is the first special figure starting port or the third special figure starting port, the symbol indicating that the specific small hit is won The lottery for determining the symbol variation time for notifying the combination is performed under the same conditions.

(Appendix 55)
In addition, in the first start port and the third start port, the third start port may be harder to win the game ball than the first start port. That is,
A game table characterized in that it is more difficult for the third starting port to win a game ball than the first starting port.
It may be. In this way, the third starting opening is harder to win, so it makes it easier to give notices that are difficult to select in the symbol variation stop display based on the first starting opening winning. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that an advance notice may be made, and there may be a case where the player can be interested in winning a prize at the third starting port.

(Appendix 56)
The first start opening (for example, the first special figure start opening 126), the easy-to-win state (for example, the general high probability state) that is relatively easy to win, and the difficult-to-win state (for example, the low general probability) In a game machine having a second starting port (for example, the second special figure starting port 128) that takes one of the following states:
Lottery means for performing a lottery of a profit amount to be given to a player based on winning one of the first starting port and the second starting port;
The lottery means notifies the lottery result of the lottery, and the lottery result based on the winning to the second starting port is notified of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first starting port. Lottery result notifying means for giving priority over notifying the result;
Before informing the lottery result, a notice notifying means for performing notice notification including notice information that makes the player expect that the lottery result is an advantageous result for the player, and
The notice notification means includes
When the notice of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first start port when the state of the second start port is the easy-to-win state, the second start port state is the winning prize. A gaming machine characterized in that the advance notification is performed by making the transition to a difficult state one of the conditions for performing the advance notification.

(Appendix 57)
In the game stand described in appendix 56,
Before the lottery means performing the lottery, the lottery result is determined as to what kind of lottery result will be determined, and whether or not the notice notification is to be performed is determined based on the result of the determination. With means,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the notice information means performs notice information for a lottery result determined when the notice information determination means determines to perform the notice information.

(Appendix 58)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 56 to 57,
The notice notification means includes
A gaming table characterized by providing notice of a lottery result of a lottery based on winning at the second starting opening even if the second starting opening is in an easy winning state.

(Appendix 59)
In the game stand described in Appendix 57,
When the state of the second start port is in the easy-to-win state, the advance notification is performed for the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first start port determined by the advance notification determining unit. Provided with a notice notification determination storage unit,
The notice notification means includes
A game table for performing a notice for a lottery result of a lottery based on winning of a game ball at the first start port based on the memory of the notice / notification determination storage unit.

(Appendix 60)
In the game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 56 to 59,
A special game in which the gaming machine has a lottery result given by the lottery means, but the profit amount to be given to the player is increased although the state of the second starting port becomes the difficult-to-win state. To the state,
The notice notification means includes
The notice of the lottery result based on the winning at the first starting port is used as a condition for the notice of the fact that the special gaming state has ended, and the notice of notice is performed. A game table that features

(Appendix 61)
In the game stand described in Appendix 60,
In this gaming machine, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result, the state of the second starting port becomes the easy-to-win state until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the special gaming state is finished. And
The notice notification means includes
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result, the notice for the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the first start opening is notified, and the notice for the end of the special gaming state is given. One of the conditions for performing, and in addition to one of the conditions for performing the advance notice that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game table is characterized in that the advance notice is provided.

(Appendix 62)
In the game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 56 to 61,
The advance notification means includes instruction means for instructing to perform the advance notice, and execution means for executing the advance notice in response to an instruction from the instruction means;
This game table
A first control unit including the lottery means and the instruction means;
A second control unit different from the first control unit, including the execution means;
With
The instruction means includes
When the state of the second start port is the easy-to-win state, the advance notification is not instructed to the execution means, and the state of the second start port has shifted to the difficult-to-win state. The gaming machine is characterized in that this is one of the conditions for instructing the advance notice, and the advance means is instructed to the execution means.

(Appendix 63)
In the game stand described in Appendix 62,
The second controller is
In addition to the advance notice, it is provided with production means for producing an effect that enhances the fun of the game,
The production means is
When the second start port is in the easy-to-win state, as the effect, the execution means performs an effect that leads to a notice to be performed when the state of the second start port becomes the difficult-to-win state. A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
The notification content of the second notification notification may be determined based on the notification content of the first notification notification. That is,
Lottery means for performing a lottery of a profit amount to be given to the player based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition has been established;
Symbol display means for performing symbol variation display for displaying a stop symbol representing the result of the lottery after performing symbol variation display;
Different from the first notice effect and the first notice effect that the player expects the result of the lottery to be an advantageous result for the player, the result of the lottery is an advantageous result for the player. Notice effecting means for executing a second notice effect that causes the player to expect that there is,
With
The notice effect means is
A game table, wherein the content of the effect in the other notice effect is determined based on the effect content in either one of the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

(Appendix 65)
In addition, the first notice notification may be a notice given at the time of change, and the second notice notice may be a notice given before the change. That is,
In the game stand described in appendix 64,
The notice effect means is
As the first notice effect, the changing notice effect is executed during the symbol change display in the symbol change display, and as the second notice effect, before the symbol display means starts the symbol change display. A game stand characterized by performing a pre-change notice effect.

(Appendix 66)
Further, the time for a series of symbol variation display may be fixed. That is,
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 64 to 65,
In the symbol variation display, comprising symbol variation time determining means for determining a variation time in which the symbol is variably displayed,
The symbol display means
The symbol variation display is performed over the variation time determined by the symbol variation time determining means,
The notice effect means is
A game table, wherein the effect content in the other notice effect is determined without changing the variation time determined by the symbol variation time determination means.

(Appendix 67)
Further, the pre-change notice may be performed based on the prefetch determination. That is,
In the game stand described in Appendix 65,
Before the lottery means performs the lottery, the lottery means comprises pre-reading means for determining what kind of lottery result the lottery result will be,
The game table, wherein the notice effect means determines the contents of the effect in the pre-change notice effect with reference to the result of determination by the prefetch means.

(Appendix 68)
The series of symbol variations may include pre-reach variations and post-reach variations. That is,
In the game stand described in appendix 65 or 67,
The symbol display means displays the symbol variation in the initial mode immediately after starting the symbol variation display, and displays the symbol variation in the reach mode before displaying the stop symbol based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Is what
The notice effect means performs the pre-reach notice effect while the symbol change display according to the reach mode is performed while the symbol change display according to the initial mode is being performed as the changing notice effect. During the course of the event, the advance notice effect during the reach is executed, and the effect content in the other notice effect is determined based on the effect content in either the advance notice effect before reach and the notice effect before the change. A characteristic game stand.

(Appendix 69)
Further, the degree of notification may be adjusted. That is,
In the game stand according to appendixes 64 to 68,
The notice effect means is
A game characterized in that the first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed by varying the degree of effect between the first notice effect and the second notice effect. Stand.

(Appendix 70)
In the game stand described in appendix 69,
The notice effect unit is a combination of the first notice effect and the second notice effect in which the difference between the effect effect in the first notice effect and the effect effect in the second notice effect is small. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of executing the combination of the first notice effect and the second notice effect that have a larger difference than the probability of executing the combination.

(Appendix 71)
Further, the notice content may be a notice time. That is,
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 64 to 70,
The notice effect means is
A game table, wherein the other effect time is determined based on the effect time of one of the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

(Appendix 72)
The pre-reach notice may be a so-called pseudo-ream. That is,
In the game stand described in appendix 68,
The notice effecting means is a pseudo stop display that makes it appear as if the symbol stop display has been performed while the symbol variation display according to the initial mode is being performed as the pre-reach notice effect, and the symbol variation Pseudo-variation start that makes it appear as if the display has started is performed one or more times, and the pseudo-stop that makes the player expect that the result of the lottery is advantageous to the player before each pseudo-stop display A game stand for executing a previous notice effect, and further determining the number of times of the pseudo stop display based on the effect contents of the pre-change notice effect.

(Appendix 73)
In the game stand described in appendix 64,
Before the lottery means performs the lottery, the lottery means comprises pre-reading means for determining what kind of lottery result the lottery result will be,
The notice effect means is
As the first notice effect, the specific symbol change notice effect is executed during the symbol change display in the specific symbol change display for displaying the stop symbol representing the lottery result determined by the prefetching means, and the second notice is given. As an effect, a prior symbol variation notice effect is executed every time before a stop symbol is displayed in a predetermined symbol variation display of the determined number of prior symbol variation displays performed one or more times before the specific symbol variation display. A game stand characterized by being.

(Appendix 74)
In the game stand described in appendix 72,
In the specific symbol variation display, the symbol display means displays the symbol variation in the initial form immediately after the symbol variation display is started, and before displaying the stop symbol based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. It is a variable display of the design in a reach manner,
The notice effecting means executes the pre-reach notice effect while the symbol change display according to the reach mode is performed while the symbol change display according to the initial mode is being performed as the specific symbol change notice effect. During the period, the pre-reach notice effect is executed, and the effect content in the other notice effect is determined based on the effect content in one of the pre-reach notice effect and the preceding symbol variation notice effect. A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
In the game stand described in appendix 74,
The notice effecting means is a pseudo stop display that makes it appear as if the symbol stop display has been performed while the symbol variation display according to the initial mode is being performed as the pre-reach notice effect, and the symbol variation Pseudo-variation start that makes it appear as if the display has started is performed one or more times, and the pseudo-stop that makes the player expect that the result of the lottery is advantageous to the player before each pseudo-stop display A game machine that executes a previous notice effect, and further determines the number of times of the pseudo stop display based on the effect contents of the preceding symbol change notice effect.

(Appendix 76)
In the game stand described in Appendix 75,
The game table characterized in that the notice effect means determines the number of times of performing the pseudo stop display based on the number of times of performing the preceding symbol variation notice effect.

(Appendix α)
You may provide the special figure fluctuation | variation time change part which changes the fluctuation | variation time of a special figure when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The special figure variation time changing unit may change the variation time based on an input of an operation unit operable by the player.

  Furthermore, when changing so that fluctuation time may be shortened, this special figure fluctuation time change part may make a shortening form different based on the movable aspect of a movable object. For example, when the initial position before the start of the shutter fluctuation is in the fully open state, when the shutter is fully open, the fluctuation time may be shortened more than when the shutter is fully closed. In this case, when the shutter is fully closed, it is performed in order to earn time from the fully closed position to the fully opened position that is the initial position. In addition, you may make it vary the symbol fixed display time based on the predetermined aspect of the movable aspect of a movable object.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the special figure fluctuation time changing unit can make the change to make the special figure fluctuation time longer than before the change only for the fluctuation of the special figure 2. Also good. In this case, the lottery shown in FIG. 2 may make it easier to obtain a lottery result more advantageous than the lottery shown in FIG. Further, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 may be performed with priority over the fluctuation of the special figure 1. As a result, for example, when it becomes easy to win a special figure 2 starting opening corresponding to special figure 2 in a normal figure high probability state or the like, if the player can continue to change at the special figure 2 starting opening, the special figure Since one lottery may be performed and an unfavorable jackpot may be won, it is most advantageous for the player to continue the game without taking a break. But sometimes you want to take a break. Therefore, only when the special figure 2 fluctuates, the special figure fluctuation time by the special figure fluctuation time changing unit can be changed to be longer than before the change. It should be noted that the special figure change time by the special figure change time changing unit may be changed to be longer than before the change, only when the special figure 2 is changing and during the short-time game. Here, the change in the special figure change time by the special figure change time changing unit during the change of the special figure 1 is not allowed to be made longer than before the change. This is because the number of times drops, and the operation of the amusement store becomes worse.

  In addition, in the game stand provided with special figure 1 and special figure 2, special figure 2 is preferentially changed over special figure 1, and special figure 2 is easy to obtain a lottery result more advantageous than special figure 1. The change in which the special figure change time by the time changing unit is longer than before the change is in a state where it is easy to win the special figure 2 starting opening, and the special figure 1 is changing, and the special figure 2 starting opening is changed. It may be performed only when there is no hold. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, two) of suspensions of special figure 2 are accumulated during the fluctuation of special figure 1, the fluctuation time of special figure 1 may be shortened. If it is easy to win the special figure 2, it is not desirable that the lottery in the special figure 1 is performed. Therefore, if the special drawing 1 is not held and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed, the lottery result for the lottery It is desirable that the fluctuation of the special map 1 for notification is as long as possible. However, if there are more than a certain number of holds in Special Figure 2, it is better not to stay long or to shorten it.

(Appendix A)
Lottery means for performing a lottery of a profit amount to be given to a player when a predetermined lottery start condition is satisfied and a predetermined lottery prohibition condition is not satisfied;
Directing means for performing,
Production determining means for determining the aspect of the production,
When the lottery means satisfies the lottery start condition and the lottery prohibition condition, the lottery right can be held up to a predetermined number, and the lottery means until the right to hold is lost. Each time the prohibition condition is not established, a lottery based on one pending right will be conducted,
The game table characterized in that the effect determining means determines the aspect of the effect based on how much the right has increased within a predetermined period.

  The effects here include various effects, for example, effects that are relatively likely to win and effects that have a relatively long effect time. Moreover, the aspect of the effect includes an aspect in which the effect is not performed, and the effect determining means may determine whether or not the effect means performs the effect.

  According to the game stand described in appendix A, since the aspect of the effect is determined based on the hold state, it is possible to improve the gameability and maintain the player's willingness to play.

In addition, each time a lottery is performed by the lottery means, a notification means for notifying the result of the lottery is provided,
The effect determining means may determine an aspect of the effect that the notifying means expects the player before the notifying means notifies the result that the lottery result is advantageous to the player. .

  The effect here is a so-called notice effect, but the effect here is not limited to the notice effect.

  Further, the effect determining means may determine the aspect of the effect based on how much the right has increased within a period from the time when the lottery means last lottery to the current lottery. .

  Here, the period from the last lottery means to the current lottery, the period from the last decision by the production determination means to the current decision, and the fact that the lottery prohibition condition has been established is not established. It corresponds to the period until.

Furthermore, the aspect of the effect determining means may be an aspect in which the aspect of the effect is more easily determined as an aspect of performing the effect as the right increases within a predetermined period.
If the number of increases in the right within the predetermined period is the same as the aspect of the effect, the effect determining means is the number of the rights that the lottery means has held before the previous lottery. It may be an aspect that is more easily determined as an aspect in which the production is performed, as the number of is increased.

  When the increase of the right, that is, the right can be held up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times), the former mode includes a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 4, 5 to 8, 2 to 6). The number of times that the right increases within a predetermined period of time, the easier it is to determine the mode of performing the performance. The latter mode includes a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 4 times, 5 to 8 times). The number of times that the number of reservations is larger in the second to sixth times) includes a mode in which the effect is more easily determined.

  The greater the number of rights held, the greater the number of lotteries, so the player's expectation tends to increase.In these aspects, the tendency can be used to increase the game and Can maintain a willingness to play.

A main control unit including the lottery means;
A sub-control unit including the effect determining means,
When the lottery performs the lottery, the main control unit displays information indicating how much the number of reserved rights has increased within the period from the last lottery to the current lottery together with the lottery result. Which is sent to the sub-control unit,
The sub-control unit may determine the aspect of the effect based on the information by the effect determining means.

  The sub-control unit only needs to operate based on the information from the main control unit. The sub-control unit receives the information in addition to the information directly received from the main control unit. Also included are those which receive instructions based on the information from other control units and operate according to the instructions. Even if it operates according to the said instruction | indication, if it traces the origin, it will correspond to what operate | moves based on the said information.

  Here, for example, the lottery start condition may be based on a game ball entering a predetermined start port. Further, the notifying means notifies the result of the lottery in a combination of symbols, and after displaying the symbols in a variable form in which the symbols are not determined before the notification, the symbols are displayed in a fixed manner (stop display). If the result of the lottery is notified, and if the result of the lottery is a predetermined result, and the effect mode is displayed following the confirmation mode, the lottery prohibition condition is You may include on condition that the alerting | reporting means is displaying in the aspect in any one of the said fluctuation | variation form, the said fixed aspect, and the said production | presentation aspect.

(Appendix B)
This is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation corresponding to a result of the determination of success / failure on the condition of entering a predetermined starting area and capable of performing symbol variation display to stop display after performing symbol variation display. And
Directing means for performing,
Production determining means for determining the mode of the production,
When the symbol variation display is performed at least when entering the predetermined starting area, it is possible to suspend the start of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means,
The effect determining means determines how the effect mode has increased according to how much the number of suspensions for which the start of the symbol variation display has been suspended within the period from the previous determination of success / failure to the current determination of success / failure. A game machine characterized in that it is determined based on this.

(Appendix C)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix B,
First control means including at least first determination means for determining whether or not a ball has entered the starting area;
Second control means including at least the effect determination means,
The first control means and the second control means are provided on separate substrates,
The gaming machine characterized in that, based on the command received from the first control means, the effect determining means determines an aspect of a pre-read effect directed to the result of the determination.

(Appendix D)
A game machine as described in Appendix C,
A gaming table characterized in that the pre-reading effect can be executed when the result of the determination is a result of determination that is advantageous for the player and a predetermined notice condition is satisfied. .

(Appendix E)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix D,
A game characterized in that the prefetch effect can be executed even when the result of the determination is a result of determination that is unfavorable to the player and a predetermined notice condition is satisfied. Stand.

(Appendix F)
The game stand described in Appendix E,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined notice condition is a condition established by winning a predetermined lottery.

(Appendix G)
It is a gaming machine described in Appendix F,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined lottery is a lottery in which a winning probability is different depending on a case where the advantageous winning / failing determination result is obtained and a case where the disadvantageous winning / failing determination result is obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Game board 110 Ornamental symbol display device 112 Universal figure display device 114 2nd special figure display device 118 2nd special figure reservation lamp 122 General winning opening 124 Universal figure start opening 126 1st special figure start opening 128 2nd special Figure starting port 130 Variable winning port 198 First special figure display device 199 First special figure holding lamp 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 Sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
650 power management device

Claims (14)

Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display when the symbol variation condition is satisfied;
Control means capable of controlling at least the symbol display means;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing a prefetch notice when the notice execution condition is satisfied;
In a game machine equipped with
The first symbol display means of the symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display when the first symbol variation condition of the symbol variation conditions is satisfied,
The second symbol display means of the symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display when a second symbol variation condition of the symbol variation conditions is satisfied,
When the first symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display, the control means is capable of controlling to suspend the start of symbol variation display by the first symbol display unit,
When the second symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display, the control means is capable of controlling to suspend the start of symbol variation display by the second symbol display unit,
When the control means starts the symbol variation display being held, if the symbol variation display start is suspended for both of the symbol display means, the symbol by the first symbol display means Control that preferentially starts symbol variation display by the second symbol display means over variation display is possible,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice as a first continuous notice,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice as a second continuous notice,
The pre-reading notice means interrupts the symbol fluctuation display by the second symbol display means before the end of the first consecutive notice because the second symbol fluctuation condition is satisfied during the first successive notice. When executed, the first continuous notice can be executed even during the symbol variation display,
The prefetch notice means is capable of continuously executing the second continuous notice until a second number of symbol fluctuation display less than the first number of times,
The prefetch notice means has at least a function capable of continuously executing the first continuous notice even in the first number of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of Claim 1,
The second number of times is the maximum number of times that the start of the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means can be suspended,
The pre-reading advance notice means performs the first continuous notice even in the symbol variation display of the added number obtained by adding the maximum number of times that the start of the symbol variation display by the first symbol display means can be suspended to the predetermined number of times. A game machine having at least a function that can be continuously executed. In the game stand of Claim 2,
When the second symbol variation condition is satisfied during the first continuous notice, the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means is interrupted and executed, and only the number of symbol variation displays executed by the interrupt is performed. A game table characterized in that the first continuous notice can be executed even if the symbol variation display exceeds the number of additions. In the game stand of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The second number of times is 4,
The first number of times is 5,
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The first symbol display means is capable of executing the first symbol variation display of the symbol variation display when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied,
The second symbol display means is capable of executing a second symbol variation display of the symbol variation display when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied,
When the first symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display, the control means is capable of controlling to suspend the start of the first symbol variation display,
The control means is capable of controlling to suspend the start of the second symbol variation display when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display. Stand. In the game stand of Claims 1 thru | or 5,
The symbol variation display is to stop and display the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of the success / failure after performing the symbol variation display,
The advance notice execution condition is a case where the result of the success / failure determination to be the target of the prefetch notice is a specific success / failure determination result, and at least holds when the first advance notice execution condition is satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of Claim 6,
The first notice execution condition is established at least when the first notice lottery is won,
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of any one of Claims 6 thru | or 7,
The advance notice execution condition is a case where the result of the go / no-go determination to be the target of the pre-reading notice is a different go / no-go determination result from the specific determination result, and when the second advance notice execution condition is satisfied, At least
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of Claim 8,
The second notice execution condition is at least satisfied when the second notice lottery is won.
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9,
The pre-reading notice is executed with a predetermined probability.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
The symbol variation display is to stop and display the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of the success / failure after performing the symbol variation display,
The control means is a first control means including at least a go / no-go judgment means capable of performing the go / no-go judgment,
Second control means capable of at least executing control based on a command from the first control means;
The second control means is provided on one or more substrates different from the first control means,
The second control means includes at least determination means for determining whether or not to perform the prefetch notice,
The case where the notice execution condition is satisfied is a case where the determination unit determines that the prefetch notice is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The pre-reading notice can be executed as a one-time notice that starts and ends during one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of Claim 12,
The one-shot notice can be executed during the symbol variation display in which the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not to be the target of the prefetch notice is stopped and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of any one of Claims 1 thru | or 13,
The pre-reading notice means can also execute a fake continuous notice as a first notice of the first notice, with a false notice as a subject of notice,
The pre-reading notice means can also execute a fake continuous notice as a second continuous notice, with a false target being noticed,
A game stand characterized by that.